Operating instructions

vario TOC cube

vario TOC select
TOC/TNb Analyzer

Version 27.08.2018

Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
 Copyright ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
All rights reserved

This document contains proprietary information of Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH. Reprint is

prohibited.

Due to continued product development this information may change without notice. The information
and intellectual property contained herein is confidential between Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
and the client and remains the exclusive property of Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH. If you find
any problems in the documentation, please report them to us. Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
does not warrant that this document is error-free.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a data storage system, or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior
written permission of Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH.

Windows®, Windows XP®, Windows 7® and Windows 10®are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

MS-Excel® und MS-Access® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH

Elementar-Straße 1
63505 Langenselbold
Germany
+49 (0) 6184 9393 0
E-Mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.elementar.de

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Inhalt 3

Contents

CHAPTER 1 General 11
About this document.................................................................................................................................... 12
Display conventions .................................................................................................................................... 13
General information on the operating instructions ....................................................................................... 13

CHAPTER 2 Basic security settings 15

Working with the operating instructions ....................................................................................................... 16
Representation of safety instructions .......................................................................................................... 16
Safety instructions ....................................................................................................................................... 16
Instructions for disposal of consumables ..................................................................................................... 17
Intended use of the instrument .................................................................................................................... 17
Warning: residual risks ................................................................................................................................ 19
Safety devices in the analyzer ..................................................................................................................... 20
Warning signs on the analyzer .................................................................................................................... 22
Warning: changes to the instrument ............................................................................................................ 23
Required user knowledge and skills ............................................................................................................ 23
Required personal safety equipment ........................................................................................................... 23
Warning notes during operation .................................................................................................................. 24

CHAPTER 3 Understanding the instrument and planning its use 31

Layout and mode of functioning .................................................................................................................. 32
Functional units ................................................................................................................................ 33
Processes in the instrument during a measurement ................................................................................... 37
Sample insertion and initiation of measurement .............................................................................. 38
Substance digestion and preparation of the reaction gas mixture .................................................... 39
Measuring different parameters ....................................................................................................... 40
Detection of measuring components and evaluation of the measuring signal .................................. 40
Formulas for determining element concentration of analysis samples ............................................. 40
Basic facts about working with the instrument ............................................................................................. 42
Setting device parameters ............................................................................................................... 43
Instrument equipment ...................................................................................................................... 45
Background knowledge required for calibration ............................................................................... 48
Calibration curve calculation method criteria .................................................................................... 50
Calibration formulae ......................................................................................................................... 53
Calibration wizard............................................................................................................................. 54
Routine measuring work .................................................................................................................. 55
Formulae for blank value determination and compensation ............................................................. 56
Formula for determining the daily factor ........................................................................................... 57
Database working environment ................................................................................................................... 58
Database.......................................................................................................................................... 59
Administrative work on the database ............................................................................................... 59
Database backup ............................................................................................................................. 60
Understanding the operating software ......................................................................................................... 61
Basic functions of the operating software ......................................................................................... 62
Software user interface .................................................................................................................... 63
Sample view ..................................................................................................................................... 64
Combi view ...................................................................................................................................... 66
Status view....................................................................................................................................... 70
Right mouse button function ............................................................................................................ 71
Data administration and data security ......................................................................................................... 72
Laboratory information and management system (LIMS) ................................................................ 73
Conditions for operating the LIMS .................................................................................................... 73

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Inhalt 4

21 CFR Part 11 functionality ............................................................................................................ 74

Versioning ........................................................................................................................................ 75
Linking the analyzer and software .................................................................................................... 75

CHAPTER 4 Product description 77

Analytical characteristics and technical specifications................................................................................. 78
Analytical characteristics .................................................................................................................. 79
Technical specifications ................................................................................................................... 79
Instrument design ........................................................................................................................................ 81
Front view ........................................................................................................................................ 82
Furnace section ............................................................................................................................... 82
Rear view ......................................................................................................................................... 83
Right side view ................................................................................................................................. 83
Left side view ................................................................................................................................... 84
Top view........................................................................................................................................... 85
Peripherals and their function .......................................................................................................... 86

CHAPTER 5 Work performed by the system administrator 87

Installing and updating the software ............................................................................................................ 88
Configure analyzer ...................................................................................................................................... 89
What can you modify in the configuration? ...................................................................................... 90
Defining logon timeout ..................................................................................................................... 90
Creating new sections ...................................................................................................................... 91
Defining LIMS export settings ..................................................................................................................... 92
LIMS export settings ........................................................................................................................ 93
Setting up user administration ..................................................................................................................... 94
User administration .......................................................................................................................... 95
Recommendations for user administration ....................................................................................... 95
Granting authorizations .................................................................................................................... 96
Defining interfaces....................................................................................................................................... 97
Defining the analyzer / PC interface ................................................................................................. 98
Defining the LIMS / PC interface ...................................................................................................... 98
Editing analysis data ................................................................................................................................... 99
When does it make sense to edit analysis data? ........................................................................... 100
Limits for modifying analysis data .................................................................................................. 100
Consequences of modifying analysis data ..................................................................................... 100
Performing checks..................................................................................................................................... 101
Checking documents for authenticity ............................................................................................. 102
Signing documents......................................................................................................................... 102
Viewing the logbook ....................................................................................................................... 103
Working with the database ........................................................................................................................ 104
Administrative work on the database ............................................................................................. 104
Defining the autoexport directory ................................................................................................... 104
Starting the database backup ........................................................................................................ 105
Reorganize database ..................................................................................................................... 105
Reloading an old database file ....................................................................................................... 106
Ways of optimizing the use of the analyzer ............................................................................................... 107
Optimizing basic instrument settings .............................................................................................. 108
Optimizing sample data editing ...................................................................................................... 108
Optimizing data evaluation ............................................................................................................. 109
Performing other administrator tasks......................................................................................................... 110
Modifying the registration ............................................................................................................... 111
Printer setup ................................................................................................................................... 111

CHAPTER 6 Starting up and shutting down the instrument 113

Setting up and starting up the instrument .................................................................................................. 114
Rules for first-time start-up ............................................................................................................. 115
Instructions for operating the furnace ............................................................................................. 115
Installation site requirements ......................................................................................................... 115

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Inhalt 5

Gases and chemicals to be provided ............................................................................................. 116

Start-up .......................................................................................................................................... 117
Connecting peripherals .................................................................................................................. 118
Connecting supply lines and waste gas lines ................................................................................. 119
Switching on ................................................................................................................................... 120
Default instrument settings ............................................................................................................. 121
Heating up the furnace / checking parameters ............................................................................... 121
Shutting down the instrument .................................................................................................................... 123
Shutting the instrument down for short measuring breaks (standby) ............................................. 124
Shutting the instrument down for long measuring breaks (switching off) ....................................... 124

CHAPTER 7 Using the instrument 127

Measurement settings ............................................................................................................................... 128
Defining keywords for blank and conditioning samples .................................................................. 129
Viewing list of defined factor, monitor and standard samples ........................................................ 129
Defining standard substances as measuring samples ................................................................... 129
Defining standard substances as calibration samples.................................................................... 130
Specifying the computation method for blank value and daily factor .............................................. 131
Enabling/disabling acoustic signals ................................................................................................ 132
Configuring error handling .............................................................................................................. 132
Preparing samples .................................................................................................................................... 133
Sample preparation instructions ..................................................................................................... 134
Injection volume determination (Liquid mode) ................................................................................ 134
Sample packing (Solids mode) ...................................................................................................... 135
Preparing measurement work ................................................................................................................... 137
Software usage rules ..................................................................................................................... 138
Starting the operating software ...................................................................................................... 138
Showing or hiding the toolbar ......................................................................................................... 138
Selecting the operating mode ........................................................................................................ 138
Waking up the instrument .............................................................................................................. 139
Viewing method settings ................................................................................................................ 139
Defining custom methods ............................................................................................................... 140
Settings for sample input................................................................................................................ 140
Importing weighing data (Solid mode) ............................................................................................ 141
Prioritizing urgent samples ............................................................................................................. 142
Optimizing sleep and wake-up behavior ........................................................................................ 142
Performing measurement work ................................................................................................................. 143
Performing a measuring series ...................................................................................................... 144
Function test .................................................................................................................................. 146
Performing routine measuring work ............................................................................................... 147
Checklist for blank value, conditioning, daily factor and real samples measurements ................... 149
Types of blank value determination and their settings ................................................................... 150
Determining blank values ............................................................................................................... 150
Determining the daily factor ........................................................................................................... 151
Description of the determination variants ....................................................................................... 153
Flushing the analyzer during an analysis run ................................................................................. 155
Measurements in the trace range................................................................................................... 156
Stopping continuous analysis ......................................................................................................... 158
Preparing measuring data for evaluation ................................................................................................... 159
Configuring the sample view .......................................................................................................... 160
Determine measuring units and number of decimal places. ........................................................... 160
Saving the sample view ................................................................................................................. 161
Loading a sample view................................................................................................................... 161
Configure statistics view................................................................................................................. 161
Generating statistical data .............................................................................................................. 161
Formulae for generating statistical data ......................................................................................... 162
System Suitability Test ................................................................................................................... 163
Manual peak integration ................................................................................................................. 165
Configuring the graph view ............................................................................................................ 168
Setting the size of the graph .......................................................................................................... 169
Configure report ............................................................................................................................. 169
Display print preview ...................................................................................................................... 170
Data backup and printing ............................................................................................................... 170

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Inhalt 6

Overview of export and import file formats ..................................................................................... 171

Exporting analysis data to MS Excel and viewing .......................................................................... 171
Exporting LIMS data....................................................................................................................... 172
Working with documents ........................................................................................................................... 174
Creating new documents ............................................................................................................... 175
Editing documents.......................................................................................................................... 175
Deleting documents ....................................................................................................................... 176
Finding documents ......................................................................................................................... 176
Copying documents via the clipboard ............................................................................................ 177
Importing documents...................................................................................................................... 178
Signing documents......................................................................................................................... 178
Checking documents for authenticity ............................................................................................. 179

CHAPTER 8 Maintaining the instrument 181

Important information about maintenance ................................................................................................. 182
Maintenance work to be performed by the customer ..................................................................... 183
Viewing the status of maintenance intervals .................................................................................. 184
Defining maintenance intervals in the software .............................................................................. 184
Installing used tubes ...................................................................................................................... 185
Preparing and following up maintenance work ............................................................................... 185
Conditioning newly installed tubes ................................................................................................. 186
Performing the calibration ......................................................................................................................... 189
Defining standard substances ........................................................................................................ 190
Viewing list of defined factor, monitor and standard samples ........................................................ 190
Defining standard substances as calibration samples.................................................................... 190
Viewing calibration coefficients ...................................................................................................... 192
Optimizing instrument condition for calibration ............................................................................... 192
Performing the calibration .............................................................................................................. 193
Assessing the calibration curves .................................................................................................... 196
Calibration tables....................................................................................................................................... 198
Calibration table direct method (TC, NPOC) .................................................................................. 199
Kalibration table difference method (TIC/TC) ................................................................................. 199
Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel ........................................................................................ 200
Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel (liquid mode) ........................................................ 201
Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel (solids mode) ....................................................... 202
Replacement of the ash crucible/finger ..................................................................................................... 204
Replacement of the ash crucible/finger .......................................................................................... 205
Removing the ash crucible (liquid mode) ....................................................................................... 205
Installing the ash crucible (lliquid mode) ........................................................................................ 208
Remove the ash finger (solids mode)............................................................................................. 211
Installing the ash finger (solids mode) ............................................................................................ 213
Replacing sealing elements ...................................................................................................................... 217
When to replace sealing elements ................................................................................................. 218
Removing sealing elements from grooves ..................................................................................... 219
Maintain multiway valve and injection plug ................................................................................................ 220
Remove and dismantle the multiway valve and the injection plug ................................................. 221
Clean, assemble and install the multiway valve and the injection plug. ......................................... 224
Maintaining the ball valve (solids mode).................................................................................................... 228
Removing and dismantling the ball valve ....................................................................................... 229
Cleaning, assembling and installing the ball valve. ........................................................................ 232
Removing, cleaning and installing the condenser ..................................................................................... 237
Removing the condenser ............................................................................................................... 238
Cleaning and installing the condenser ........................................................................................... 239
Maintain syringe ........................................................................................................................................ 242
Maintain syringe ............................................................................................................................. 243
Emptying and filling reaction tubes ............................................................................................................ 245
Empty standard reaction tube, liquid mode .................................................................................... 246
Filling the standard reaction tube (Liquid mode) ............................................................................ 246
Empty standard reaction tubes (Solid mode) ................................................................................. 248
Filling the standard reaction tube (Solid mode) .............................................................................. 248
Removing/installing and conditioning the reaction tubes ........................................................................... 250
Removing the standard reaction tube from the furnace ................................................................. 251
Installing standard reaction tubes in the furnace and conditioning ................................................. 252

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Inhalt 7

Filling, removing and installing drying, absorption and filter tubes ............................................................ 255
Filling the drying tube ..................................................................................................................... 256
Filling the absorption tube .............................................................................................................. 256
Filling the filter tubes ...................................................................................................................... 257
Removing and installing drying, absorption and filter tubes ........................................................... 258
Filling the acid container............................................................................................................................ 261
Filling the acid container ................................................................................................................ 262
Flushing the combustion tube and the sparger. ........................................................................................ 263
Flushing the combustion tube with salt containing samples ........................................................... 264
Flushing the sparger ...................................................................................................................... 264

CHAPTER 9 Repairing the instrument 267

Interpreting PC error messages ................................................................................................................ 268
Performing a system test ........................................................................................................................... 268
Performing a leak test ............................................................................................................................... 269
Leak test procedure................................................................................................................................... 270
What to do after a computer crash ............................................................................................................ 271
Reacting to a power failure ........................................................................................................................ 271
Changing the position of the carousel ....................................................................................................... 273
Stopping continuous analysis .................................................................................................................... 273
Re-weighing after sample loss (Solid mode) ............................................................................................. 274
Export analysis data for support ................................................................................................................ 274

CHAPTER 10 Variants and modifications 277

Instrument variants .................................................................................................................................... 278
The basic model ............................................................................................................................. 279
The model with automatic sampler in liquid mode ......................................................................... 279
The variant with automatic sampler in solids mode ........................................................................ 280
Modifying the instrument ........................................................................................................................... 282
Modifying from single mode "liquid" to single mode "solids" .......................................................... 283
Modifying from single mode to automatic operation ....................................................................... 286
Modifying from automatic liquid operation to automatic solids operation ....................................... 293
The stirring unit .............................................................................................................................. 296
Adjusting the suction and purging needle ...................................................................................... 297
Modification to POC operation .................................................................................................................. 299
Scope of delivery............................................................................................................................ 300
The components ............................................................................................................................ 300
Functional diagram POC module ................................................................................................... 301
General measuring principle POC ................................................................................................. 302
Selecting the operating mode ........................................................................................................ 303
Modification to POC mode ............................................................................................................. 303
Defining custom methods ............................................................................................................... 305
Defining custom standard substances ........................................................................................... 305
Check list, prior to the analysis run ................................................................................................ 306
Calibration ...................................................................................................................................... 306
Maintenance work .......................................................................................................................... 307
TIC solids module...................................................................................................................................... 308
General information........................................................................................................................ 309
Scope of delivery............................................................................................................................ 309
Analytical characteristics ................................................................................................................ 309
Technical specifications ................................................................................................................. 310
Functional diagram TIC module ..................................................................................................... 311
The components ............................................................................................................................ 313
Installation and initial start up of the TIC module ........................................................................... 314
Selecting the operating mode ........................................................................................................ 316
General measuring principle TIC ................................................................................................... 317
Analysis run ................................................................................................................................... 319
Defining custom methods............................................................................................................... 320
Defining custom standard substances ........................................................................................... 321
Operation with the chemiluminescence detector (CLD) ............................................................................ 322
General information........................................................................................................................ 323

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Inhalt 8

Technical specifications ................................................................................................................. 323

Functional diagrams ....................................................................................................................... 324
Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 325
Perparing the measurement of low/high N concentrations ............................................................. 327

CHAPTER 11 Menu and dialog descriptions 331

Dialog descriptions key ............................................................................................................................. 332
File menu .................................................................................................................................................. 333
File > New (Command) .................................................................................................................. 334
Select document name (Dialog) ..................................................................................................... 334
Select version (Dialog) ................................................................................................................... 336
Save file as (Dialog) ....................................................................................................................... 337
File > Delete (Command) ............................................................................................................... 338
Comment modification (Dialog) ...................................................................................................... 338
Sign (Dialog) .................................................................................................................................. 339
Verify digital signature (Dialog) ...................................................................................................... 339
Export to LIMS (Dialog) .................................................................................................................. 340
Export peak graphics (Dialog) ........................................................................................................ 341
Configure report (Dialog)................................................................................................................ 341
Print (Dialog) .................................................................................................................................. 343
Print preview (Dialog) ..................................................................................................................... 344
Printer setup (Dialog) ..................................................................................................................... 345
Open (Dialog) ................................................................................................................................. 346
Configure backup (Dialog) ............................................................................................................. 347
Clean database (Dialog) ................................................................................................................ 348
Restore database (Dialog) ............................................................................................................. 349
Log in as (Dialog) ........................................................................................................................... 349
File > Logoff (Command) ............................................................................................................... 350
File > Exit (Command) ................................................................................................................... 350
File > Export/Import > Create Excel sheet (Command).................................................................. 351
Edit menu .................................................................................................................................................. 352
Edit > Redo (Command) ................................................................................................................ 352
Edit > Undo (Command) ................................................................................................................ 353
Edit > Cut (Command) ................................................................................................................... 353
Edit > Copy (Command) ................................................................................................................ 353
Edit > Paste (Command) ................................................................................................................ 354
Edit > Insert line (Command) ......................................................................................................... 354
Edit > Delete line (Command) ........................................................................................................ 354
Swap samples (Dialog) .................................................................................................................. 355
Edit > Modify (Command) .............................................................................................................. 355
Set stop tag (Dialog) ...................................................................................................................... 355
Select current sample (Dialog) ....................................................................................................... 356
Set current weighed sample (Dialog) ............................................................................................. 357
Edit > Update hole positions (Command) ...................................................................................... 357
View menu ................................................................................................................................................ 358
View > Toggle (Command) ............................................................................................................ 359
Zoom in/out (Dialog)....................................................................................................................... 359
Configure view (Dialog) .................................................................................................................. 359
Save views (Dialog) ....................................................................................................................... 360
Load views (Dialog)........................................................................................................................ 361
Delete views (Dialog) ..................................................................................................................... 361
View > Gridview > Auto align (Command) ..................................................................................... 362
Configure graph view (Dialog) ........................................................................................................ 362
View > Gaphic > Auto align (Command) ........................................................................................ 363
Configure statistics view (Dialog) ................................................................................................... 363
View > Statistic > Auto align (Command) ....................................................................................... 364
Select columns (Dialog) ................................................................................................................. 364
Column properties (Dialog) ............................................................................................................ 364
Menu Wizards ........................................................................................................................................... 366
Calibration Wizard .......................................................................................................................... 367
System suitability test wizard ......................................................................................................... 369
System menu ............................................................................................................................................ 371
System > Auto run (Command)...................................................................................................... 372

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Inhalt 9

System > Single run (Command) ................................................................................................... 372

System > Stop (Command) ............................................................................................................ 372
Acidify samples (Dialog)................................................................................................................. 373
Select carousel position (Dialog) .................................................................................................... 373
System > Arm Up (Command) ....................................................................................................... 375
System > Arm Down (Command) .................................................................................................. 375
System > Stirrer (Command) ......................................................................................................... 375
System > Auto zero (Command) .................................................................................................... 375
Insert flushing sequence (Dialog) ................................................................................................... 375
System > Wake up (Command) ..................................................................................................... 376
Feeding (Dialog)............................................................................................................................. 376
Analysis mode (Dialog) .................................................................................................................. 377
Math menu ................................................................................................................................................ 379
Math > Blank values > Calculate (Command) ................................................................................ 380
Blank values (Dialog) ..................................................................................................................... 380
Math. > System suitability test (Command) .................................................................................... 381
Math. > Factor (Command) ............................................................................................................ 381
Define type of peak (Dialog)........................................................................................................... 381
Define peak start / end (Dialog) ..................................................................................................... 382
Area assignment (Dialog)............................................................................................................... 383
Standard samples display (Dialog)................................................................................................. 383
Math. > Recalculate (Command) ................................................................................................... 384
Statistics menu .......................................................................................................................................... 385
Statistics > Via names (Command) ................................................................................................ 386
Statistics > Group (Command) ....................................................................................................... 386
Statistics > Sort group (Command) ................................................................................................ 386
Statistics > Delete group (Command) ............................................................................................ 386
Statistics > Clear statistic (Command) ........................................................................................... 386
Statistics > Include/Exclude sample (Command) ........................................................................... 387
Statistics > Include/Exclude value (Command) .............................................................................. 387
Acceptable standard deviation (Dialog).......................................................................................... 387
Statistics > Create Excel sheet (Command)................................................................................... 388
Calibration menu ....................................................................................................................................... 389
Calibration coefficients (Dialog) ..................................................................................................... 390
Configure calibration (Dialog) ......................................................................................................... 391
Specify lower and upper calibration range (Dialog) ........................................................................ 392
Calibration > Next sample (Command) .......................................................................................... 393
Calibration > Previous sample (Command).................................................................................... 393
Calibration > Next (Command)....................................................................................................... 393
Calibration > Previous (Command) ................................................................................................ 393
Windows menu .......................................................................................................................................... 394
Windows > Toolbar / Run-Bar (Command) .................................................................................... 395
Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 395
Windows > Recent sample (Command) ......................................................................................... 396
Windows > Status view (Command) .............................................................................................. 396
Weighing window (Dialog).............................................................................................................. 396
Windows > Default layout (Command) ........................................................................................... 397
Options menu ............................................................................................................................................ 398
Maintenance intervals (Dialog) ....................................................................................................... 399
Maintenance status EC cell (Dialog) .............................................................................................. 400
Replace part (Dialog) ..................................................................................................................... 400
Adjust ball valve (Dialog)................................................................................................................ 401
Adjust carousel (Dialog) ................................................................................................................. 402
Options > Maintenance > Flush acid path (Command) .................................................................. 403
Leak test (Dialog) ........................................................................................................................... 403
Leak test: Test phases (Dialog) ..................................................................................................... 404
System test (Dialog) ....................................................................................................................... 406
Error buffer (Dialog) ....................................................................................................................... 407
Error display (Dialog) ..................................................................................................................... 408
Options > Diagnostics > Baseline recording (Command)............................................................... 408
Input options (Dialog) ..................................................................................................................... 408
Standard samples (Dialog) ............................................................................................................. 409
Keywords (Dialog) .......................................................................................................................... 410
Acoustic signals (Dialog) ................................................................................................................ 411

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Inhalt 10

Configure Calculations (Dialog) ..................................................................................................... 412

LIMS settings (Dialog) .................................................................................................................... 412
Device parameters (Dialog) ........................................................................................................... 415
Method (Dialog) ............................................................................................................................. 416
Copy methods ................................................................................................................................ 417
Error handling (Dialog) ................................................................................................................... 418
Sleep / wake-up function (Dialog) .................................................................................................. 418
Monthly logbook (Dialog) ............................................................................................................... 420
Select period (Dialog)..................................................................................................................... 421
Device configuration (Dialog) ......................................................................................................... 421
Configure key value (Dialog) .......................................................................................................... 423
Help menu ................................................................................................................................................. 425
Help > Content (Command) ........................................................................................................... 426
Help > Find (Command) ................................................................................................................. 426
Help > Elementar GmbH on the WEB (Command) ........................................................................ 426
Product registration (Dialog) .......................................................................................................... 426
Help > About... (Command) ........................................................................................................... 427

CHAPTER 12 Appendix 429

Revision history ......................................................................................................................................... 430
Warranty.................................................................................................................................................... 431
Warranty of the overall instrument ................................................................................................. 432
Warranty on the furnace................................................................................................................. 432
Declaration of conformity ........................................................................................................................... 433
Declaration of conformity Page 1 ................................................................................................... 434
Declaration of conformity Page 2 ................................................................................................... 435

Index 437

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 1

General

Purpose
This chapter contains general topics of the document.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - General 12

About this document

Status of the operating instructions
The status of the operating instructions is: 27.08.2018.

Identification number
The operating instructions identification number is: 38.00-5002.

Validity
The operating instructions are valid for all instruments as from serial number: 38091036.

Analyzer
These operating instructions describe the instruments vario TOC cube and vario TOC select as well
as their variants.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - General 13

Display conventions
Before you start using this guide, it is important to understand the terms and typographical
conventions used in the documentation. The following kinds of formatting in the text identify special
information.
Formatting convention Type of information
Triangular bullet () Step by step procedure. You can follow these instructions to
complete a specific task.
Special bold Items you must select, such as menu options (e. g. File > New),
command buttons (e. g. Cancel), or common accentuation.
Italics Used to emphasize the importance of an item or for variable
expressions such as parameters.
CAPITALS Names of keys on the keyboard, for example, SHIFT, CTRL, or
ALT.
KEY+KEY Key combinations for which the user must press and hold down
one key and then press another, for example, CTRL+P, or
ALT+F4.
"Quotation marks" Denote amongst others the names of dialogs in the software, e. g.
the "Replace part" dialog.
{Symbolic name} Denotes a symbolic name, e. g. {Element} stands for the
corresponding name of an element.

General information on the operating instructions

Pictures
The instruments of Elementar underlie a permanent development and adjustment regarding the
optimum parameter settings. This may lead to deviations in terms of picture display of the manual and
the current instrument status which are not relevant for the understanding of the instrument operation.

The valid numbers of the parameter settings and/or variables can be found in the current text part.
Therefore, numbers in the pictures of software dialogs are mainly replaced by spaces or only reflect
examples. They do not reflect the proper, recommended set values.

Reading aids
Subheadings are displayed in the left margin as reading aids. They sum up the content of the
particular section and are useful for quick navigation.

Index
An index is given at the end of the operating instructions that helps you locate certain topics more
easily. Index entries always refer to the first page of the section in which the index term is found.
Therefore, don't be confused if the index term does not appear on the first page but rather on one of
the following pages.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 2

Basic security settings

Target group
Personnel working with the instrument.

Purpose
This section describes basic safety rules required to avoid risks for the user of the analyzer.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 16

Working with the operating instructions

Operating the analyzer
Read the operating instructions thoroughly before performing work with the analyzer.

Storing the operating instructions

Store the operating instructions carefully and make sure the instructions are accessible for all relevant
personnel.

Passing on the operating instructions

If you pass on the analyzer, always pass on the operating instructions, too.

Representation of safety instructions

Safety signs

This is a safety sign. Instructions with this sign contain warnings about risks of injury and even death.
These instructions must always be observed in order to avoid risks.

Risk levels
The safety instructions are categorized according to the following risk levels:
Risk level Consequences Probability
Risk Death / serious injury (irreversible) high

Warning Death / serious injury (irreversible) medium

Caution Minor injury (reversible) medium

Caution Damage to property possibly

Safety instructions
Note
Observe the following safety instructions and also read the comprehensive operating instructions as
well as the safety manual "Safety Rules". Warning notices on the instrument and in the respective
sections of the operating instructions do also apply.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 17

Notes
 The initial start-up of the analyzer and auxilliary equipment must only be performed by qualified
personnel authorized by ELEMENTAR.
 The opening of the transport packaging may lead to loss of warranty! If visible damages of the
delivered parts can be detected, please immediately inform the forwarder and the contractor.
 The analyzer must not be installed in areas with explosive atmosphere (in accordance with the
ATEX guideline).
 The installation site has to be well ventilated. The exhaust gas lines must discharge into the open
air or into a fume hood. The end of the exhaust gas lines must discharge into the open air at a
location protected from the wind as pressure fluctuations, e.g. caused by wind, cause detector
instabilities.
 Prior to opening the instrument's rear wall or side walls the peripheral instruments and the
analyzer shall be disconnected from the mains by turning off the main switch and pulling the
power supply plug. Caution: The furnace has to be cold, otherwise overheating of some parts
may occur. Prior to reinitialisation, the casing has to be reinstalled properly. See Safety devices
in the analyzer (on page 20).
 Both the instrument and the gas supply system should be checked for tightness in appropriate
time intervals (at least every two months).
 During the pyrolysis and/or combustion process toxic and/or harmful gases as carbon monoxide
(CO), sulfur dioxide (SO2) and nitrogen oxides (NO2) are generated.
 The replacement of heated tubes must only be performed by means of the supplied protective
gloves and other protective equipment.
 Adhere to the safety instructions of the chemical manufacturer (on the label of the bottle or in the
safety data sheet) when handling chemicals.
 Make sure that only WO3 granulate (11.02-0008) is used for the tube filling! WO3 powder
(11.02-0017) must not be used. A mix-up can cause a blocking of the combustion tube!
 Wear protective glasses and the protective gloves when handling Sicapent® (phosphorus
pentoxide), NaOH (sodium hydroxide) and Mg(ClO4)2 (magnesium perchlorate)! Caution!
Danger of chemical burns!!

Instructions for disposal of consumables

Rules
Observe the following rules for disposal of consumables:
 Dispose of the consumables according to the relevant disposal categories.
 Read the instructions on the individual chemicals in the safety data sheets. The risk notes for
individual chemicals can be found in the R-Phrases. Safety advice can be found in the
S-Phrases.

Intended use of the instrument

Intended use
This section describes what the instrument is suitable for and what substances may be analyzed with
it.

Description of the instrument

The analyzer is an instrument for the analysis of TC, TIC, TOC, NPOC, POC, DOC.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 18

What does the instrument do?

Depending on the operating mode and kit, the instrument can determine the quantity of the following
parameters:
 TC / TIC / TOC / DOC
 NPOC
 TC
 POC
 TNb

Critical samples matrices

Some substances may adversely affect the analysis result or the endurance of instrument
components. The harmful effects of such substances on instrument components can be reduced or
avoided, in case the measures to be taken can be reconciled with the application-specific
requirements for the analytical results.
 Strongly saline and phosphate-containing substances (>10 %)

When measuring alkaline/alkaline-earth containing or phosphate-containing substances, the quartz

glass and the SO2-purge and trap adsorption column can be attacked and their endurance reduced.
The adverse effects from the measurement of such substances can be reduced or eventually avoided
by measures such as:
 Reduction of the sample weight
 Frequent exchange of the ash finger/crucible
 Addition of tungsten oxide in a ratio of 1:1 (e.g., soil) up to 1:10 (e.g., sodium sulphate)
 Use of a ceramic ash crucible
 Reduction of the temperature of the combustion tube by 100 ° C in CHNS-/CNS mode, in
case the samples to be analyzed are easy to combust (e.g., purely organic substances).
 Measurement in CHN/CN mode instead of CHNS/CNS mode (lower temperature of the
combustion tube), in case the sulfur concentration is not relevant.
 Use of more robust stainless steel combustion tubes (not possible in CNS and CHNS
modes), in case the sulfur concentration is not relevant.

When using steel combustion tubes, substances with a high salt content can have corrosive effects
and reduce their endurance. When measuring samples treated with acids for removal of inorganic
carbon in order to determine total organic carbon (TOC), the combustion tube can be attacked and its
endurance reduced. In addition to the measures mentioned above, a thorough drying of such
samples is important, as otherwise acid residues could remain in the samples and act corrosively
inside the combustion tube.

 Strongly fluorine-containing substances (>10 %)

When measuring fluorine-containing substances, the quartz glass and the SO2-purge and trap
adsorption column can be attacked and their endurance reduced. The adverse effects from the
measurement of such substances can be reduced or eventually avoided by measures such as:
 Reduction of the sample weight
 Frequent exchange of the ash finger/crucible
 Use of the Elementar “fluorine kit” for inactivation of the released fluorine
 Use of an IR detector for the determination of sulfur
 Reduction of the temperature of the combustion tube by 100 ° C in CHNS-/CNS mode, in
case the samples to be analyzed are easy to combust (e.g., purely organic substances).
 Measurement in CHN/CN mode instead of CHNS/CNS mode (lower temperature of the
combustion tube), in case the sulfur concentration is not relevant.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 19

 Use of more robust stainless steel combustion tubes (not possible in CNS and CHNS
modes), in case the sulfur concentration is not relevant.

 Strongly heavy metal-containing substances

When measuring substances containing certain volatile heavy metals (e.g., mercury, arsenic) or
heavy metals which are prone to formation of volatile compounds (e.g., osmium, ruthenium), the
substances, or their products, can form deposits inside the gas lines and the detector of the
instrument. This can reduce the endurance of both gas lines and instrument detector. The adverse
effects from the measurement of such substances can be reduced or eventually avoided by measures
such as:
 Reduction of the sample weight
 Frequent exchange of the ash finger/crucible

Suitable sample matrices

Samples that can be decomposed in a controlled manner under the mode-dependent combustion
conditions are suitable for analysis.

Advice on difficult applications

You have the following ways of getting advice on difficult applications:
 You will find useful tips in the "Application notes" on the provided CD/DVD/USB-Card.
 You will find also the "Application notes" section on the www.elementar.de website.
 The Elementar application laboratory offers advice by phone or mail.
Tel.: +49 6184 9393 - 123
E-Mail: [email protected]
 The Elementar service offers advice by phone or mail.
Tel.: +49 6184 9393 - 220
E-Mail: [email protected]

Warning: residual risks

Hot components inside the instrument
During operation, the heaters and/or the furnace inside the instrument heat certain components to
very high temperatures. Even after switching off the instrument, these components stay hot for long
periods of time that you can suffer serious burns if working inappropriately inside the instrument.

Observe the relevant instructions exactly in order to avoid burns.

Live components inside the instrument

There are live parts (up to 230V) inside the instrument. When you are working on the electrical
components, you may suffer electrocution if you do not work properly. Never bring liquids or leak-test
spray in the vicinity of live components.

Observe the relevant instructions exactly in order to avoid injuries caused by electrocution.

Unsuitable consumables and spare parts

If you use consumables and spare parts of an unsuitable type and quality, you risk:
 Injuries to the operating personnel
 Damages to the instrument
 Distortion of analysis results
 loss of warranty.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 20

Only use original spare parts and original consumables that you have purchased from Elementar
Analysensysteme GmbH or authorized dealers.

Samples with potential risks

Samples to be analyzed may pose the following risks:
 Contact with the substances may lead to chemical burns or poisoning.
 Combustion analysis of larger quantities of the substance may lead to explosions.
 The pyrolysis (Device specific usable) of certain substances may lead to explosions.

These sample substances include:

 Aggressive chemicals such as acids or alkaline solutions
 Organic solvents
 Explosives
 Substances that develop toxic or explosive gas mixtures

You are obliged to protect yourself prior to contact with hazardous substances and to reduce the
quantity of the substance to a safe amount.

You are also obliged to observe the safety instructions of the chemical manufacturer on the label of
the bottle or in the safety data sheets. The safety data sheets contain risk information about a
chemical in the R-Phrases and safety information in the S-Phrases.

Filling the sample vials with attached carousel

Fill the samples to be analyzed as follows:
 Unscrew the carousel and fill the sample vials on a working plat.

In case of an improper use, you may be faced with:

 damages to the instrument (electronics)
 loss of warranty.

Working with the solids autosampler (if applicable)

Prior to change the carousel or to perform a reference run, always empty the carousel.

Safety devices in the analyzer

Note
The analyzer may only be operated if all of the safety devices indicated in this section are in place
and in working order.

Gas supply
Gas supply is only possible if the mains switch is switched on and the software is running.

Temperature monitoring
A temperature limiter automatically switches off the furnace in the event of excess temperature inside
the instrument. All heating is monitored by an integrated microprocessor controller. The furnace is
automatically shut down in the event of the following malfunctions:
 The heating fails to reach setpoint temperature within the set time.
 A thermocouple is defective or displays an illegal value.
 The set threshold temperature is exceeded.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 21

Instrument casing
The instrument casing comprises the following, as seen from the top left in the picture:

 Right side door

 Front door
 Left side door
 Rear wall
 Instrument cover

The casing separates hot, live parts from the surroundings.

Protective earth conductor

The electrical components of the analyzer are grounded by a protective earth conductor:

 The first protective earth conductor is located on the rear wall of the analyzer.
 The second protective earth conductor is located outside the cover of the electrical area.third
protective earth conductor is located intside the cover of the electrical area
(arrow).<AIT_DELETE_END>

If the protective earth conductor connections need to be detached, they must be re-connected
correctly when re-assembling.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 22

Waste gas lines

The operator is obliged to connect waste gas lines if the national limits for toxic gases in workplace air
are exceeded. The waste gas lines must discharge into the open or into an exhaust hood. The end of
the waste gas lines must discharge into the open at a location protected from the wind as pressure
fluctuations, e.g. caused by wind, cause detector instabilities.

In addition, the installation room should be well ventilated.

Warning signs on the analyzer

Warning sign furnace
The following picture shows the warning sign on the furnace heat protection cladding:

Warning sign electrical area

The following picture shows the warning sign on the electrical section cover:

Meaning of the warning signs

The following table explains the meaning of the warning signs:
Warning sign Meaning

Warning: hot surfaces

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 23

Warning sign Meaning

Electric current hazard

Note
You are obliged to keep the warning signs on the instrument complete and in a legible condition.

Warning: changes to the instrument

Safe instrument
The analyzer is designed and delivered in such a way to ensure safe working if you observe the
instructions in the operating instructions.

Warning: Changes to the instrument

If you make any changes to the instrument, you risk rendering the instrument unsafe.

The consequences would be:

 Injuries to the operating personnel
 Damages to the instrument
 loss of warranty.

Therefore, never make any unauthorized additions/conversions to the instrument.

Required user knowledge and skills

Knowledge and skills
Depending on the specific task, the user must have different knowledge and skills. The following table
indicates which sections of the operating instructions require what knowledge and skills:
Section Required knowledge and skills
Work performed by the system Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system
administrator and administrative settings.
Starting up or shutting down the Personnel authorized by Elementar and having
instrument undergone training.
Using the instrument Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and
experience with laboratory work (e.g. laboratory worker).
Maintaining the instrument Personnel authorized by Elementar.
Repairing the instrument Personnel authorized by Elementar and having
undergone training.

Required personal safety equipment

Protective glasses
You require protective glasses for many activities. Make sure that protective glasses are always
available nearby the analyzer.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 24

Protective gloves
Elementar provides two kinds of protective gloves with the instrument:
 The protective leather gloves for protection against cuts on broken glass from cold quartz
components.
 The heat protection gloves for protection against burns on hot components.

Always keep the protective gloves nearby the analyzer. Replace the protective gloves immediately if
required.

Laboratory clothing
For work on and with the instrument you need:
 Sturdy shoes
 Cotton apron
 Hair tie to tie back long hair
 Obedience of general rules for safe work in the laboratory

Warning notes during operation

Note
Always pay attention to careful handling when working with the instrument, especially for
modifications, maintenance and repairing works. The following notes have to be strictly observed
when performing the corresponding works.

Replacement of the ash crucible/finger

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Hot instrument parts and hot ash particles!
Risk of burning due to hot instrument parts.
When replacing:
 Wear protective glasses.
 Wear the enclosed heat protection gloves.
 Place the hot instrument tubes in a tube rack on a level, non-combustible
surface.
 Protect the hot instrument parts from unauthorized access.
 Never leave the instrument unattended when the furnace has been pulled
out.
Warning Gas pressure and caustic substances in the instrument!
Consumables may escape under pressure and cause chemical burns. Before
performing the work:
Shut off the gas supply. To do so, execute the Options > Maintenance >
Replace parts command.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 25

Damaged base panel

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Damaged base panel!
Damage to the base panel will impair proper functioning of the carousel.
Before starting maintenance work, always remove all samples from the carousel.
When dismantling and cleaning the carousel:
 Never use pointed objects to dismantle the carousel.
 Never use sharp or aggressive cleaners.

Gas pressure
Please observe the following instruction:
Warning Gas pressure and caustic substances in the instrument!
Consumables may escape under pressure and cause chemical burns. Before
performing the work:
Shut off the gas supply. To do so, execute the Options > Maintenance >
Replace parts command.

Modifying the instrument

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Hot components in the instrument
When working inside the instrument there is a risk of burning as many parts of the
instrument are hot.
When working inside the instrument always wear protective glasses and the
enclosed heat protection gloves.
Warning Sharp pieces of broken glass!
When cold quartz or glass components break there is a risk of cut injuries.
Wear the enclosed protective leather gloves and protective glasses when
handling cold quartz and glass parts.

Hot instrument parts

Please observe the following instruction:
Warning Hot instrument parts!
Risk of burning due to hot instrument parts. Before performing the work:
 Allow the furnaces to cool down
 Disconnect the power supply plug

Installing/removing the condenser

Please observe the following instructions:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 26

Warning Hot components in the instrument

When working inside the instrument there is a risk of burning as many parts of the
instrument are hot.
When working inside the instrument always wear protective glasses and the
enclosed heat protection gloves.
Warning Sharp pieces of broken glass!
When cold quartz or glass components break there is a risk of cut injuries.
Wear the enclosed protective leather gloves and protective glasses when
handling cold quartz and glass parts.
Warning Gas pressure and caustic substances in the instrument!
Consumables may escape under pressure and cause chemical burns. Before
performing the work:
Shut off the gas supply. To do so, execute the Options > Maintenance >
Replace parts command.

Changing mode
Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Overheating if tube fillings are not appropriate for the operating mode!
Overheated tube fillings melt, run into the furnace area and destroy the furnace.
Make sure that the tube fillings correspond to the selected operating mode.

Heating up the furnace / checking parameters

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Overheating if tube fillings are not appropriate for the operating mode!
Overheated tube fillings melt, run into the furnace area and destroy the furnace.
Make sure that the tube fillings correspond to the selected operating mode.

Sample vials
Please observe the following instruction:
Warning Only fill the sample vials when the carousel has been taken off!
Take the carousel and fill the sample vials up on a working plate.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 27

Removing reaction tubes

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Hot reaction tubes!
Risk of burning due to hot instrument parts.
When replacing the reaction tubes:
 Wear protective glasses.
 Wear the enclosed heat protection gloves.
 Place the hot tubes in a tube rack on a level, non-combustible surface.
 Protect the hot tubes from unauthorized access.
 Never leave the instrument unattended when the furnace has been pulled
out.
Warning Gas pressure and caustic substances in the instrument!
Consumables may escape under pressure and cause chemical burns. Before
performing the work:
Shut off the gas supply. To do so, execute the Options > Maintenance >
Replace parts command.

Filling reaction tubes

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Sharp pieces of broken glass!
When cold quartz or glass components break there is a risk of cut injuries.
Wear the enclosed protective leather gloves and protective glasses when
handling cold quartz and glass parts.
Caution Cutting sealing elements apart/out (o-rings, quad rings, half shells, ferrules).
When cutting sealing elements apart/out with a knife you may damage sealing
surfaces.
Never remove sealing elements with a knife but rather with tweezers.

Installing and conditioning the reaction tubes

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Hot components in the instrument
When working inside the instrument there is a risk of burning as many parts of the
instrument are hot.
When working inside the instrument always wear protective glasses and the
enclosed heat protection gloves.
Caution Overheating if tube fillings are not appropriate for the operating mode!
Overheated tube fillings melt, run into the furnace area and destroy the furnace.
Make sure that the tube fillings correspond to the selected operating mode.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 28

Emptying reaction tubes

Please observe the following instruction:
Warning Sharp pieces of broken glass!
When cold quartz or glass components break there is a risk of cut injuries.
Wear the enclosed protective leather gloves and protective glasses when
handling cold quartz and glass parts.
Warning Harmful substances when glass is broken!
When filled quartz or glass components break there is a risk that harmful
substances may be released.
Wear a dust mask when handling cold quartz and glass parts.

Filling the acid container

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Mind the safety instruction when handling acid (H3PO4).
Wear always protective clovers and protective glasses when working.

Warning Hot components in the instrument

When working inside the instrument there is a risk of burning as many parts of the
instrument are hot.
When working inside the instrument always wear protective glasses and the
enclosed heat protection gloves.

Replacing fuses
Please observe the following instructions:
Risk Live parts!
When replacing fuses there is a risk of electrocution.
Before replacing fuses:
 Allow the furnaces to cool down.
 Disconnect the power supply plug.
Risk High voltage!
Using the wrong fuses can pose a risk of electrocution or fire.
Only use fuses matching the indicated type and the indicated voltage on the fuse
holder.
Caution Lack of ventilation of the analyzer!
A lack of ventilation leads to overheating of the analyzer. Before you switch off the
instrument:
 Ste the Solltemperaturen der Öfen to 0 °C. To do so execute the command
Options > Settings > Parameter > Temperatures
 Allow die Öfen to cool down until the temperature displayed is less than 55
°C

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 29

Flushing the sparger

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Sharp pieces of broken glass!
When cold quartz or glass components break there is a risk of cut injuries.
Wear the enclosed protective leather gloves and protective glasses when
handling cold quartz and glass parts.
Warning Gas pressure and caustic substances in the instrument!
Consumables may escape under pressure and cause chemical burns. Before
performing the work:
Shut off the gas supply. To do so, execute the Options > Maintenance >
Replace parts command.

Installing/removing and filling the drying/absorption tube

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Caustic substance Sicapent® (phosphorus pentoxide)/magnesium perchlorate
(Mg(ClO4)2)!
Danger of chemical burns when handling Sicapent®/magnesium perchlorate.
Wear protective glasses and the enclosed protective leather gloves.
Warning Sharp pieces of broken glass!
When cold quartz or glass components break there is a risk of cut injuries.
Wear the enclosed protective leather gloves and protective glasses when
handling cold quartz and glass parts.

Overheating of tube fillings

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Overheating if tube fillings are not appropriate for the operating mode!
Overheated tube fillings melt, run into the furnace area and destroy the furnace.
Make sure that the tube fillings correspond to the selected operating mode.

Working with the database

Please observe the following instructions:
Caution Data loss
After reorganizing the database via Clean all sample data and the contents of the
logbook are irrevocably deleted.
Always backup your data before reorganizing the database via Clean.
Caution Data loss
Restoring the database via Restore irrevocably overwrites all sample data, the
contents of the logbook and the database configfuration parameters.
Always backup your data before restoring the database via Restore.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Basic security settings 30

Improper changes
Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Improper changes impair proper operation of the system and may destroy system
components.
Only configure the instrument if you are authorized to do so and observe the
operating instructions.

Flushing the combustion tube

Please observe the following instructions:
Warning Hot components in the instrument
When working inside the instrument there is a risk of burning as many parts of the
instrument are hot.
When working inside the instrument always wear protective glasses and the
enclosed heat protection gloves.
Warning Sharp pieces of broken glass!
When cold quartz or glass components break there is a risk of cut injuries.
Wear the enclosed protective leather gloves and protective glasses when
handling cold quartz and glass parts.

Mixing up gas inlets

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution A mix-up of the gas inlets may lead to destruction of the instrument.
Connect the supply lines carefully and observe the diagram.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 3

Understanding the instrument and planning

its use

Target group
Personnel with basic chemical knowledge and basic computer knowledge.

Purpose
This section helps you to assess the applications of the instrument and subsequently plan the use of
the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 32

Layout and mode of functioning

Target group
Personnel with basic chemical knowledge and basic computer knowledge.

Purpose
This section describes what the instrument does, what the analysis parameters mean, and what
happens in the instrument during an analysis.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 33

Functional units
Functional diagram
The following diagram shows the basic setup of the instrument and its division into functional units.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 34

Symbols
The following list names the functional and basic symbols:

Two-way valve Pressure sensor Gas separation

Three-way valve Loop Measuring cell

Check valve Heated tube Sensor

Throttle Drying Actuator

Flow controller Combustion Copper tube

Flow sensor Reduction Hose line

Multiway valve Dosing pump Filter

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 35

Waste Capillary

* Note: The flow controller used in the vario TOC cube is replaced by a capillary in the vario TOC
select.

Functional units
The functional units are referred to as follows:
 Sample insertion mechanics
 Furnace area and reaction zone
 Separator
 Cooling and drying unit
 Detector

Sample insertion mechanics

The following table describes the components of the unit and their functions:
Part Name Function
I Sample vial  holds all samples in a series.
II multiway valve  holds the current sample.
 transports the current sample into the combustion tube.

For details on sample insertion, cf. Sample insertion and initiation of measurement (on page 38).

Furnace area and reaction zone

The following table describes the components of the unit and their functions:
Part Name Function
III Furnace  holds all samples in a series.
 Holds the combustion tube at a constant temperature
depending on the particular operating mode and thereby
ensures reproducible analysis results.
IV Combustion tube with tube  Space for complete combustion of the sample including
filling combustion catalyst.

For details on sample insertion see Substance digestion and preparation of the reaction gas
mixture (on page 39).

Separator
The following table describes the components of the unit and their functions:
Part Name Function
V Sparger  Separation of TIC from TC by acidifying with H3PO4 and
purging with synthetic air (and/or O2).
VI Halogen absorber  Absorption of halogens

Cooling and drying unit

The following table describes the components of the unit and their functions:
Part Name Function
VII Condenser, PermaPure,  Separation of the water from the measuring gas.
Magnesuim perchlorate

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 36

Detector
The following table describes the components of the unit and their functions:
Part Name Function
VIII IR detector  converts an optical signal (concentration fluctuations) into
an electrical signal.

For details on the working principle of the detector, cf. Detecting measuring components and
evaluating the measuring signal (on page 40).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 37

Processes in the instrument during a measurement

Target group
Personnel with basic chemical knowledge and basic computer knowledge.

Purpose
The following section is designed to help you understand the processes that take place during a
measurement and emphasize common features and differences of the various operating modes.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 38

Sample insertion and initiation of measurement

Introduction
The following section explains how to insert the analysis samples into the combustion tube and how
to initiate measurement of the reaction products.

Sample insertion processes and initiation of measurement

Sample insertion in direct mode (TC, NPOC, TOC) and initiation of measurement is divided into the
following phases:
Phase Description
1 Prior to the start of the analysis series, the samples that shall be measured in NPOC mode
will be automatically acidified with HCl (only possible with existing autosampler).
2 The IR detector performs autozero alignment of the measuring signal.
3 Meanwhile the measuring system is flushed with the corresponding sample. The multiway
vale goes to two different positions:
 Suction of the sample
 Waste
4 Subsequently, the syringe is filled the corresponding injection volume.
5 The IR detector determines the baseline.
6 The multiway valve goes to the 3rd position (sample injection into the combustion tube).
7 A pressure drop takes place and the sample is injected into the combustion tube.

Sample insertion in difference mode (TIC/TC method) and initiation of measurement is divided into
the following phases:
Phase Description
1 The acid for purging the TIC is injected into the sparger.
2 The IR detector performs autozero alignment of the measuring signal.
3 Meanwhile the measuring system is flushed with the corresponding sample. The multiway
vale goes to two different positions:
 Suction of the sample
 Waste
4 Subsequently, the syringe is filled the corresponding injection volume.
5 The IR detector determines the baseline.
6 The multiway valve goes to the 4th position (sample injection into the sparger).
7 A pressure drop takes place and the sample is injected into the sparger.
8 The multiway valve goes to the 3rd position (sample injection into the reactor).
9 A pressure drop takes place and the sample is injected into the combustion tube.

Sample insertion in direct procedure (TIC) and initiation of measurement is divided into the following
steps:
Phase Description
1 The acid for purging the TIC is injected into the sparger.
2 The IR detector performs autozero alignment of the measuring signal.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 39

3 Meanwhile the measuring system is flushed with the corresponding sample. The multiway
vale goes to two different positions:
 Suction of the sample
 Waste
4 Subsequently, the syringe is filled the corresponding injection volume.
5 The IR detector determines the baseline.
6 The multiway valve goes to the 4th position (sample injection into the sparger).
7 A pressure drop takes place and the sample is injected into the sparger..

Sample insertion in direct procedure (POC) and initiation of measurement is divided into the following
steps:
Phase Description
1 The IR detector performs autozero alignment of the measuring signal.
2 Meanwhile the measuring system is flushed with the corresponding sample. The multiway
vale goes to two different positions:
 Suction of the sample
 Waste
3 Subsequently, the syringe is filled the corresponding injection volume.
4 The IR detector determines the baseline.
5 The multiway valve goes to the 4th position (sample injection into the sparger).
6 A pressure drop takes place and the sample is injected into the sparger.

Substance digestion and preparation of the reaction gas mixture

Introduction
The following section describes which procedures in the combustion tube of the furnace are
processed.

Processes during substance digestion and preparation of the reaction gas mixture
Substance digestion and preparation of the reaction gas mixture is divided into the following phases:
Phase Process
1 The atmosphere in the combustion tube is enriched with synthetischer Luft (O2). The
organically bound carbon in the sample burns to form the gaseous reaction product CO 2.
2  In "Liquid" mode the combustion tube is filled with Pt catalyst.
 In "Solid" mode the combustion tube is filled with copper oxide.
3 The carrier gas flow transfers the gaseous combustion products into the separation unit,
where the following processes take place:
 Volatile halogen compounds are bound on the absorption reagent (e.g. silver wool).
 Containing water is separated by a condenser, by a measuring gas drying and by an
absorption tube filled with magnesium perchlorate.
 The corresponding sum parameters will be quantified.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 40

Measuring different parameters

Introduction
The following section explains how the individual parameters are measured.

Processes during the measurement of individual parameters

The following table lists the processes of the individual parameters:
Parameter Process
TC The sample will be given directly into the combustion tube.
NPOC The sample will be externally acidified and given into the combustion tube
(acidification to pH = 2 with HCl or another suitable acid).
TIC / TC The sample will be injected into the sparger. Acid (1% H 3PO4) is in the sparger. The
TIC is purged by oxygen and determined. Subsequently, the TC will be directly
injected into the combustion tube and determined.
Thus the difference from TC and TIC is TOC.
TIC The sample will be injected into the sparger. Acid (1% H 3PO4) is in the sparger. The
TIC is purged by oxygen and determined.
POC The sample will be injected into the sparger. Volatile organic carbon compounds are
determined. Volatile inorganic carbon compounds are absorbed.
TNb The sample is determined simultaneously by injection into the combustion tube.

Detection of measuring components and evaluation of the measuring signal

Introduction
The following section explains how the measuring components are detected in the reaction gas
mixture and how the measuring signal is evaluated.

Process
Detection of the measuring components and evaluation of the measuring signal take place in the
following phases:
 After the complete oxidation the CO2 gets into the IR detector with the carrier gas stream.
 Depending on the concentration the measuring component the IR detector provides an electrical
measuring signal. This will be digitalized and integrated.
 In the PC the measuring signal is recorded dependent on time and displayed as an integral.
 Depending on the selected operating mode and the set parameters, the integration display is
reset to zero by the integrator reset and a measurement may begin.
 The absolute element content of the current sample is computed from the integrals of the
individual measuring peaks and the calibration coefficients of the elements; this content is then
allocated to the sample, see Background knowledge required for calibration (on page 48).
Any blank values are factored into this calculation.

Formulas for determining element concentration of analysis samples

Procedure of liquid samples
During an analysis, the system first measures the absolute element content of the sample:
 The peak area values of the sample elements are computed.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 41

 The blank value is factored in.

 The absolute element content of the sample is computed on the basis of the calibration
coefficients of the corresponding element.

The element concentration of the sample is calculated from the computed absolute element content
and the injection volume by the following formula:
where:
c = element concentration in [mg/l]
a = absolute element content in [mg]
v = injection volume in [µl]

Procedure of solid samples

During an analysis, the system first measures the absolute element content of the sample.
 The peak area values of the sample elements are computed.
 The blank value is factored in.
 The absolute element content of the sample is computed on the basis of the calibration
coefficients of the corresponding elements.
 The daily factor is factored in.

The element concentration of the sample is calculated from the computed absolute element content
and the sample weight by the following formula:
where:
c = element concentration in [%]
a = absolute element content in [mg]
f = daily factor
w = sample weight in [mg]

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 42

Basic facts about working with the instrument

Target group
Personnel with basic chemical knowledge and basic computer knowledge.

Purpose
The following section provides basic facts about working rationally and appropriately with the
instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 43

Setting device parameters

About instrument parameters
You need to know the following about instrument parameters:
 The instrument parameters listed here are average values.
 The optimized instrument parameters from initial start-up are stored on the enclosed installation
CD/DVD/USB-Card. The user can optimize them for special applications or extraordinary
demands.
 In every operating mode, the instrument parameters required for the analysis process are saved
under Options > Settings > Parameters.

The "Device parameter" dialog

The dialog shows the device parameters currently set. It is opened via
Options > Settings > Parameters. The left field of the dialog lists the parameter categories. By
clicking the corresponding category the associated parameters will appear in the right area of the
dialog.

Temperature parameters
The factory-set temperatures are optimized for best possible sample combustion. The following table
shows the pre-set values in section Temperature and explains the meaning of the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Reactor operating temp. (Liquid Temperature of the combustion tube in the 850 °C
operation) "Liquid" mode
Reactor operating temp. (Solid Temperature of the combustion tube in the 950 °C
operation) "Solid" mode

Time parameters
The factory-set time parameters of the analyzer are selected in order to provide optimum evaluation
of the measuring signal under normal application conditions. The following table shows the pre-set
values in section Times and explains the meaning of the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Integrator reset delay TIC Defines the time after which the integrator is 2s
reset to zero before beginning actual
integration.
Integrator reset delay TC See Integrator reset delay TIC. 2s
Integrator reset delay TOC See Integrator reset delay TIC. 2s
Peak anticipation TIC Defines the time to wait for a peak after a 70 s
reset.
Peak anticipation TC See Peak anticipation TIC. 70 s
Peak anticipation Dummy See Peak anticipation TIC. 40 s
(TIC/TC)
Peak anticipation NPOC See Peak anticipation TIC. 70 s
Peak anticipation TNb See Peak anticipation TIC. 70 s
Maximum integration time Defines the time which shall be max. 600 s
integrated when no peak integration is valid
(peak anticipation time, peak end threshold).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 44

Factory set volume flow rates

The factory-set volume flow rates are selected in order to provide optimum evaluation of the
measuring signal under normal application conditions.

Note: This type of parameter is not relevant for the vario TOC select system.

The following table shows the pre-set values in section Flow and explains the meaning of the
parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Carrier gas flow Flow of the carrier gas during operation. 200 ml/min

Factory set syringe parameters

The factory-set syringe parameters are selected in order to provide optimum evaluation of the
measuring signal under normal application conditions.

The following table shows the pre-set values in section Syringe - Speed and explains the meaning of
the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Filling speed Syringe speed when it is drawing sample 300 µl/s
liquid.
Injection speed Syringe speed when it is injecting into the 300 µl/s
furnace.

The following table shows the pre-set values in section Syringe - Flush and explains the meaning of
the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Flush volume Volume which is drawn by the syringe for the 1.5 ml
flush cycle.
Flushing procedure Number of flush cycles to be performed. 3

Factory set acid dosing into the sparger

The factory-set acid volume is selected in order to provide optimum evaluation of the measuring
signal under normal application conditions.

The following table shows the pre-set values in section Acid dosing and explains the meaning of the
parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Acid volume Amount of acid which is dosed into the 0.5 ml
sparger.

Factory set IR parameters

The factory-set IR parameters are selected in order to provide optimum evaluation of the measuring
signal under normal application conditions.

The following table shows the pre-set values in section IR - Peak end and explains the meaning of
the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Peak max. limit sens./insens. Defines the value between the 10000 (vario TOC cube)
integration type non-sensitive and
sensitive. 40000 (vario TOC select)

Peak non-sensitive End Defines the threshold value where the 1200 (vario TOC cube)
threshold integration end is reached
(non-sensitive integration type). 2000 (vario TOC select)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 45

Peak sensitive End threshold Defines the threshold value where the 20 (vario TOC cube)
integration end is reached (sensitive
integration type). 40 (vario TOC select)

The following table shows the pre-set values in section IR - Fast autozero and explains the meaning
of the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
active The software automatically decides auto zero not active
performace according to different criteria.

Factory set IR-TNb parameters

The factory-set IR parameters are selected in order to provide optimum evaluation of the measuring
signal under normal application conditions.

The following table shows the pre-set values in section IR-TNb - Peak end and explains the meaning
of the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Peak max. limit sens./insens. Defines the value between the integration 10000
type non-sensitive and sensitive.
Peak non-sensitive End Defines the threshold value where the 2200
threshold integration end is reached (non-sensitive
integration type).
Peak sensitive End threshold Defines the threshold value where the 40
integration end is reached (sensitive
integration type).

The following table shows the pre-set values in section IR-TNb - Fast autozero and explains the
meaning of the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
active The software automatically decides auto zero not active
performace according to different criteria.

Factory-set EC parameters
The factory-set EC parameters are selected in order to provide optimum evaluation of the measuring
signal under normal application conditions.

The following table shows the pre-set values in section EC - Peak end and explains the meaning of
the parameters:
Parameter Meaning Factory setting
Peak max. limit sens./insens. Defines the value between the 20000 (vario TOC cube)
integration type non-sensitive and
sensitive. 40000 (vario TOC select)

Peak non-sensitive End Defines the threshold value where the 1000 (vario TOC cube)
threshold integration end is reached
(non-sensitive integration type). 200 (vario TOC select)

Peak sensitive End threshold Defines the threshold value where the 20 (vario TOC cube)
integration end is reached (sensitive
integration type). 30 (vario TOC select)

Instrument equipment
Overview drying tubes/absorption tubes
The following lists the used components:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 46

Halogen absorber (e.g. Filter tube

silver wool) (filter pad)

Drying tube Sparger

(magnesiumperchlorate
)

Acid container (125 ml) Ball valve

with gas
1% phosphoric acid connection
(H2PO4) (solids mode)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 47

Multiway valve, injection

plug with cannula (liquid
mode)

Standard combustion tube filling

The filling of the combustion tube depends on the selected operating mode.

The following pictures show how to fill the combustion tube in the various modes:
(Liquid mode)

Legend:
1 Sheath tube
2 Ash crucible
3 Quartz chips, coarse (15 mm)
4 Quartz wool (5 mm)
5 Pt catalyst (25 mm)
6 Quartz wool (5 mm)
7 Quartz chips, coarse (85 mm)
8 Quartz wool (5 mm)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 48

(Solid mode)

Legend:
1 Sheath tube
2 Ash finger
3 Al2O3 wool (ash finger bottom)
4 Corundum balls or quartz wool (5 mm)
5 Copper oxide catalyst (85 mm)
6 Corundum balls or quartz wool (5 mm)
7 Quartz chips, coarse (40 mm)
8 Quartz wool (5 mm)

Absorption tubes filling

The absorption tubes are filled with
 Magnesuim perchlorate
 Halogen absorber

Background knowledge required for calibration

Important calibration principles
Perfect calibration of the instrument is a key condition for achieving correct analysis results.
Calibration must be performed as follows:
 Separately for each operating mode.
 For each measuring component to be determined.
 Over the whole measuring range in each case.

For successful calibration the user must be familiar with the analyzer and the operating instructions.
The personnel performing calibration must therefore be authorized and must have undergone
appropriate training.

Purpose of instrument calibration

The calibration establishes a relationship between the detector signal (in relative units) and the
carbon and/or nitrogen content in the sample. Within the specified measuring ranges this relation for
carbon is linear. The measuring signal is represented by the x-axis, the absolute C and /or N content
by the y-axis. This has the advantage opposed to "measuring signal on x-axis and concentration on
y-axis" that a calibration can be used for different injection volumes.

Conditions for perfect calibration

In order to be able to calibrate the instrument perfectly, the following conditions must be met:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 49

 The instrument must have passed the leak test.

 The water blank values must be low and roughly constant.
 Only use suitable substances of at least p.a. quality as calibration samples.
 The calibration must be performed separately for every operating mode.
 The absolute element contents of the calibration samples must cover the whole measuring
range.

Note: For the determination of N it makes sense to perform a calibration with different concentrations.

When to calibrate the instrument

It is always necessary to calibrate the instrument when one of the following is true:
 You have removed components that influence analysis results, e.g. the detector.
 The daily factor for a measuring component is clearly outside of the range of 0.9 to 1.1. Also, it
displays fast changes in time from day to day. (solids mode only).

In terms of stability of a calibration the following applies:

 C component: Due to the built-in mass flow controller the carbon can be run over a very long
period of time without a new calibration. Even an exchange of the reactor does not necessarily
mean a new calibration. However, the vario TOC select instrument should be calibrated more
frequently since here the flow control is not performed by a mass flow controller but by a
capillary.
 N component: For the TNb component a calibration must be performed more frequently, if
necessary every working day.

Calibration formulae
The formulae used for calibration can be found in Calibration formulae (on page 53).

Calibration curve calculation method

For details on the various calibration curve calculation methods and when to use them, see
Calibration curve computation method criteria (on page 50).

Notes on performing calibration

For details on practical implementation of calibration, refer to
 the section Performing calibration (on page 189, on page 193) and
 the calibration tables (on page 198) for the respective mode.

Stock solution
It is recommended to prepare a higher concentrated stock solution (500 mg/l TIC + 500 mg/l TOC)
and to dilute this stock solution accordingly. As a TOC standard potassium phthalate (KHP) shall be
used; as a TIC standard sodium carbonate (Na2CO3). We strongly advise against using sodium
hydrogen carbonate (NaHCO3) as a TIC standard as part of a mixed standard since hydrocarbons
may be decomposed in the mix due to the slightly acid character of KHP.

As TNb standard sodium nitrate (NaNO3) and ammonium chloride (NH4Cl) shall be used.

The stock solution is stable for approx. 4 weeks, stronger dilutions over 1-2 days. The composition of
the above described stock solution, related to 1 l is as follows:
 1,062.5 mg KHP
 4,412.2 mg Na2CO3
 1,517.9 mg NaNO3
 955.4 mg NH4Cl

Types of calibration
 Multiple point calibration from one standard solution.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 50

The user is able to perform the calibration from one standard solution. Via the calibration wizard
any number of calibration points with any injection volumes can be selected. The system
automatically selects the different injection volumes over one order of magnitude (from 0.1-2 ml).
This is possible because the sample volume has no influence on the signal size due to the use of
a massflow controller. It only depends on the content of C and/or N.
 Multiple point calibration from multiple standard solutions.
This is the most flexible but also the most costly possibility of a calibration. Via the calibration
wizard any number of calibration points with any injection volumes can be selected. However,
this may lead to extend the concentration range over the admissible range. It is not at all
sufficient to mind the linearity of the calibration straight line. Moreover the requirements for
variant homogeneity according to DIN ISO 8466-2 have to be fulfilled.

Special features of TNb

Basically, TNb can be calibrated similar to TIC or TOC. Since the TNb analysis can be influenced more
easily by outside influences than the TOC analysis which has to do with the different thermodynamic
stability of the measuring species (here CO2, there NO), some specialities have to be considered.
 Among others, the NO yield depends on the chemical bond and the oxidation stage of the
nitrogen. Nitrate for instance has a recovery rate of approx. 100%, while ammonium has one of
about 90%. When knowing the approximate sample composition, this should be considered when
selecting the calibration standard. For unknown samples a mixed calibration of 50%
ammonium-N and 50% nitrate-N is recommended. Such a standard for 500 mg/l TNb has the
following composition:
 955 mg/l NH4Cl
 1,517.9 mg/l NaNO3
 It is possible to calibrate TNb and TIC/TOC from one and the same standard solution. In this
case, the above quantities of NH4Cl and NaNO3 shall be added to the TIC/TOC stock solution.
The advantage of this procedure is an immense time saving. Another advantage is the practical
relevance, since real samples usually also contain TOC apart from TN b.
 Furthermore, you should notice that the TNb calibration often can be non linear. For real sample
measurements you should ensure that the calculated peak area is within the calibrated range.
This also applies for small TNb concentrations. We recommend to calibrate additionally a low TNb
concentration (e.g. 1 mg/l), at least when calibrating a high measuring range.
 The calibration of the TNb should be preferentially performed with different concentrations and
one injection volume. A calibration of 2nd order is often recommended.

Calibration curve calculation method criteria

Calibration curve configuration options
The user can specify the calibration curve calculation method according to the following criteria:
 Calibration can be performed over the whole measuring range either consistently or in two
ranges.
 For a specific element content you can set a dividing line for two calibration ranges.
 For each range, you select a polynomial degree according to which to compute the calibration
curve (linear to 4th degree).

Calculation criteria
Look to the calibration view of the combi view for calibration curve calculation method criteria. You get
to the calibration view after performing or loading a series of defined calibration samples by selecting
Calibration > Calibrate... and then the "Configuration calibration" dialog.

Ideal calculation method

If possible, try to compute calibration curves so that they
 are uniform over the whole measuring range and/or concentration range

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 51

 and can be displayed in linear form or on the basis of a polynomial of the lowest order.

To facilitate selecting a calculation method, four typical calibration graphs are shown below along with
the suitable calculation method.

Note: For better understanding the calibration graphics are shown in a simplyfied way.

Linear calculation over the whole range

The following picture shows an example in which a linear calculation over the whole range achieves
acceptable calibration curve quality.

Linear calculation over two ranges

The following picture shows an example in which a linear calculation over two ranges achieves
acceptable calibration curve quality.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 52

Linear and polynomial calculation

The following picture shows an example in which the calibration curve exhibits acceptable quality by
means of a linear calculation in the low concentration range and a polynomial calculation in the higher
concentration range.

Polynomial calculation over the whole range

The following picture shows an example in which a polynomial calculation over the whole range
achieves acceptable calibration curve quality.

Achievable calibration curve quality

Process standard deviation "Proc-SD" and quality factor "r" serve as a measure of achievable
calibration curve quality.

Use the following values for process standard deviation "Proc-SD" as guidelines:
Acceptable value: Proc-SD = ±0,001 µg in the lower range
Proc-SD = ±0,05 µg in the upper range
Very good value: Proc-SD = ±0,0005 µg

Use the following values for quality factor "r" as guidelines:

Good value for linear calibration function: r = 0.99 (r should tend to 1)
Good value for polynomial as calibration function r = < 2-4 (r should tend to 0)

If you do not approximately achieve the listed values you can assume that you have chosen the
wrong calibration curve calculation method.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 53

Calibration formulae
Calculation of absolute element content
Calibration is performed by analyzing samples with known concentrations (standard samples) where
the measured peak areas are correlated with the corresponding absolute element content.

For a standard sample, the following parameters are known:

 element concentration
 Weight (= injection volume x density)

Absolute element content is computed according to this formula:

where:
a = absolute element content in [µg]
c = element concentration in [mg/kg]
v = injection volume in [µl]
d = densitiy in [mg/µl]

Computing calibration coefficients

Once the absolute element contents have been computed and the peak areas have been measured
for the respective sample, the pairs of values (absolute content / peak area) are transferred into a
coordinate system where they form the calibration curve. By means of an algorithm, the calibration
coefficients a - e are computed which, entered in a polynomial, constitute the calibration curve.

Absolute element content is computed according to this formula:

where:
y = absolute element content in [mg]
a...e = calibration coefficients
x = peak area

Computing the quality factor for polynomials of the 1st degree

In order to assess how well the calibration curve described by the polynomial follows the actual
development of the pairs of values, the softare computes a quality factor for each calibration process.
For a polynomial of the 1st degree (linear equation), this quality factor corresponds to the correlation
coefficient. The closer the correlation coefficient tends to 1, the better the fit.

The correlation coefficient is computed according to this formula:

where:
r2 = correlation coefficient
xi = peak area of the corresponding sample
yi = absolute content of the corresponding
sample
n = number of samples
i = index from 1 to n

Computing the quality factor for polynomials of a higher degree

In order to assess how well the calibration curve described by the polynomial follows the actual
development of the pairs of values, the softare computes a quality factor for each calibration process.
For a polynomial of a higher degree, this quality factor corresponds to the sum of the error squares.
The closer the sum of error squares tends to 0, the better the fit.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 54

The sum of error squares is computed with these formulae:

where:
q = quality
ssq = sum of error squares
acti = actual absolute content computed respectively
theoi = theoretical absolute content respectively
n = number of samples
i = index from 1 to n

Calibration in the measuring range < 0.5 mg/l

Special care for the calibration shall be taken when measuring in the trace and ultra trace range. In
general, at least a 5-point calibration with a triple determination per calibration point shall be used.

Furthermore, it has be proven to be advantageous to force the calibration straight line through the
coordinate origin. For this purpose set the coefficient "a" = 0 manually after completion of the
calibration evaluation.

Calibration wizard
Definitions
The calibration wizard allows the user to easily create a calibration via the software.

Calibration wizard
The vario TOC software offers two different calibration types:
 Different injection volumes, equal concentration
 Different concentrations, equal injection volume.

Utilizing the calibration wizard

Proceed as follows:
 Open the wizard in the operating software by selecting Wizards > Calibration. The dialog "Step
1 of 6" appears. In this step the wizard shows a welcome message.
 Click Next. The dialog "Step 2 of 6" appears.
 In step 2:
Select the requested number of measurements per sample.
Enter the number of run-in and blank value samples.
Enter the number of calibration samples.
 Click Next. The dialog "Step 3 of 6" appears.
 In step 3:
Select a measuring method, e.g. "cal-direct".
 Click Next. The dialog "Step 4 of 6" appears.
 In step 4:
Select the gradation type:
 Different volumes (one stock solution)
Select the injection volume range, if it is not preset in the method. The calibration is
automatically computed by the preset calibration points. It is recommended to coordinate
the calibration points with the injection volumne range in order to gain a reasonable
injection volumume for the calibration.
 Different solutions (fixed volume).
Select the injection volume, if it is not preset in the method. The calibration is automatically
computed by the preset calibration points, based on the highest standard substance.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 55

 Click Next. The dialog "Step 5 of 6" appears.

 In step 5:
Select the standard name with which shall be calibrationed, e.g. the given standard "std-npoc 10
ppm".
 Click Next. The dialog "Step 6 of 6" appears. Step 6 shows you which actions necessary for the
calibration must subsequently be performed by you.
 Click Finish. This closes the winzard. The previously defined standards and the corresponding
calibration points will be automatically carried over into the sample field.
 Prepare one (or multiple) stock solutions according to the selected calibration.

Routine measuring work

Definitions
Routine measuring work comprises the following activities:
 Determination of instrument blank values.
 Instrument conditioning with conditioning samples.
 Determination of daily factors.

Routine measuring work is performed at set intervals or on defined occasions before, during or after a
series of measurements with real samples.

Instrument blank values

Determination of the instrument blank value depends on your needs. The following overview shows
the type and purpose of the individual determinations.
Purpose Sample Blank value* Occasion
Blank value determination Distilled water C Evaluation of a measuring series
of water
Blank value determination  Sample C to allow for sample additives or
of sample additives and additive packing material
packing materials (only in  Packing
solids mode) material

Conditioning samples
Conditioning samples are measured with ultra pure water at the start of every series of analyses.
They serve as a control of the correct analysis process as well as for cleaning of the system after
longer shutdowns.

Daily factor determinations

Determination of the daily factor serves...
 ... to fine-tune instrument calibration to room conditions at the time of analysis.
 ... to assess the condition of the instrument by observing daily factor fluctuations and drift trends.

When to perform routine measuring work

Perform routine measuring work...
 ... at least once a day.
 ... additionally when measuring breaks last longer than 2 hours.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 56

Formulae for blank value determination and compensation

Blank samples and blank values
Blank samples are samples
 which consist of ultra pure water which is used for preparation of the standard,
 that have a key word for identification by the software as blind samples.

Despite the lack of sample substance, a peak area value is computed on the basis of various factors
when analyzing blank samples. This peak area value is referred to as a blank value. In order to
compensate for this, the averaged blank value is subtracted from the measured peak area value of
every individual analysis sample.

Blank value determination

The type of blank determination depends on the selected analysis mode. Basically, we decide
between two determination modes:
 Blank determination in the solids modes
 Blank determination in the liquid modes

Blank determination in the solids modes

In blank value determination in the solids modes, the peak area values of the blank samples are
averaged. The blank value is computed according to this formula:
where:
/b = blank value
bi = peak areas of the individual blank samples
n = number of blank samples
i = index from 1 to n

Blank determination in the liquid modes

For blank value determination in the liquid modes the peak areas of the blank samples are averaged
and divided by the injection volume. By this, you will obain a blank value rate. This is necessary to
compensate blank values of samples with different injection volumes The blank value rate is
computed according to this formula:
where:
/r = blank value rate
bi = peak areas of the individual blank samples
n = number of blank samples
v = injection volume
i = index from 1 to n

Note: The injection volume is the same for all blank samples!

Blank value compensation

Also the type of compensation for solids and liquid samples is different.

Compensation of the blank value into the solids modes

The peak areas of the other samples are compensated with the aid of this formula:
where:
acomp = compensated peak area
a = measured peak area of the sample
/b = blank value

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 57

Compensation of the blank value in the liquid modes

The peak areas of the other samples are compensated with the aid of this formula:
where:
acomp = compensated peak area
a = measured peak area of the sample
/r = blank value rate
v = injection volume

Formula for determining the daily factor

Determining the daily factor
Standard samples are analyzed to determine the daily factor. The known element concentration of the
standard samples is correlated with the actual element concentration computed.

Daily factor determination is possible in solids mode only.

Daily factor
The daily factor is computed according to this formula:
where:
f = daily factor
ctheo = theoretical element concentration
cact = element concentration computed actually

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 58

Database working environment

Target group
Personnel with basic chemical knowledge and basic computer knowledge.

Purpose
The following section is designed to help you understand and get to know the database working
environment.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 59

Database
What is a database?
A database is characterized by the following:
 A database is an organized collection of data managed by a data management system.
 Different users can access shared data in a database.
 Databases allow the user to input, edit and delete data.
 Databases permit searching and selecting data with the aid of filters.
 Databases allow the user to create evaluations and statistics.
 Databases allow the user to output data in the form of reports.

Maximum database size

The maximum size of the database is limited to 2 gigabytes. The software displays a warning if the
size of the database exceeds 1 gigabyte or if available disk space is less than 1 gigabyte. In this case
the database should be reorganized. See Administrative work on the database (on page 59).

Database protection
If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, the database protects you from:
 Data loss. The sample data can only be overwritten as long as these samples have not yet been
analyzed. Afterwards, a new file version is created retaining the same file name and the previous
version. This allows you to track all changes to the sample data.
 Data distortion. Authorized individuals can add an electronic signature to data documents; the
authenticity of this signature can be verified. In addition, the activities of the indivdiual users are
recorded in a logbook for tracking purposes along with a timestamp and user name.
 Unauthorized access to data. There are various password-protected user levels. This allows you
to restrict access to the various menu functions.

See 21 CFR Part 11 functionality (on page 74).

Administrative work on the database

Reorganizing the database
The software always works with one and the same database. Because the size of the database is
limited to 2 gigabytes, it is necessary to reorganize the database regularly. Database reorganization
removes all sample data and the contents of the logbook from the database file, but retains the other
data such as settings, coefficients, etc.

Datebase backup
"Backup" copies the complete existing database file to a certain directory under a different name,
thereby "capturing" a certain state.

Export and import

It is not possible to load and save data from/to a database in the usual way. However, by using the
File > Export/Import > Export and File > Export/Import > Import menu functions it is possible to
transport documents "out of" the database and to transport external documents "into" the database.

Restoring the database

"Restore" reloads an old database file and irrevocably deletes the current data.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 60

Database backup
What happens during backup?
Backup copies the complete existing database file to a certain directory under a different name,
thereby "capturing" a certain state.

Backup settings
The following backup settings are available:
 Auto-start backup:
 daily
 every X minutes
 every X hours
 once at a certain time
 Start backup manually

Auto-save
The document currently open is automatically saved to a temporary file every 3 minutes if it is
changed.

Autoexport
Autoexport creates a backup of the current document as an mdb file after every save or sub-save
process. The advantage of this is that you do not always have to save the whole database. However,
autoexport is only performed if you have defined a directory for saving backups. You can set this
directory in the Configuration menu. The file name is as follows: xxxxx.YYMMDDhhmmss.mdb. The
file name consists of the following components:
Component Meaning
xxxxx Document name
YYMMDD Current date (year, month, day)
hhmmss Current time (hour, minute, second)

Important Notice
It cannot be ruled out that under some circumstances (power failure, defective PC etc.) the
database file might be damaged. In most cases, a damaged database file is no longer useable.
Therfore, it is strongly recommended that you perform backups in appropriate intervals in
order to allow to restore the damaged database file without major data losses. Backups should
not be performed on the local harddisk but a safer strategie should be used (e.g. backup on a
PC of the network or on an external harddisk etc.).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 61

Understanding the operating software

Target group
Personnel with basic chemical knowledge and basic computer knowledge.

Purpose
This section describes
 the layout of the user interface
 what instrument functions are controlled by the software
 what current information is displayed during the analysis process
 and how the raw analysis data are further processed, archived and managed

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 62

Basic functions of the operating software

Introduction
The following section describes the functions of the operating software and what instrument control
and data processing operations are possible.

Instrument control and parametrization

Instrument control and parametrization functions:
 Starting a single analysis:
 Starting and stopping a series of analyses
 Entering parameters to prepare the instrument for measuring and for standby mode transitioning
(wake-up and sleep functions)
 Determination of methods
 Specifying time and temperature parameters of the analyzer

Data input
Data input functions:
 Injection volume (via method)
 Sample weight (solids mode)
 Name
 Blank values

Processing measuring data

Measuring data processing functions:
 Measurement and numerical output of element contents in absolute values and percentages
 Statistical evaluation of analysis data

Management of analysis data; data security

Analysis data management and data security functions
 Importing/exporting from and to MS Excel and MS Access
 Interfaces to LIMS
 Security functions using digital signatures

Support for maintenance/repair

Maintenance and repair support functions:
 Definition of maintenance events and display when due
 calculation of calibration coefficients and assessment criteria for calibration quality
 System diagnostics functions

Display analysis values and instrument state

Functions for current analysis value and current instrument state display:
 Analysis progress
 Temperature of the reaction tubes
 Gas flows and pressure conditions in the instrument
 Due time/date of next maintenance event
 Current detector display
 Element content of current sample

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 63

Software user interface

The main window of the operating software
The following screenshot shows the main window of the operating software and designates the
various areas and bars:

Title bar
The title bar displays the name of the file that you are currently processing. The title bar has the usual
functions for displaying the system menu and for minimizing, maximizing and closing the window.

Menu bar
The menu bar shows the top level of the menu tree. You can access dialogs and input windows, etc.
from the menubar for the following:
 Saving, editing and managing analysis data,
 Defining and entering sample data and instrument parameters,
 Specifying maintenance events,
 Configuring and performing statistical evaluations.

Details on the various dialogs and input windows accessible from the menu bar can be found at Menu
and dialog descriptions (on page 331) and in the online help.

Toolbar
The toolbar allows you quick access to frequently required commands and functions. Among others,
via the toolbar you can...
 ... create or save analysis series in the form of a file and open existing analysis files.
 ... cut, copy and paste sample data.
 ... switch the sample view.
 ... enable statistical and calibration functions.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 64

 ... "wake up" the "sleeping" instrument.

 ... start and stop individual and continuous analyses.
 ... display the online help.

Details on the various buttons on the toolbar can be found at Toolbar (on page 395) and in the online
help.

Sample view
The sample view displays a table of input, measuring and computed analysis data of all samples in a
particular series. If an error occurs while measuring a sample, the table contains an appropriate
message. For details on the sample view, see The sample view (on page 64).

Combi view
The combi view contains different information depending on the selected display mode:
 In progression/graph view, it displays the time-dependent development of the detector signals or
a diagram of various instrument parameters of the currently selected sample.
 In statistics view it displays statistical analysis data of the selected group of samples.
 In calibration window view it displays a diagram of the calibration factors for the series under
review and the calibration curves of the individual elements.

For details on the combi view and its various display modes, see The combi view (on page 66).

"Current sample" field

This field displays a zoomed-in view of the data of the current sample. Here you can view the analysis
results of the particular sample at a glance, even if you are not directly in front of the screen.

Status view
The status view contains information about the current operating states of the analyzer. For details on
the status view, See The status view (on page 70).

Status bar
The status bar can contain the following information:
 If you hover the mouse over a menu command or toolbar button, a short help text on the
command is displayed on the left of the status bar.
 The name of the current user logged in is displayed in the middle of the status bar.
 The name of the user group to which the currently logged in user belongs is displayed on the
right.

Sample view
Introduction
The following section describes what you can input in the sample view and what information you can
get from the sample view.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 65

View
The sample view looks like a familiar calculation sheet in a spreadsheet program.

Sample view input functions

In the sample view you define the sequence of your analysis samples. The sequence must match the
sequence in which you arrange your samples on the carousel. To enable the instrument to analyze
and evaluate a sample correctly, you must have entered the appropriate information in the sample
view columns:
Column Explanation
TOC volume (ml) or Sample weight in ml or mg (if the instrument is not connected to a balance that
weight [mg] (solids) automatically transfers the sample weight to the computer).
Name Sample name; for samples which serve for the performance of measuring
routine work, the predefined keywords have to be used.
Method Assignment of an analysis method, see direct methed, difference method.
Coefficients Assignment of a coefficients set.

In the "Memo" column you can input any special features of the sample or the analysis procedure as
free text.

Color coding
Some table lines in the sample view are highlighted by a colored background or colored text. The
following table indicates the meaning of the various color codes:
Color code Meaning
green background Indicates the current sample
red text Indicates a sample with a stop marker set
green text Indicates samples with reserved names for routine measuring work or
calibration samples
black text Indicates all other samples

Meaning of symbols in the "No." column

In the "No." column a symbol is displayed next to the serial number generated by the system; this
symbol indicates the status of the individual samples. The following table lists the possible symbols
and what they mean.
Icon Meaning
Sample not yet analyzed, but a measuring method has been set and a sample name
exists.
Sample not yet analyzed, but a sample name has been set and a method does not yet
exist.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 66

Sample analyzed error-free with valid date information.

Sample without valid date information.

Sample which caused a non-critical error during measurement or when the measured
peak area is outside of the specified calibration. The result was interpolated. The error
code is entered in the "Info" column, see Interpreting PC error messages (on page
268).
Sample at which the series was stopped.

Meaning of the column "Hole pos."

In the column "Hole pos." the position numbers appear, with an existing sampler, which shall be
processed.

Further information in the sample view

Depending on the selected operating mode, the following values can be displayed in the appropriate
columns for each analyzed sample:
 the integral of the individual measuring components
 the element content percentages of the samples
 the daily factors of the elements for the particular sample
 the blank values of the elements for the particular sample
 date and time of measuring the particular sample

By selecting the View > Gridview > Configure menu you can show/hide every table column and
define the order as desired.

Note on data output

The selected sample view screen view also corresponds to the display in a printed report.

Combi view
Introduction
The following section describes the various views of the combi view and their information contents. By
selecting the View > Toggle menu you can switch between the following combi views:
 Progression view (graph view)
 Statistics view
 Calibration view

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 67

Progression view (graph view) using the example of vario TOC cube

Progression view displays a graph of the development over time of important instrument parameters
and measured values during measurement of the sample selected in the sample view. You can
recognize the current sample by the green border around the graph display.

You can display the following individual parameters and measured values:
 the temperature of the combustion tube
 the gas flow through the MFC (only vario TOC cube)
 pressure in the instrument
 Detector output signals

For details on configuring the analysis progression view, see Data backup and printing (on page
170).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 68

Statistics view

The statistics view displays the concentration value percentages of all samples in a series, grouped
by sample name.

For each group of samples, the following calculated statistical values per element are also displayed:
 the mean values of the element contents
 the absolute standard deviation of the mean values
 the relative standard deviation of the mean values
 the difference (Delta) of the highest and lowest element content of the group

You can exclude individual samples and/or values of a group from the calculation of statistical values
or include them again.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 69

Calibration view

If your series includes samples previously defined as calibration samples, you can use them to
calculate calibration coefficients.

In this case, the calibration view displays the following information:

 For each defined calibration range a graph display of the calibration curve optimized for the
respective calibration samples.
 The calibration coefficients computed according to the selected polynomial degree.
 The correlation coefficient for the depicted calibration curve that allows you to assess the quality
of calibration.

In the graph display, the samples used for compute the calibration curves are displayed as small
circles. You can click one of these circles to display further information on the particular sample, see
Background knowledge required for calibration (on page 48). This information allows you to
assess whether the sample must be treated as an "outlier" and therefore excluded from the
calculation of the calibration coefficients. If you have assessed the calibration curves in this way and
browse on to the next view, the "calibration coefficient" dialog is displayed with the current computed
values. When you confirm this dialog by clicking OK, the calibration coefficients for the series are
applied and the content of the calibration view is deleted (message: "No calibration or calibration
finished").

Note on data output

The selected screen view of the combi view also corresponds to the display in a printed report.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 70

Status view
Introduction
The following section describes what information about the analysis procedure and the condition of
the instrument is displayed in the status view.

View
The following picture shows the status view in offline status using the example of vario TOC cube:

Meaning of the colored background

On the basis of the color of the status view background you can tell straight away whether the PC is
properly connected to the analyzer. The meaning of the colors is:
 green: The analyzer is connected to the PC and switched on. With the aid of the PC you can
 enter analysis or instrument parameters
 start or abort analyses
 perform maintenance or diagnostics tasks.
 gray: The analyzer is not connected to the PC or switched off. The operating software is running
in offline status.

The areas of the status view and what they mean

The following table lists the individual areas of the status view and the information they contain:
Area Meaning
Process Displays a list of individual processes during the analysis procedure. The current
process is highlighted with a colored background so that you can see the
progress of the analysis of the current sample straight away. Displays "Standby"
when the instrument is in idle mode.
IR detector Displays the following current values of the detectors:
 the current height of the current measuring peak
Temperatures Displays the current temperatures of the following units:
 Combustion tube
 IR temperature
Flow Displays the current gas flows here:
 through the MFC IR (only vario TOC cube)
 carrier gas flow through the analysis apparatus
In addition to the numeric data, the gas flows are also displayed in bar chart form.
Pressure Displays the current pressure in the apparatus numerically and as a bar chart.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 71

Maintenance Maintenance intervals for the analyzer are defined on the basis of the maximum
number of measured samples until a certain maintenance event occurs, see
Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184). The
"Maintenance" section displays the current percentage of the specified number of
samples until the next maintenance interval. This figure is displayed numerically
and as a bar chart. The colors of the chart indicates the progress of the the next
due maintenance interval.
 green: less than 80%
 yellow: 80 to 99%
 red: more than 99%
When a maintenance interval is due, its name is displayed as text on the bar chart
and a symbol flashes drawing the user's attention to this issue.

Right mouse button function

General
For many situations the right mouse key allows easily access to useful functions. This section
describes the most important functions which can be invoked via the right mouse key.

In the sample window.

Depending on what is selected, pressing the right mouse button in the sample view displays a
selection or all of the following commands:
Command Meaning
Copy Copies the contents of a selected line to the clipboard.
Delete Deletes the contents of a selected line.
Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard in the selected line.
Set current sample Opens the "Set current sample" dialog. See Adjusting the current
sample.
Set stop tag Opens the "Set stop tag" dialog. See Setting a stop marker.

In the combi view

If the statistics view is active in the combi view you can press the right mouse button to display the
Configure view and Include/exclude sample commands:
Command Meaning
Configure view Opens the "Configure statistics view" dialog. See Configure statistics
view.
Include/exclude sample Includes/excludes a sample from the statistical calculation.

If the graph view is active in the combi view, you can right-click on "Configure view" to display the
"Configure Graphic Pane" dialog. See Configure graph view.

In dialogs
In dialogs you can also press the right mouse button to display certain commands. In the "Configure
view" dialog, right click to display the Properties command, that opens the "Column properties"
dialog. See Configure view (on page 160).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 72

Data administration and data security

Target group
Personnel with basic chemical knowledge and basic computer knowledge.

Purpose
This section describes what options the system offers with regard to data administration and data
security.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 73

Laboratory information and management system (LIMS)

What does LIMS do?
The Laboratory Information and Management System (LIMS) collects and manages data from
different systems and thereby facilitates laboratory operation and documentation.

Interaction between the software and LIMS

The following features characterise the interaction between the analyzer software and LIMS:
 The flow of data is unidirectional, i. e. it only goes in one direction, from the analyzer to LIMS.
 Data transfer is either via the serial interface or through the network.
 The data to be transferred can be selected.
 The data are transferred as ASCII files.
 The names of the ASCII files are formed from a time/date stamp and a freely definable file
extension.
 Every data transfer includes a freely definable user name and a freely definable instrument
identifier.
 Data can be sent automatically after every analysis or manually by selecting the appropriate
menu command.

File name structure

The file name generated for LIMS has the following format: dddsssss.xxx, consisting of the
following elements:
 ddd: Days since January 1.
 sssss: Seconds since midnight.
 xxx: File extension defined by the user.

Sequence of data transferred.

The sequence of the data transferred corresponds to the list of data in the "LIMS settings" dialog,
"LIMS export data" tab, from top to bottom. See the LIMS (Dialog) under capter Menu and dialog
descriptions.

Conditions for operating the LIMS

Data transfer via the serial interface
Normally, data transfer to LIMS is performed through a network. However, if you want to transfer data
via the serial interface, you must make sure that the LIMS port name is not identical to the port name
between the PC and the analyzer. This could lead to a system crash.

Identical LIMS and instrument software settings

When transferring data to LIMS, observe the following:
 The LIMS program receving the data must be set to the same data volume as the sender
Elementar program. If you change the LIMS settings, you must therefore adjust the LIMS
program appropriately.
 The data sent to LIMS are tab-separated. The LIMS program must be able to interpret this
correctly.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 74

21 CFR Part 11 functionality

What is 21 CFR Part 11?
21 CFR Part 11 is a regulation that was published by the American Food and Drug Administration
(FDA), under number 21 CFR part 11, at the end of the 1990s and that has legal force in the USA. It
governs technical and organizational requirements to be fulfilled in order to use electronic data and
documents instead of paper for development, approval and production.

Whom does 21 CFR Part 11 apply to?

21 CFR Part 11 applies to:
 All sectors of the pharmaceutical and medical technology industry in the USA working in
FDA-regulated areas. They are obliged to keep their electronic data and computer systems in
conformance with 21 CFR Part 11.
 Also, all companies outside of the USA that manufacture products for the American market or
develop products with regard to having them subsequently approved for the US market.

Requirements of 21 CFR Part 11

The system conforms to 21 CFR Part 11 and therefore meets the following requirements:
 Generation of exact electronic analysis data.
 Protection of the generated analysis data from intentional and unintentional modification.
 Possibility of performing audit trails.
 Signing of electronic documents with electronic signatures.
 Access control to menu functions by password-protected user levels.

Generation of exact electronic analysis data

The data recorded during the analysis process are converted into the respective element contents
with the aid of algorithms and reliably saved. Generation of exact results is therefore ensured.

Protection of analysis data

The recorded and computed data are stored in a database. The sample data can only be overwritten
as long as these samples have not yet been analyzed. Afterwards, a new file version is created
retaining the same file name and the previous version. This allows end-to-end tracking of changes in
the series of samples, where unauthorized manipulating of the data is not possible as they are
encapsulated in the database. See Versioning (on page 75).

Performing audit trails

Every user action is recorded and permanently stored in a logfile - the logbook. All actions are given a
timestamp and the name of the user currently logged in. Some actions must be justified by the
respective user and this justification is also saved to the logfile. The logbook records can be viewed
when performing audit trails. This makes it possible to evidence appropriate procedure in generating
the data and operating the analyzer.

Signing documents
Every document can be "signed" up to three times by authorized individuals. This is done on the
following occasions:
 When the document is created
 When the document is reviewed
 In order to release the document

When signing, the signee enters a password only known to him. With the aid of this password and a
key, it is possible to check the correct document signature at other points (for example after sending
the document by e-mail). It is thus possible to ascertain whether the data contained are authentic.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Understanding the instrument and planning its use 75

Restricted access to menu functions

The software restricts access to the menu functions on the basis of three user groups:
 The lowest user group may only perform actions required in routine operation.
 The middle user group may also perform actions requiring experience, e.g. calibration.
 The top user group may also perform actions requiring a great deal of experience, e. g. changes
to the system configuration.

The software also prevents unauthorized individuals from interfering with the system when the
authorized user is not present. If the user has not performed an action for some time, the software
prompts him to log in again.

Versioning
Versioning
If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, a new version of the document is created as soon as an
analyzed sample is changed.

Version identification
Every version is identified as follows:
 with an index number,
 with the date of creation,
 and with the name of the user who made the change.

The current version is number 0, the previous versions are indexed -1, -2, etc.

Protection of previous versions

Previous versions are write-protected, i.e. they cannot be edited but only viewed or printed out.

Linking the analyzer and software

Background
It is important that the analysis data can be unambiguously allocated to the analyzer with which they
were generated. This allocation is performed via a serial number. In every instrument, the individual
serial number is stored in a memory module and queried by the software when you launch the
program. The program can only be operated in combination with the analyzer if the serial number
matches the software licence number. This ensures that the analyzer is always operated together
with the same software and the settings recorded in the logbook.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 4

Product description

Target group
Personnel working with the instrument.

Purpose
This section provides general information about the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 78

Analytical characteristics and technical specifications

Target group
Personnel working with the instrument.

Purpose
This section lists the analytical characteristics and technical specifications.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 79

Analytical characteristics
Analytical characteristics
The following table explains the analytical characteristics:
Analytical characteristic Comments
Analysis method Elemental analysis of TIC, TC, TOC, NPOC, POC, DOC. It is
additionally possible to determine TNb by using the TNb
determination kit. Catalytic high temperature oxidation of the
samples, infrared detection.
Detector  vario TOC cube:
C: NDIR
N: (optional) EC, NDIR or CLD
 vario TOC select:
C: NDIR
N: EC
Sample volume  vario TOC cube:
100 - 2000 µl, depending on the concentration range
 vario TOC select:
100 - 1500 µl, depending on the concentration range
Working range  vario TOC cube:
0 - 60,000 mg/l C
 vario TOC select:
0 - 100,000 mg/l C
Precision / standard deviation TOC/NPOC/TC/TIC:
1 % at > 5 mg/l
Duration of analysis 3 - 15 minutes
(depending on operating mode,
parameter to be determined,
sample volume and content)
Calibration from linear to 4th order
(fully automatic and/or user specific)
Sample digestion  catalytic combustion at 720°C-850°C (liquid mode)
 catalytic combustion at 950°C (solid mode)
 acidic digestion of TIC with phosphorous acid (1-10%)
Data storage and data output Storage on hard disk or external storage media.
LIMS transfer possible.
Data output to screen and printer.

Technical specifications
Standardization
The instrument conforms to CE standards in accordance with EC Directives:
 EMC 89/336/EEC
 LVD 73/23/EEC

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 80

Control and data processing

The following table contains the technical specifications of the control and data processing system:
Reference value Technical specifications
Control and evaluation unit PC with operating system Windows 7® Professional or a newer
version of Windows Professional
Printer (optional)
Software Multilingual (at least German and English)
Menu-driven
Status display during analysis
Real-time graphics
Interfaces USB, Safety low voltage as per DIN IEC 380/VDE 0806/08.81

Dimensions and weights

The following table contains dimensions and weight of the instrument:
Reference value Technical specifications
Dimensions 480 mm x 550 mm x 570 mm without sample feeder (Width x
Depth x Height)
Weight 60 kg

Electrical and gas supply

The following table contains the technical specifications of the electrical and gas supply:
Reference value Technical specifications
Mains voltage 100-230 Volt AC ± 10%; 50-60 Hz
Power requirement 0.35 kWh/h
Connected load 800 VA
Connected electrical loads and Connected electrical load: 16 A
frequency of the complete analysis Voltage: 100V AC ± 10 %
unit 120V AC ± 10 %
230V AC ± 10 %
Frequency: 50-60 Hz
Supply gases Synthetic air, purity 99.996 %, 1000 mbar
Oxygen, purity 99.995 %, 1000 mbar

Ambient conditions
The following table contains the technical specifications of the ambient conditions:
Reference value Technical specifications
Protection class Protection class I, protective conductor connection
Mode of protection IP20, installation in dry rooms only
Noise level 55 dB (A), as per DIN 45635 section 1
Permissible ambient temperature Maximum: + 35 °C, minimum: + 15 °C

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 81

Instrument design
Target group
Personnel involved with the instrument.

Purpose
This section describes the design of the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 82

Front view
Front view, open
The following picture shows the front view of the instrument with the front door opened:

Legend:
1 Multiway valve
2 Syringe
3 Halogen absorber
4 Furnace with heat protection cladding
5 Drying tube
6 Acid container

Furnace section
Location of the furnace section
The furnace section is located behind the front door of the instrument. The front door is held by a
magnet, thus it can be opened easily.

What is inside the furnace section?

In the furnace area there is a furnace with one heater. The temperatures of the heater is pre-selected
from the PC. The heater is temperature-monitored by the software and can be shut down in the event
of a malfunction.

Where is the reaction tube in the furnace section?

The reaction tube is located in the middle of the furnace area (centered).

Furnace section
The following picture shows the furnace section of the instrument:

Legend:
1 Multiway valve
2 Park position multiway valve
3 Combustion tube (reactor)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 83

Rear view
Rear view
The following picture shows the rear view of the analyzer:

Legend:
1 Rear wall
2 Air baffle
3 "PC" PC connector (USB)
4 "Reserve" not used
5 "~" mains connector
6 "Synth.air" carrier gas inlet
7 "IR" measuring gas outlet
8 Gas drying outlet
9 "waste" output waste
10 "TIC" TIC connector
11 "CLD" CLD connector

Right side view

Right side view, closed
The following picture shows the right side of the analyzer with the side door closed, as seen from the
front:

Legend:
1 Right side door
2 Main switch

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 84

Right side view, open

The following picture shows the right side of the analyzer with the side door open, as seen from the
front:

Legend:
1 Mainboard
2 Stirrer motor
3 Main switch

Left side view

Left side view, closed
The following picture shows the left side of the analyzer with the side door closed, as seen from the
front:

Legend:
1 Fan

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 85

Left side view, open

The following picture shows the left side of the analyzer with the side door open, as seen from the
front:

Legend:
1 IR detector (here: vario TOC cube)
2 Sparger
3 Condenser
4 Fan
5 Membrane gas drying
6 Filter
7 Acid pump
8 Waste drain valve
9 Capillary

Top view
Top view of the instrument
The following picture shows the top view of the instrument:

Legend:
1 Sample container liquids
2 Insertion hole solid samples

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Product description 86

Peripherals and their function

Types of peripherals
The following picture shows the analyzer and its peripherals

Legend:
1 Instrument
2 Balance
3 Printer
4 PC

Functions of the peripherals

The following table lists the functions of peripherals:
Peripheral Function Requirement
PC Operation of the instrument with required
operating software
Balance Weighing of the samples required
Printer Print out measuring results, etc. recommended

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 5

Work performed by the system

administrator

Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section enables you to perform typical system administrator tasks.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 88

Installing and updating the software

Conditions for installation
In order to install the software correctly, administrator rights for the PC must be available.

Requirements for operation

Do the following to be able to operate the software without any problems:
 On the PC where the software is installed, check power management settings under Control
Panel > Power Management or under Control Panel > Power Options. The following options
must be set to "Never":
 "Turn off monitor"
 "Turn off hard disks"
 "System stand by"
 "System hibernates"
 Power management must also be disabled in the PC's BIOS.

The PC on which the software is installed must not be overloaded with other software. This could
cause unstable operation of the software.

Installing and updating the software

Proceed as follows:
 Insert the enclosed CD/DVD in the CD/DVD-ROM drive or plug the USB card into an available
USB slot.
 The CD/DVD usually starts automatically. If the CD / DVD does not start automatically,
execute the setup.exe file.
 At the USB-Card execute the setup.exe file.
 Select the desired language.
 The installation wizard is displayed. Click Next and follow the steps of the installation wizard.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 89

Configure analyzer
Target group
Personnel with basic chemical knowledge and basic computer knowledge.

Purpose
This section describes what the instrument does, what the analysis parameters mean, and what
happens in the instrument during an analysis.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 90

What can you modify in the configuration?

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Improper changes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

What can you set?

You can set the following in the configuration:
 Interface properties
 Weighing data properties
 Signature program properties
 Device parameter

See Configure analyzer (on page 89).

Defining logon timeout

What is the logon timeout?
The logon timeout defines the time to wait in which the user does not perform any action before the
operating software displays a dialog to log in again.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Improper changes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Defining logon timeout

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Device configuration" dialog by selecting Options > Configuration.
 Select the "DEVICE.INI" tab. Select the "System" section by clicking the arrow next to the
"Section" dropdown listbox.
 Select in the "Items" listbox the entry "Logon Timeout" and click Edit. The "Configure key value"
dialog is displayed:
 Enter the number of seconds to wait before displaying the login dialog again in the "Value" field
and click OK. The "Comment modification" dialog is displayed.
 Enter a justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close.
 Click OK in the "Device configuration" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed. A
message window appears which informs that the modification will only become operative after
the instrument software has been left and re-started.
 Click OK and quit the operating software.
 Restart the operating software as required.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 91

Creating new sections

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Improper changes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Creating new sections

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Device configuration" dialog by selecting Options > Configuration.
 Select the tab for which you want to create a new section.
 Enter the name of the new section in the "Section" dropdown listbox and click New Section to
the right of it. The "Comment modification" dialog is displayed:
 Enter a justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close.
 Click Insert in the dialog "Device configuration" to insert an entry into the section just created.
The "Configure key value" dialog is displayed:
 Enter your values in the "Key" and "Value" fields and click OK. The "Comment modification"
dialog is displayed.
 Enter a justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close.
 Click OK in the "Device configuration" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed. A
message window appears which informs that the modification will only become operative after
the instrument software has been left and re-started.
 Click OK and quit the operating software.
 Restart the operating software as required.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 92

Defining LIMS export settings

Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section enables you to define export settings for LIMS as system administrator.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 93

LIMS export settings

What is set?
The following are set for LIMS:
 What data to send.
 Whether the data is transferred via interface or network.
 The interface settings.
 What instrument the data belong to.

See the LIMS (Dialog) under capter Menu and dialog descriptions.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 94

Setting up user administration

Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section enables you to set up the user administration as system administrator.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 95

User administration
User groups
Access to menu functions is restricted on the basis of three user groups in the operating software.
These groups are automatically set up when you install the software under Windows:
 The user group " simpleuser" with the lowest authorizations and very simplified user interface.
 The user group " user" with the lowest authorizations.
 The user group " superuser" with more authorizations.
 The user group " administrator" with most authorizations.

Allocating users to user groups

The following standard users are automatically allocated to the user groups:
User group Standard user
simpleuser eassimpleuser
user easuser
superuser eassuperuser
administrator easadmin

The system administrator must allocate additional individual users via the Windows control panel.
Refer to the Windows help for further information.

Users belonging to multiple user groups

When you log in, the software searches the user groups for the user, starting with the administrator
group. If a user belongs to multiple user groups, he is therefore always offered the higher user group
when he logs in.

Passwords
User passwords must correspond to the usual conventions in Windows. Windows has requirements
regarding:
 The minimum number of characters
 The use of letters, numbers and special characters.

Refer to the Windows help for further information on passwords.

Recommendations for user administration

Recommendations
The following is recommended for user administration:
 In the operating software you should define individual users in addition to the standard users.
Standard users are easuser, eassuperuser and easadmin.
 If you are working with a server, you should not work on one domain only. You should set up an
emergency group on a local computer so that you can also work if the server crashes.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 96

Granting authorizations
Background
The instrument software offers the possibility to assign the access of menu commands to different
user groups, so that individual menus can be invoked only by persons who are authorized
accordingly.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Improper changes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Granting authorizations
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Device configuration" dialog by selecting Options > Configuration.
 Select the "DEVICE.INI" tab. Select the "Menu" section by clicking the arrow next to the "Section"
dropdown listbox. In the field "Items" all menu commands are listed. The numbers of the menu
commands have the following meaning:
 1: User, superuser and administrator are authorized to execute the command.
 2: Only superuser and administrator are authorized to execute the command.
 3: Only the administrator is authorized to execute the command.
 In the field "Items" select the command whose authorization you want to change and click Edit.
The "Configure key value" dialog is displayed:
 In the field "Value" change the menu command's prefixed number to the desired value (1...3) and
click OK. The "Comment modification" dialog is displayed.
 Enter a justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close.
 Click OK in the "Device configuration" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed. A
message window appears which informs that the modification will only become operative after
the instrument software has been left and re-started.
 Click OK and quit the operating software.
 Restart the operating software as required.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 97

Defining interfaces
Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section enables you to define various interfaces as system administrator.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 98

Defining the analyzer / PC interface

Note
The operating software can only be operated in combination with the analyzer if the serial number of
the instrument matches the software licence number. This ensures that the analyzer is always
operated together with the same software and the settings recorded in the logbook.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Improper changes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Defining the analyzer / PC interface

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Device configuration" dialog by selecting Options > Configuration.
 Select the "DEVICE.INI" tab. Then select the "Analyzer Port" section by clicking the arrow next to
the "Section" dropdown listbox.
 Select in the "Items" listbox the entry "Name" and click Edit. The "Configure key value" dialog is
displayed:
 Enter the name of the serial port (e.g. "COM2") in the "Value" field and click OK. The "Comment
modification" dialog is displayed.
 Enter a justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close.
 Click OK in the "Device configuration" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed. A
message window appears which informs that the modification will only become operative after
the instrument software has been left and re-started.
 Click OK and quit the operating software.
 Restart the operating software as required.

Dialog details
Details on the "Device configuration" dialog can be found in Device configuration (on page 421).

Defining the LIMS / PC interface

Defining the LIMS / PC interface
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "LIMS settings" dialog by selecting Options > Settings > LIMS.
 Select the "Communication" tab. Define your settings.
 Click OK in the "LIMS settings" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed.

Dialog details
Details on the "LIMS settings" dialog can be found in LIMS settings (on page 412).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 99

Editing analysis data

Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section describes when it makes sense to edit analysis data and to what extent this is possible.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 100

When does it make sense to edit analysis data?

Reasons for modifying analysis data
The following reasons exist to edit analysis data:
 If old calibration coefficients only exist as a hardcopy and you want to load them, you can
manually input the calibration coefficients.
 If you have created a template of the sample data for the measurements and you need to enter
the samples still to be measured in the template.
 If you input blank values manually because, for example, the blank value of the sample packing
is already known.

Limits for modifying analysis data

Inserting and deleting lines
You cannot insert lines or delete lines between finished samples.

Editing sample data

You cannot edit the data of finished samples by simply clicking on the respective fields. You can
recognize finished samples by the fact that they are above the current sample, which is highlighted by
a green bar in the sample view. You can only edit finished samples by selecting Edit > Change; if 21
CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, this creates a new version.

Consequences of modifying analysis data

Commenting changes
If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, the user must comment on certain changes.

Versioning
If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, a new version of the document is created as soon as an
analyzed sample is changed. The original version of the document is then write-protected.

Recomputing
After performing certain changes, you must update the calculations of the samples by selecting Math.
> Recalculate. The changes include:
 Manual blank value input.
 Subsequent review of calibration, specifying that standard samples should be displayed as
monitor samples and no longer as calibration samples.
 Changing the sample name.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 101

Performing checks
Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section enables you to perform various checks as system administrator.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 102

Checking documents for authenticity

What signature is checked?
Only those signatures can be checked that are enabled in the "Verify digital signature" dialog and if
their radio button is checked; for example the "created" signature. If the document already has
multiple signatures, the user must select one to check.

Note
Note the following:
 The signature program must be installed.
 Signatures can only be checked or created if 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled.

Checking a signature
Proceed as follows:
 Open the document to check.
 Open the "Verify digital signature" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Verify.
 Check the radio button next to the signature you want to check.
 Click Verify. The program begins to check. The result is displayed in a message window and
indicates whether the signature is authentic or not. "Good signature from..." indicates that the
signature is authentic.

Signing documents
What signature is allocated?
The signature that is enabled in the "Sign" dialog and whose radio button is checked is allocated; for
example, the "created" signature is allocated. The following rules apply:
 The "created" signature is assigned to a document first.
 The "checked" signature is assigned to a document if it already has a "created" signature.
 The "released" signature is only assigned to a document if it already has a "created" and a
"checked" signature.

Note
Note the following:
 The signature program must be installed.
 Documents can only be signed if 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled.
 Only sign finished documents. After signing, the document is read-only.

Signing documents
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Sign" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Sign.
 Enter your name set up in the signature program in the "Name" field.
 Enter your password set up in the signature program in the "Password" field.
 Click Sign. The program checks whether you are authorized to sign the document. The result is
displayed in a message window:: "GOOD_PASSPHRASE" indicates that you are authorized to
create the signature. The signature has been created.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 103

Viewing the logbook

Viewing the logbook
Proceed as follows:
 Open the logbook by selecting Options > Logbook.
 Select the period for which to view the logbook. Open the "Select period" dialog by selecting File
> Load.
 In the "Select period" dialog, use the arrows of the corresponding fields to set the year and month
and then click OK.
 The desired period - if available - is displayed in the logbook.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 104

Working with the database

Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section enables you to perform various database tasks as system administrator.

Administrative work on the database

Reorganizing the database
The software always works with one and the same database. Because the size of the database is
limited to 2 gigabytes, it is necessary to reorganize the database regularly. Database reorganization
removes all sample data and the contents of the logbook from the database file, but retains the other
data such as settings, coefficients, etc.

Datebase backup
"Backup" copies the complete existing database file to a certain directory under a different name,
thereby "capturing" a certain state.

Export and import

It is not possible to load and save data from/to a database in the usual way. However, by using the
File > Export/Import > Export and File > Export/Import > Import menu functions it is possible to
transport documents "out of" the database and to transport external documents "into" the database.

Restoring the database

"Restore" reloads an old database file and irrevocably deletes the current data.

Defining the autoexport directory

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Improper changes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Selecting a directory
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Device configuration" dialog by selecting Options > Configuration.
 Select the "DEVICE.INI" tab. Select the "AutoExport" section by clicking the arrow next to the
"Section" dropdown listbox.
 Select in the "Items" listbox the entry "directory" and click Edit. The "Configure key value" dialog
is displayed:
 Enter the desired dirctory in the "Value" field and click OK. The "Comment modification" dialog is
displayed.
 Enter a justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 105

 Click OK in the "Device configuration" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed. A
message window appears which informs that the modification will only become operative after
the instrument software has been left and re-started.
 Click OK and quit the operating software.
 Restart the operating software as required.

Further information
Further information can be found in:
 Database backup (on page 60).

Starting the database backup

Start backup
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Backup configuration" dialog by selecting File > Backup/Restore > Database >
Backup.
 Click Select to specify the directory to save to. This displays the "Find folder" dialog.
 Select the desired directory and click OK.
 Click Backup now in the "Configure backup" dialog. The backup is performed.
 Click OK in the "Configure backup" dialog to close the dialog.
 The backup was successful.

Further information
Further information can be found in:
 Database backup (on page 60).
 Configure backup (on page 347).

Reorganize database
What does reorganize mean?
Reorganization removes all sample data and the contents of the logbook from the database file, but
retains the other data such as settings, coefficients, etc.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Working with the database" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Reorganize database
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Clean database" dialog by selecting File > Backup/Restore > Database > Clean up.
 Click Backup now. You cannot reorganize the database without backing up. This displays the
"Select backup file name" dialog:
 Enter a file name in the "File name" field and click Save. The database is saved.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 106

 Click Reorganize in the "Reorganize database" dialog. A message window appears which
informs that now all sample data will be deleted.
 Click Yes to continue the clean up procedure. The database is reorganized and the "Comment
changes" dialog is displayed.
 Enter a justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close. You have now
reorganized the databsse.

Reloading an old database file

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Working with the database" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Reloading an old database file

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Restore Database" dialog by selecting File > Backup/Restore > Restore.
 Perform a backup. To do so, click Backup now. This displays the "Select backup file name"
dialog.
 Enter a file name in the "File name" field and click Save. The database is saved.
 Click Restore in the "Restore Database" dialog. This displays the "Select backup file name to
restore" dialog.
 Select the desired database file and click Open. A message window appears which informs that
now all sample data will be deleted.
 Click Yes to continue. The database is restored and the "Comment changes" dialog is displayed.
 Enter a justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close. A message window
appears which informs that now the instrument software will be left automatically.
 Click OK. This closes the operating software.
 Restart the operating software as required.

Further information
Further information can be found in:
 Restore database (on page 349).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 107

Ways of optimizing the use of the analyzer

Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section gives an overview of the ways in which you can optimize the use of the analyzer for your
own particular application.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 108

Optimizing basic instrument settings

Analyzer configuration
You can optimize the following by means of configuration:
 Interface properties
 Signature program properties
 Device parameter

See Configure analyzer (on page 89).

Reacting to irregularities
If irregularities occur during the analysis, it is important for the user to quickly identify any errors. In
the "Error handling" dialog the user defines how the analyzer is to react to incidents.
Incident Consequences
During analysis, the computed element If standard tolerance monitoring is enabled, the analysis is
contents exceed the defined tolerances. aborted. "Tol" is displayed in the information column of the
particular sample.
A critical error occurs. The analyzer is stopped after the analysis.
A non-critical error occurs. If you have set the analyzer to stop after a set number of
non-critical errors and this number has been reached, the
analyzer is stopped after the analysis.

See Error handling (on page 418).

Defining custom methods

Depending on what sample substances you want to analyze, it may be necessary to define custom
methods in addition to the default methods.

Methods allow to set certain parameters for sample specific requirements.

See Defining custom methods (on page 140).

Sleep/wake-up behavior
For sleep/wake-up behavior, you can specify that conditioning samples in a series are measured
before the first user starts work on the instrument in the morning. See Optimizing sleep and
wake-up behavior (on page 142).

Optimizing sample data editing

Facilitating input of samples
In the "Input options" dialog you can define settings that facilitate sample data input in the following
cases:
 An identical sample name is used several times.
 You need to increment or decrement a figure in the sample names.
 One method is used for numerous samples.
 You need to input a daily factor for numerous samples.
 You need to input a blank value for numerous samples.

See Input options (on page 408).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 109

Prioritizing urgent samples

Via Edit > Swap you can prioritize urgent samples and analyze them earlier than scheduled.
However, in the solids modes the samples are only swapped in sample memory, and you have to
swap the samples on the carousel by hand. If multiple determination is activated you always should
swap all samples from one vial to all samples from the other vial instead of swapping only single
samples.

See Swap samples (on page 355).

Optimizing data evaluation

Optimizing the view
The user can customize the view to his own needs:
Type of view Cross-reference
View of the sample view Cf:
Configuring the sample pane (on page 160),
Specifying the number of decimal places (on page 160),
Saving the sample view (on page 161)
Combi view in graph view Cf:
Configuring the graph view,
Setting the size of the graph (on page 169)
Combi view in calibration view See Setting the size of the graph (on page 169).
Combi view in statistics view See Configure statistics view (on page 161).

Optimizing report settings

The user can customize report settings to his own needs:
possibilities of customization Cross-reference
Designing an analysis log See Configure report (on page 169).
Printer setup See Printer setup (on page 111).
Defining printer settings See Print (on page 343).
Assessing the print view See Print preview (on page 344).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 110

Performing other administrator tasks

Target group
Personnel with good knowledge of the operating system and administrative settings.

Purpose
This section enables you to perform various tasks as system administrator.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Work performed by the system administrator 111

Modifying the registration

Dialog: "Product registration"
When you start the operating software for the first time, the "Product Registration" dialog is displayed.
Once you have registered, the dialog is no longer displayed when you launch the program.

Changing the registration

You must have administrator rights to modify the registration.

Modifying
Proceed as follows:
 Launch the operating software.
 Open the "Product registration" dialog by selecting Help > Registration.
 If you want, enter your address data in the "User" section.
 Enter the serial number in the field "Serial num." of the "Analyzer" section if you have not already
done so. The serial number is found on the type plate on the back of the analyzer. This number
should match the serial number of the installation CD cover when installing for the first time.
 Enter the software ID in the field "Software ID" of the "Software" section. If installing for the first
time, this number is found on the installation CD cover. If installing and upgrading, you must send
the registration details in this dialog to Elementar. You will then receive an identification code to
be entered here.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Printer setup
Printer setup
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Printer setup" dialog by selecting File > Printer Setup.
 Select the desired printer type from the "Name" dropdown listbox.
 Click Properties. A "Properties" dialog is displayed that varies depending on the type of printer
connected.
 Define your settings in the "Properties" dialog and then click OK. Your settings are saved and the
dialog is closed.
 Click OK in the "Printer setup" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed.
 You have successfully setup the printer.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 6

Starting up and shutting down the

instrument

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to start up or shut down the instrument according to instructions.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 114

Setting up and starting up the instrument

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to set up and commission the instrument according to instructions.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 115

Rules for first-time start-up

First-time start-up
Observe the following rules for first-time start-up.
 First-time start-up is performed by a trained service technician. Only the service technician may
open the transport packaging. If the customer opens the transport packaging, this results in loss
of warranty.
 Make sure that the user is completely available for instruction and hand-over of the equipment at
the time of first-time start-up. If additional instruction by our service technician is required, this
must be billed separately.
 If you do not order the PC and peripherals from Elementar, Elementar reserves the right to
perform start-up with their own equipment. Any modifications of the analyzer must be performed
by the customer.
 The instrument is installed by a trained service technician, demonstrating performance with
analyses of max. 10 standard measurments.
 For special analysis problems, Elementar's application laboratory will draw up specific work
instructions at the customers request and against payment.

Requirements for installing the instrument software

In order to install the software correctly, administrator rights for the PC must be available.

Conditions for operating the instrument software

Do the following to be able to operate the software without any problems:
 On the PC where the software is installed, check power management settings under Control
Panel > Power Management or under Control Panel > Power Options. The following options
must be set to "Never":
 "Turn off monitor"
 "Turn off hard disks"
 "System stand by"
 "System hibernates"
 Power management must also be disabled in the PC's BIOS.
 The PC on which the software is installed must not be overloaded with other software. This could
cause unstable operation of the software.

Instructions for operating the furnace

Note
Observe the instructions for using the furnace so that the warranty is upheld. Further details can be
found under Warranty on the furnace (on page 432).

Installation site requirements

General requirements
Observe the general installation site requirements:
 The analyzer must not be installed in areas with explosive atmosphere (in accordance with the
ATEX guideline).
 Good ventilation.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 116

 Room temperature should be constant.

 Analyzer and peripherals must be protected from drafts and direct heat.
 An air-conditioned room is advantageous as the analyzer emits heat.
 Take suitable action to avoid electrostatic discharge. Electrical discharges can lead to
malfunctions of the instrument.

Specific requirements
The following lists specific requirements to be met by the installation site
Type Specific requirements

Room  Mode of protection IP 20.

 Dry room.
 Well ventilated.
Instrument setup  Only on heat-resistant surface.
 A stable lab table is suitable as well.
Space required including PC and printer 1.30 m x 0.55 m (W x D)
Space required by instrument alone 0.48 m x 0.55 m x 0.57 m (W x D x H)
Clearance from instrument to wall At least 20 cm clearance all round so that the fans will
work.
Ambient temperature  Minimum: + 15°C.
 Maximum: + 35°C.
Mains voltage  100–230 Volt AC ± 10 %; 50–60 Hz.
 Connection 800 VA.
 Mains voltage and frequency must match the
specifications on the instrument's type plate.
Power connections  2 power sockets and socket strip with 4 sockets to
connect peripherals or 5 sockets.
 Protection class I, protective conductor connection.
 Fusing 16 A delay action.
Gas supply  Gas supply must be available nearby the instrument.
 Connection to device by means of a pressure reducer.
 Necessary gas connection downstream of pressure
reducers: 2 x clamp ring screw connection for 6 mm
tube diameter.
 The complete gas intake line must use gas-loss-free
components (copper, stainless steel, etc.).
Waste gas line  The waste gas line must discharge into the open or
into a vent at atmospheric pressure because
particularly when burning fluorine-containing or
sulfur-containing samples, toxic gases may escape
from the instrument.
 The end of the waste gas line must discharge into the
open at a location protected from the wind.

Gases and chemicals to be provided

Gases and chemicals to be provided
The following lists the gases and chemicals required.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 117

Category Type Part of initial equipment

Carrier gas Synthetische Luft oder Sauerstoff: No
 Purity: 99.995 %
 Intake pressure approx. 1.0 bar
 Consumption approx. 350-450 ml/min
Reagents Various chemicals for filling the reaction Yes
tubes
You need a consumables set for
further analyses.
Calibration  Potassium hydrogen phthalate Yes
standards  Sodium carbonate
 Sodium nitrate
 Ammoniun chloride

Start-up
Who performs first-time start-up?
First-time start-up is performed by a trained service technician, not the customer.

Note
In order to ensure proper working order of the instrument:
 the work processes described in this section must be performed precisely.
 the basic instrument and the peripherals must be switched on in the sequence described here.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparing instrument for switching on
 Preparing the Instrument for measurements
 Performing instrument checks

Phase 1: Preparing instrument for switching on

Proceed as follows:
 Set up the instrument. Observe the instructions concerning the installation site. See Installation
site requirements (on page 115).
 Connect the peripherals. See Connecting peripherals (on page 118).
 Connect supply lines and waste gas lines. See Connecting supply lines and waste gas lines
(on page 119).
 Check the fillings of the required glass and quartz components. Replace filling if necessary. See
Emptying and filling reaction tubes (on page 245).
 Install the required glass and quartz components. Leave the tube outlets open for subsequent
conditioning. Used tubes also need to be conditioned. See Installing reaction tubes in the
furnace and conditioning (on page 252).

The instrument is now ready for switching on.

Phase 2: Instrument must be ready to measure

Proceed as follows:
 Perform all steps of the switching on process. See Switching on (on page 120).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 118

 Switch on the operating gases. See Default instrument settings (on page 121) for
recommended gas pressure.
 Launch the operating software. The standard operating parameters are factory-set and do not
have to be optimized by the user. See Starting the operating software (on page 138).
 Heat up the furnaces and check parameter settings. See Heating up the furnace / checking
parameters (on page 121).
 Define the main settings for the measurement. See Measurement settings (on page 128).

The instrument is then ready to measure.

Phase 3: Performing instrument checks

Proceed as follows:
 Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test.
 If the leak test reveals any leaks, eliminate them.
 Check proper working order of the instrument by means of
 Blank value determination
 Conditioning measurement,
 Standard measurement
Observe gas flows and pressures. See Performing routine measuring work (on page 147).

After routine measuring work you can measure real samples. See Performing measurement work
(on page 143).

Connecting peripherals
Note
The following section is part of initial start-up. All steps described in initial startup before connecting
peripherals must have already been performed. See Start-up (on page 117).

Peripheriegeräte
 A PC must be connected. It is essential for operation.
 A printer can be connected so that you can print out measuring results.
 A balance should be connected, so you do not need to enter the sample weight by hand (only
relevant in solids mode).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 119

Connecting peripherals
The following picture shows a detail of the rear of the analyzer with the associated connections:

Legend:
1 "PC" PC connector (USB)
2 "Reserve" reserve
3 "~" mains connector

Proceed as follows:
 Connect the PC to the appropriate connector (1) on the back of the analyzer using the correct
cable.
 Connect the power supply cable to the mains connector (3).
 If you wish, connect a printer to the PC.
 If you wish, connect a balance to the PC (only relevant in solids mode).

Configuring the balance (only relevant in solids mode)

The serial interface parameters of a connected balance must match the parameters of the PC's serial
interface. If you have not entered anything different, the operating software configuration file sets the
PC's serial interface as follows:
 Baud: 2400
 Data bits: 7
 Stop bits: 1
 Parity: odd

Select Options > Configuration to edit the parameters of the PC's serial interface if your balance
requires different settings.

Connecting supply lines and waste gas lines

Note
The following section is part of initial start-up. All steps described in initial startup before connecting
supply lines and waste gas lines must have already been performed. See Start-up (on page 117).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 120

Detail of the rear

The following picture shows a detail of the rear of the analyzer with the associated gas connections:

Legend:
1 "Synth.air" carrier gas inlet
2 "IR" measuring gas outlet
3 Gas drying outlet
4 "waste" output waste

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Mixing up gas inlets" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Connecting supply lines

Proceed as follows:
 Connect the carrier gas supply line to the carrier gas inlet (1).

Connecting waste gas lines

Proceed as follows:
 Connect the waste gas line to the measuring gas outlet (2).
 Install the waste gas line (2, 3) so that it discharges into the open or into a vent.
 Lead the H2O waste line (4) into an empty container.
 If the waste gas line discharges into the open, make sure that the waste gas line discharges into
the open at a location protected from the wind. Otherwise detector instabilities may occur.

Switching on
Note
The following section is part of initial start-up. All steps described in initial startup before switching on
must have already been performed. See Start-up (on page 117).

Switching on
Proceed as follows:
 If not done so far, plug the power supply plugs of the analyzer and the peripherals into the
sockets.
 Turn on PC, monitor and printer. Wait until the boot process is completed.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 121

 Install the operating software if you have not already done so. See Installing and updating the
software (on page 88).
 Switch the main instrument switch on. The instrument performs an initialization routine as well as
a reference run of the multiway valve/ball valve and the sample caousel. Wait until this process is
complete.
 You have now switched on the instrument.

Default instrument settings

Default instrument settings
The default gas pressure and mass flow settings are listed below. The settings require the analyzer to
be leak-free.

Pressures and flows

The carrier gas intake pressure is set at the delivery point so that the following values are displayed
on screen:
 The "Pressure" display shows 1000 mbar.
 The "MFC" display shows approx. 200 ml/min. (only vario TOC cube)
 The "Flow" display shows approx. 200 ml/min.

Heating up the furnace / checking parameters

Note
Note the following:
 The following section is part of initial start-up. All steps described in initial start-up before
"Heating up the Furnace / checking parameters" must have already been performed. See
Start-up (on page 117).

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Heating up the furnace/checking parameters" under Warning
notes during operation (on page 24).

Heating up the furnace / checking parameters

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Device parameters" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings
> Parameters.
 Check the furnace working temperature in the "Temperatures" selection and change it if
necessary. See Setting instrument parameters (on page 43).
 Check the other parameters in the "Flow" selection and change them if necessary. See Setting
instrument parameters (on page 43).
 Check the other parameters in the "Times" selection and change them if necessary. See Setting
instrument parameters (on page 43).
 Check the other parameters in the "Syringe" selection and change them if necessary. See
Setting instrument parameters (on page 43).
 Click OK to confirm your settings. The settings are applied.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 122

Note: The entered furnace temperature is crucial for the start of the measurement. The furnace
temperature has to be reached in order to perform a measurement!

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 123

Shutting down the instrument

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to shut down the instrument according to instructions.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 124

Shutting the instrument down for short measuring breaks (standby)

What are short measuring breaks?
Short measuring breaks are breaks that last overnight or for 2-5 days.

Procedure
The analyzer and the PC stay online during short measuring breaks. Only the sleep function is
activated for the instrument.

Setting the analyzer sleep function.

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Sleep/wake-up functions" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options >
Settings > Sleep/Wake-up.
 Define when to enable the sleep function. Select one of the following options:
 Sleep now... (button): The instrument is shut down immediately.
 "Sleep after end of sample": The instrument is shut down after finishing the last sample.
 "Sleep at sample No.:": The instrument is shut down prior to the appropriate sample.
 Check "Shut off carrier gas".
 Check "Reduce furnace 1 temp" and enter the desired temperature in the box next to "Reduce
furnace 1 temp".
 Check "Reduce furnace 2 temp" and enter the desired temperature in the box next to "Reduce
furnace 2 temp".
 Specify when to "wake up" the instrument again. The working temperatures are increased again
and the instrument is flushed with gas. Choose one of the following options:
 Enter "Date" and "Time" when to "wake up" the instrument and select the box next to
"One-time wake-up at above time/date".
 Enter a "Time", select the box next to "Daily wake-up at above time, except:" and select the
weekdays on which you do not want to wake up the instrument.
 If you shut down the instrument in the middle of a series, you can continue this series after
"wake-up". To do so, check "Continue after wake-up if there are samples".
 Click OK to close the window and save your settings. The instrument is shut down and woken up
again according to your settings.

Shutting the instrument down for long measuring breaks (switching off)
What are long measuring breaks?
Long measuring breaks are breaks that last longer than 5 days.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Starting up and shutting down the instrument 125

Preparing the instrument for long measuring breaks.

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Lack of ventilation of the analyzer!
A lack of ventilation leads to overheating of the analyzer. Before you switch off the
instrument:
 Ste the Solltemperaturen der Öfen to 0 °C. To do so execute the command
Options > Settings > Parameter > Temperatures
 Allow die Öfen to cool down until the temperature displayed is less than 55
°C

Proceed as follows:
 Set the nominal temperatures of the heater to 0 °C via the software. Open the dialog "Instrument
parameters" via Options > Settings > Parameters.
 Wait 2–3 hours until the instrument has cooled down to <55 °C.
 Shut off the gas supply.
 Quit the operating software. Execute the following command: File > Exit.
 Switch off the analyzer and its peripherals.
 Disconnect the analyzer from the mains. Disconnect the power supply plug. The instrument is
ready for long measuring breaks.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 7

Using the instrument

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section enables you to perform measurements with the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 128

Measurement settings
Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section enables you to define the necessary settings for measurements.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 129

Defining keywords for blank and conditioning samples

Keywords
Names of blank samples and conditioning samples must be defined as keywords so that the software
recognizes and handles the samples as blank or conditioning samples.

Factory-set key words

The following keywords are factory-set:
 For blank samples: Blnk
 For conditioning samples: Run In
 For measuring samples: Test (measuring sample with blank compensation)

Defining custom keywords

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Keywords" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Keywords.
 Enter the desired keywords in the appropriate boxes.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Viewing list of defined factor, monitor and standard samples

Viewing the list
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Standard samples" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Standards.
 The list box displays all currently defined standards. By checking the requested standard sample
the settings are displayed in the right area of the dialog.

Defining standard substances as measuring samples

Background
In order to compute standard samples correctly and to display them with their computed element
contents in the sample view, it is necessary to define the standard substances as measuring samples.
This means that a standard sample is calculated on the actual calibration coefficients and that it
represents the actual value.

No daily factor will be calculated or transferred to other measuring values.

Defining standard substances as factor and monitor samples

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Standard samples display" dialog in the operating software by selecting View >
Standard samples.
 Select the option "Show as measuring sample (measured concentration)".
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 130

Defining standard substances as calibration samples

Background
These operating instructions contain specific rules for the calibration. If you want to use these rules,
you must define the standard substances used there as calibration samples. Of course, you can also
use different substances but then you must develop the calibration rule yourself.

Defined calibration samples are displayed along with their theoretical contents in the sample view.

Required substances
If you want to perform calibration on the basis of the calibration tables, you must define certain
standard substances depending on the operating mode for which you want to perform calibration.

The following table lists the standard substances required for calibration in the respective operating
mode:
Operating Potassium Sodium Sodium nitrate Ammonium
mode hydrogen carbonate chloride
phthalate
TOC X
TC X X
TIC X
NPOC X
TNb X X
POC X)*

)* Coefficients are transferred (from TOC to POC).

Theoretical element contents of standard substances

The following tables lists the theoretical element contents of the standard substances used in the
calibration tables:
Standard substance Ctheor Ntheor
Potassium hydrogen phthalate 47,1 %
Sodium carbonate 11,33 %
Sodium nitrate 16,47 %
Ammoniun chloride 26,17 %

Defining calibration samples

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Standard samples" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Standards.
 Click New. The input boxes on the right of the dialog are empty and ready for the input of a new
standard.
 For the substance, enter...
 ... the name of the substance in the "name" field.
 ... the theoretical element content in the "Conc. [mg/l]" fields. If you enter 0 for the
theoretical element content of a substance element, the element is ignored in the
calculation.
 ... the permissible tolerance for each element in the "Tolerance [%]" fields (usually 5%).
 Click Close. This closes the dialog and saves your settings.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 131

 Open the "Standard samples display" dialog in the operating software by selecting View >
Standard samples.
 Select the option "Show as calibration sample (theoretical concentration)".
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Specifying the computation method for blank value and daily factor
Defining the blank value calculation method
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Configure Calculations" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options >
Settings > Calculation.
 In section "Blank value determination" define the calculation method:
If you...
 ... select "sequentially" a separate blank value is computed for every element in every group
of blank value samples; this value is entered in the respective blank value column until the
next group of blank value samples.
 ... select "entirely" all blank value samples in the series are used to compute the blank
value. This blank value is then applied to all samples in the series.
 ... select "manual input" blank value calculation is not performed - even if there are blank
samples in the series. This allows manual input of blank values for individual samples.
 ... "autom. activate "automatic blank value calculation" the blank value is automatically
computed at the end of every analysis. This option ist not available if manual input has
been checked.
 Then click OK to save your settings.

Defining the daily factor calculation method (Solid mode)

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Configure Calculations" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options >
Settings > Calculation.
 In section "Factor determination" define the calculation method:
If you...
 ... select "sequentially" then the daily factor is computed group-by-group and changes
throughout the day.
 ... select "entirely" the daily factor is computed on the basis of all factor samples in the file.
An average factor is computed.
 ... select "manual input" factor calculation is not performed - even if there are factor samples
in the series. This allows manual input of daily factors for individual samples.
 ... "autom. activate "automatic factor calculation" the factor is automatically computed at the
end of every analysis. This option ist not available if manual input has been checked.
 ... activate "upper/lower calib. range distinction" both for the upper and lower calibration
range separate factors will be calculated. This requires separate factor samples for each
range.
 Then click OK to save your settings.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 132

Enabling/disabling acoustic signals

Enabling/disabling acoustic signals
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Acoustic signals" dialog by selecting Options > Settings > Acoustic Signals.
 Decide:
If you want to...
 ... switch on a signal, check the appropriate checkbox.
 ... switch off a signal, uncheck the appropriate checkbox.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Configuring error handling

Reacting to irregularities
If irregularities occur during the analysis, it is important for the user to quickly identify any errors. In
the "Error handling" dialog the user defines how the analyzer is to react to incidents.
Incident Consequences
During analysis, the computed element contents If standard tolerance monitoring is enabled, the
exceed the defined tolerances. analysis is aborted. Tol is displayed in the
information column of the particular sample.
A critical error occurs. The analyzer is stopped after the analysis.
A non-critical error occurs. If you have set the analyzer to stop after a set
number of non-critical errors and this number has
been reached, the analyzer is stopped after the
analysis.

Configuring error handling

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Error handling" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Error handling.
 If you want to enable standard tolerance monitoring, check the "activated" checkbox in the
"Standard tolerance monitoring" section. The tolerance thresholds are defined via Options >
Settings > Standards.
 If you want to abort the analysis after several non-critical errors, enter the number of errors in the
"No. of errors" textbox of the "Abort auto analysis" section. Enter 0 to ignore non-critical errors.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 133

Preparing samples
Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section enables you to prepare samples properly.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 134

Sample preparation instructions

Samples with potential risks
Various sample substances can pose a risk to the user during the analysis:
 Contact with the substances may lead to chemical burns or poisoning.
 Combustion analysis of larger quantities of the substance may lead to explosions.

These sample substances include:

 Aggressive chemicals such as acids or alkaline solutions
 Organic solvents
 Explosives
 Substances that develop toxic or explosive gas mixtures.

Users are obliged to protect themselves prior to contact with hazardous substances and to reduce the
quantity of the substance to a safe amount. Users are also obliged to observe the safety instructions
of the chemical manufacturer on the label of the bottle or in the safety data sheets. The safety data
sheets contain risk information about a chemical in the R-Phrases and safety information in the
S-Phrases.

Sampling and homogenization

Refer to the relevant literature concerning the problem of sampling and homogenization.

Sample crushing and drying

When crushing and drying samples you may lose highly volatile constituents. Also, the sample may
get contaminated with foreign substances.

What influences analysis results?

The following influences analysis results:
 During liquid analysis, voluminous particulates may influence the analysis results.
 In solids analysis, contaminations due to touching the sample container and absorbtion of air
humidity influence analysis results.

Filling the sample vials in the automatic liquid mode

Only fill the sample vials when the carousel has been taken off. Unscrew the carousel and fill the
sample vials up on a working plate. Wait for the reference run after you have put the carousel back
onto the analyzer.

Measuring NPOC
For NPOC measurement the sample has to be brought to a pH value of 2 with a suitable acid (e.g.
HCl). If an autosampler is present the acidification can be performed automatically.

Injection volume determination (Liquid mode)

What is optimal injection volume?
The optimal injection volume depends on...
 ... the content of the elements to be measured, C and N.
 ... the valid calibration.
 ... on the dynmaic working range of each element.
 ... the exisiting sample volume.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 135

 ... that the combustion of the sample is limited in time and controllable in terms of pressure.

Determining injection volume with known substances

Requirements for the determination of the injection volume: Information on the dynamic working
range of the elements.

Proceed as follows:
 The possible injection range of the substance is computed...
 ... from the highest injection required to achieve the lower limit of the work range.
 ... from the lowest injection required to achieve the upper limit of the work range.

Determining injection volume with unknown substances

Proceed as follows:
 Perform a test measurement with 0.15 ml of the substance.
 Use the rough values to determine the optimum injection volume.

Sample packing (Solids mode)

Sample packing
The following types of sample packing may be used depending on the type of sample:
 Foils
 Capsules

In solids mode, tin and silver are recommended as the sample packing material. WO 3 e.g. can be
used as an additive.

Solid sample packing rules

Observe the following rules in order to achieve reliable measuring results:
 There must be no body fat or sweat on the packing material. Therefore, do not touch the boats or
other packing material with your hands. Work with tweezers or with gloves. Capsules for low C
determination must be washed with acetone and dried before analyzing.
 Avoid loss of substance after weighing. Therefore, wrap the substance exactly in the foil and
close capsules gas-tight.

Packing solid samples in the high sample weight range

Examples of such samples include soil samples. Proceed as follows:
 Tare the foil to zero.
 If necessary, weigh in a sample additive.
 Tare the sample additive to zero.
 Fill in the sample.
 Close the foil over the sample as air-tight as possible with the aid of tweezers (folding technique).
 Put the sample packet into a solid sample shaper or hand press.
 Apply the press ram.
 Press a sample tablet with the solid sample shaper or hand press. Make sure the sample has a
height of at least 1 mm.

If you have observed all of these steps, the sample is now properly packed and should be weighed
once again for control purposes.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 136

Packing pasty and liquid samples

Examples of such samples include sludges or plant extracts. Proceed as follows:
 Tare a capsule to zero.
 Put the capsule into the sample panel for capsules (see picture below).
 Fill the sample into the capsule using a pipette or syringe.
 Seal the capsule airtight with tweezers. If the sample contains volatile compounds, fill the capsule
up to the edge and close it below the filling level.

If you have observed all of these steps, the sample is now properly packed and should be weighed
once again for control purposes.

Sample panel for capsules

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 137

Preparing measurement work

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section enables you to prepare measurement work.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 138

Software usage rules

Software usage rules
Observe th following rules in order to avoid disruptions during analysis:
 The control PC must not be used simultaneously as an office workstation as this may lead to
software instability.
 Observe the following if using the operating software and other software at the same time:
 Programs that heavily burden the PC may cause disturbances.
 Programs that access the same serial interface as the analyzer operating software cause
the analyzer to crash totally! Therefore, avoid running multiple programs simultaneously if
you are not sure about how they work.
 Only standard Windows screensavers may be used.

Starting the operating software

Starting the operating software
Proceed as follows:
 Launch the operating software:
 by double-clicking the appropriate icon on your screen or
 by launching the program via Start > Programs or
 by executing the program via the appropriate path.
 Enter the following in the "Log in as" dialog:
In the field...
 ... "User" enter your user name.
 ... "Password" enter your password.
 ... "Domain" enter the name of your domain if the PC is connected to a network and the
user management is defined on that network. If the PC is operated without a network or the
user management is defined on the local PC this field has to be kept empty.
 Click OK in the "Log in as" dialog. The user interface is displayed.

Showing or hiding the toolbar

Showing or hiding the toolbar
Select Windows > Toolbar to show or hide the toolbar:
 If the menu command is checked, the toolbar is displayed.
 If the menu command is not checked, the toolbar is hidden.

Selecting the operating mode

Essential condition
Before switching operating modes, you must have performed all refitting work required for the new
operating mode.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 139

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Changing mode" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Selecting the operating mode

Proceed as follows:
 Perform all refitting work required for the new operating mode.
 Execute the command System > Mode in the instrument software. A message window appears
which requests you to confirm the change of the operating mode once more.
 Click Yes if you want to continue. The "Analysis mode" dialog is displayed.
 Select the desired analysis mode. Select also the type of detector and feeding. Then click OK.
 The "Change to new mode" dialog is displayed. If not done so far, follow here the instructions for
the modification.
 Click OK if you have refitted the instrument. The operating mode is changed.

Waking up the instrument

Waking up the instrument
Proceed as follows:
 Wake up the analyzer by selecting System > Wake Up.
 The carrier gas is reactivated and the heater are heated up to their working temperatures.

Viewing method settings

Notes on the preset methods
The following tables gives some notes to the preset methods:
Method Description
TOC/NPOC/TC This is a mere TC measurement (direct method). The sample will be
directly injected into the furnace, the determination of TIC is not
Methods applicable.
TIC / TC methods This is a difference measurement for the determination of "TOC".
First, the "TIC" is determined in the sparger. Subsequently, the "TC"
is determined by injection into the furnace.

You will receive further information by clicking the corresponding method via Options > Settings >
Methods.

Background
A method includes several parameters which are necessary for the measurement.

Viewing the settings

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 140

 Select the requested method from the list in the left area of the dialog. In the right area of the
dialog the settings of the individual parameters of the selected method are displayed.
 Click Close to close the dialog again.

Defining custom methods

View and define methods
In the "Methods" dialog you can view existing methods or define new methods.

View existing methods

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.
 In the left field, select the appropriate method. In the fields at the right side the parameters of the
selected method are now displayed.
 Click Close to close the dialog again.

Defining custom methods

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.
 Click New. The input boxes on the right of the dialog are now empty. Enter the parameters of the
method to be newly defined:
 Enter the following:
 Enter the name of your method in the "ID" field.
 Enter the purpose of the method, for example, in the "Description" field.
 Input the corresponding method parameters in the other boxes.
 Click Create. Your new method will now be included in the list in the left area of the dialog. You
have now defined the method.
 Click Close to close the dialog.

Settings for sample input

Facilitating input of samples
You can define settings to facilitate sample insertion in the following cases:
 An identical sample name is used several times.
 You need to increment or decrement a figure in the sample names.
 One method is used for numerous samples.
 You need to input a daily factor for numerous samples.
 You need to input a blank value for numerous samples.

Define settings
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Input options" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Input.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 141

 Select one of the radio buttons to specify sample name input. For selection of one of the bottom
two radio buttons you must also specify the increment/decrement interval by using the arrows
buttons.
Effect of the option...
 ... "Normal sample name input": The sample name is entered in the appropriate column as
it is input.
 ... "Apply sample name": After entering the sample name and pressing Enter, the input
name is applied to the next line as a suggestion.
 ... "autom. ..."Auto-increment the number in the sample name": If a sample name ends with
a number (e.g. "Name001"), this figure is automatically incremented by a certain amount
and suggested for the next sample (e.g. "Name002").
 ... "autom. "Auto-decrement the number in the sample name": Works the same way as
auto-increment, only the figure in the name is decremented.
 ... "Increment/decrement interval": Defines the amount the number in the sample name is
increased/decreased.
 If one of the options "autom. Auto-increment the number in the sample name or autom.
decrement the number of samploe names" are activated, set the interval value via the arrow
buttons in the text field "Increment/decrement interval".
 Check the checkbox next to the appropriate options.
Effect of the option...
 ... "Fill method names to stop marker": The method name input for the first sample is
entered for all subsequent samples up to the stop marker.
 ... "Fill daily factors to last sample": The daily factor input for the first sample is entered for
all subsequent samples.
 ... "Fill blank values to last sample": The blank value input for the first sample is entered for
all subsequent samples.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Importing weighing data (Solid mode)

Importing weighing data
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Open" dialog by selecting File > Export/Import > Import.
 Select the "Balance Files (*.dat)" file type from the "File type" dropdown listbox.
 From the dropdown listbox select the directory containing the weighing data file.
 Select a file and click Open.
 Decide:
If you import into...
 ... an empty sample memory: The weighing data are saved to sample memory starting at
No. 1. Save the document. The import is finished.
 ... a sample memory that is not empty: The "Reading Balance file" dialog is displayed. Go to
the next step.
 Select the desired radiobutton in the dialog:
If you...
 ... select "Append samples as from the current weighed sample": The weighing data are
stored starting after the current sample weight.
 ... select "Create new document": The weighing data are saved in a new document.
 Click OK. The weighing data are imported and displayed in the sample field.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 142

 Save the document. The import is finished.

Prioritizing urgent samples

Liquid operation
Proceed as follows:
 Insert a corresponding number of lines into the sequence.
 Enter the required information (sample name, method, injection volume, carousel position) into
the new lines.

Solid operation
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Swap samples" dialog in the operating software by selecting Edit > Swap.
 Enter the numbers of the samples to swap in the textboxes in the dialog. Then click OK.
 This closes the dialog and the samples are swapped in the sample memory.
 Manually swap samples in the carousel.

Optimizing sleep and wake-up behavior

What can you optimize?
You can set sleep/wake-up behavior so that conditioning samples in a series are measured before
the first user starts work on the instrument in the morning.

Note
Remember to prepare the appropriate conditioning samples and to sort them into the carousel after
the samples of the last measurement of the day.

Optimizing sleep and wake-up behavior

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Sleep/wake-up functions" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options >
Settings > Sleep/Wake-up.
 The last measurement of the day must be stopped before the appended conditioning samples.
To do so, select the radio button next to "Sleep at sample No." in the "Sleep" section. In the box
next to it, enter the sample number at which you want the instrument to sleep; it corresponds to
the first conditioning sample.
 In the "Wake-up" section, enter the time and days on which to wake up the instrument.
 To do so, check the checkbox next to "Continue after wake-up if there are samples".
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings. The conditioning samples will be
processed the next time the instrument wakes up.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 143

Performing measurement work

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section enables you to perform all measurement work.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 144

Performing a measuring series

General
When perfoming a measuring series, it will be distinguished between:
 A general function test during intial operation and/or after the installation of a new reactor and
 the routine analysis.

Mode settings
Proceed as follows:
 Open the dialog "Analysis mode" in the operating software by selecting System > Mode.
 Select the appropriate analysis mode.

Sample feeding settings

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Feeding" dialog in the operating software by selecting System > Feeding.
 Select the number of determinations (e.g. triple), the function of the stirrer and the feeding unit
(e.g. carousel with a 50 position magazine).

Viewing the settings of the acceptable standard deviation

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Acceptable standard deviation" dialog in the operating software by selecting Math >
Statistics > Acceptable standard deviation.
 The dialog shows the acceptable standard deviation for the corresponding component and if it is
activated.
 Under "Extra measurements max." the number of measurements can be defined which shall be
additionally perfomed if the acceptable standard deviation was not observed.

Viewing method settings

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.
 Select the desired method. The settings of the individual parameters are displayed in the right
area of the dialog.

Possible settings via the method

The possible settings of a method are as follows:
Parameter Meaning
TIC / TC TIC will be purged in the sparger and measured, subsequently TC is
determined via direct injection into the furnace, the difference from
TC and TIC is TOC.
TIC TIC is purged in the sparger and measured.
NPOC precise / NPOC fast The sample is injected directly into the furnace and evaluated, for TC
TOC and NPOC determination; for NPOC it will be acidified
externally.
TNb determination Simultaneous determination of the total bound nitrogen in the
sample.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 145

Particle measurements Special measuring method for particles containing samples to avoid
sedimentation as far as possible (can be activated in the "Method"
dialog). When measuring particles the stirrer function will be
automatically controlled.
Injection volume Specification of the injection volume (optional).

Note: For TOC precise the first measurement runs in the backround (dummy peak) and will not be
evaluated. The advantage is that carry over effects of previous measurements in the instruments can
be almost completely avoided.

Explanation NPOC precise / NPOC fast

The explanation given here in this section also applies analogous for the paramter "TC precise / TC
fast.

The correlations are as follows:

NPOC precise NPOC fast
Injection directly into the furnace directly into the furnace
Flushing 1 - 5 times 3 - 5 times
Flush volume free selectable (adjustable under free selectable (adjustable under
Options > Settings > Parameters) Options > Settings > Parameters)
Measurement with dummy peak without dummy peak
Measuring time 15 min (due to dummy measurement 4 12 min
(3-fold measurements)
measurement)
Precision of very good good
measurements

Note: A dummy peak measurement is an additional measurement which will not be considered in the
calculation. It is relevant to avoid carry-over effects from previous measurments. This means that 4
measurements have to be made for a 3-fold determination with the method "NPOC-precise".

Explanations regarding the maximum injection volume

The correlations between operating mode and maximum injection volume are as follows:
Maximum injection volume

Syringe volume 5 ml
Dummy volume sparger 0.6 ml
TIC/TC (1-fold measurement) (5 ml - 0.6 ml) / 3 measurements = 1.46 ml
TIC/TC (3-fold measurement) (5 ml - 0.6 ml) / 7 measurements = 0.63 ml
NPOC precise (1-fold 5 ml / 2 measurements = 2.5 ml
measurement)
NPOC precise (3-fold 5 ml / 4 measurements = 1.25 ml
measurement)
NPOC fast (1-fold 2 ml
measurement)
NPOC fast (3-fold 5 ml / 3 measurements = 1.7 ml
measurement)

Note: The calculations were done disregarding different adjustment parameters of the syringe. The
calculations are meant to understand the maximum injection volumes. A warning notice regarding the
maximum injection volume also occurs in the software. It is not necessary to work the maximum
injection volume.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 146

Function test
When is a function test required?
A function test is required during an initial operation and/or after installation of a new combustion
tube.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Sample vials" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Performing a function test

Proceed as follows:
 Move the empty carousel to zero position. To do so, open the "Set carousel position" dialog in
the operating software by selecting System > Sample Position.
 Select the radio button next to "Reference run" and click OK. The carousel moves to zero
position.
 Measure deionized water (TOC<0.5mg/l): Fill the sample vials of the autosampler with deionized
water and put them on the autosampler. If there is no autosampler available, the sample tube will
be lead directly into the corresponding glass vessel.
Note: There are position numbers on the autosampler. These position numbers correspond to
the numbers in column "hole position" (instrument software).
 Determine the number of measurements per sample vial under System > Feeding.
 Consecutively open the following input boxes in the sample view (text view):
 Input box "Name": Enter e.g. the name "Runin" for the number of the requested samples.
Example: 5 sample vials 3 measurements each = 15 times.
 Input box "Method": Select the appropriate method. Example: NPOC precise
 Input box "NPOC volume": Enter the corresponding injection volume (if not already defined
in the method).

 Start the measuring series: For continuous operation, click symbol . For a single

analysis, click symbol .

 Now the number of preselected blank value measurements will be processed. The gained peak
areas should be as small as possible and stable. If there is no stable value, the measurements
have to be continued.
 With stable values you can now measure test standard, e.g. 10 mg/l NPOC etc. to verify the
stability of the measuring values.
 Fill e.g. 5 sample vials of the autosampler with test standard 10 mg/l NPOC.
 Enter the name for the number of the requested measurements in the input box "name",
e.g. 5 sample vials 3 measurements each.
 Enter the adequate method in the input box "method". The method will be automatically
copied for all entered sample names.
 Enter the appropriate injection volume, e.g. 0.25 ml (if not yet determined in the method).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 147

 Start the measuring series: For continuous operation, click symbol . For a single

analysis, click symbol .

 Now the number of preselected samples will be processed. For the statistical evaluation a
statistics function is available under Math. > Statistics.

If the statistical evaluation results in a satisfying precision, the routine analysis can be started.

Measurements without previous function test and measuring routine work

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Sample vials" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Proceed as follows:
 Move the empty carousel to zero position. To do so, open the "Set carousel position" dialog in
the operating software by selecting System > Sample Position.
 Select the radio button next to "Reference run" and click OK. The carousel moves to zero
position.
 Prepare the samples. Cf. Preparing samples (on page 133).
 Insert the samples on the carousel. Remove the carousel.
 Enter the sample data to the PC (text view of the
 sample field.
 Enter the injection volume in [ml].
 Enter the name of the sample (max. 32 characters).
 Select a suitable method.
 Go through the measuring start checklist. Cf. Checklist for blank value / conditioning and daily
factor measurements.

 Start the measuring series: For continuous operation, click symbol . For a single

analysis, click symbol .

 Once measurement is finished, evaluate the measurement.
 Save the data or print them out. See Data backup and printing (on page 170).

Performing routine measuring work

Overview
This section provides information about
 types of routine measuring work,
 the purpose of routine measuring work,
 and how to perform this routine measuring work depending on the mode.

Definitions
Routine measuring work comprises the following activities:
 Determination of instrument blank values.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 148

 Instrument conditioning with conditioning samples.

 Determination of daily factors.

Routine measuring work is performed at set intervals or on defined occasions before, during or after a
series of measurements with real or standard samples.

Instrument blank values

Determination of the blank value depends on your needs. The following overview shows the type and
purpose of the determination.
Purpose Sample Blank Occasion
value
Blank value measurement of dist. H2O CO2, NO to consider blank values of distilled H2O,
distilled H2O, sample sample sample additives or packing material.
additives and packing additive
material. packing
material

For details on determining blank values, cf. Types of blank value determination and their settings
(on page 150).

Conditioning samples
Conditioning samples are measured with standard substances at the start of every series of analyses.
They are used to check...
 ... the correct run of the analysis.
 ... the proper condition of the instrument.
 ... flow and pressure behavior of the gases.

Daily factor determinations

Determination of the daily factor serves...
 ... to fine-tune instrument calibration to room conditions at the time of analysis.
 ... to assess the condition of the instrument by observing daily factor fluctuations and drift trends.

When to perform routine measuring work

Perform routine measuring work...
 ... at least once a day.
 ... perform with large measuring series.
 ... perform after longer measuring breaks.

If a series of analyses exceeds a duration of 12 hours, it is advisable to determine defined standard

solutions additionally in the middle and at the end of the series.

Example of a measuring routine work

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Sample vials" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

A measuring routine work could be as follows:

 Select the method (e.g. TOC/TNb-precise).
 Fill the sample vessel no. 1 of the autosampler with a test standard for conditioning according to
the application (example: 10 ppm).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 149

 Fill the sample vessel no. 2-3 of the autosampler with deionized water for blank value
measurement.
 Fill the sample vessel no. 4 of the autosampler with a test standard for calibration control
according to the application (example: 10 ppm).
 Enter the following sample data in the sample view (text view) on the PC:

Attention should be paid to: The hole position will be automatically generated.
 From sample vessel no. 5 on, real samples can be put into the autosampler, entering the
adequate method (injection volume).

Checklist for blank value, conditioning, daily factor and real samples
measurements
Purpose
The checklist helps you check whether the instrument is ready to measure blank value, conditioning,
daily factor and real samples.

Checklist
Go through the following list:
 Are the operating gases on?
 Is the furnace at setpoint temperature?
 Liquid mode: 850 °C
 Solid mode: 950 °C
 Is pressure OK?
 Display on the PC "Pressure": 1100 mbar
 Are the gas flows OK?
 Display on the PC "MFC": 200 ml/min (only vario TOC cube)
 Display on the PC "Flow": 200 ml/min
 Do the absorption tubes still have sufficient capacity?
 Is at least the last quarter of magnesium perchlorate, silver wool still unused?
 Have tube maintenance intervals been observed? Check:
 the catalyst

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 150

 the absorption tubes

 the acid container
 the ash crucible / ash finger
 Is the detector signal stable?
 Is the proper method allocated to the respective samples?
 Is the carousel loaded?

If you answer yes to all of the above, you can start measuring blank value, conditioning and daily
factor samples.

Types of blank value determination and their settings

Background
Blank value determination can be used for various purposes and is therefore performed in different
ways. The different types of blank value determination are described below with an explanation of the
respective settings.

CO2 base
For blank value determination of sample additives or packing material, the following blank samples
will be measured:
 prepare blank samples:
 without sample substance.
 with equal amount of sample additives.
 with the same packing material and the same packing method.
 From distilled H2O.
 For the blank sample, use the same method used for the real sample.
 The mean value of the blank value integrals is then entered in the software and deducted from
the samples.
 Only if the blank value always remains the same by preparing the sample accordingly, it can also
be "calibrated" and does not have to be deducted. However, in this case standard substances
must be prepared in the same way as the samples.

Determining blank values

Condition
The name of the blank sample must be defined in Options > Settings > Keywords. Ex works, "Blnk"
is already defined as the key word of the blank sample. If you want to change this, you must define
the new name via Options > Settings > Keywords.

Note
The first blank value is always too high after prolonged breaks between measurements or after
maintenance. If you want to perform an exact blank value determination, you must exclude the first
blank value from the calculation. Use a different name for the first blank value sample than the key
word in order to exclude the sample from the calculation.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 151

Determining blank values

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Sample vials" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Proceed as follows:
 If you have not already done so, set the mode of blank value determination. For that purpose,
open the "Configure Calculations" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options >
Settings > Calculation.
 Define the mode of blank value determination:
If you select the following in "Blank value determination"
 ... ...select "sequentially" a separate blank value is computed for every element for every
group of blank value samples; this value is entered in the respective blank value column
until the next group of blank value samples.
 ... select "entirely" all blank value samples in the series are used to compute the blank
value. This blank value is then applied to all samples in the series.
 Then click OK to save your settings.
 For regular cases put samples with distilled H2O in the carousel (only liquid mode).
 For regular cases put the packing materials into the carousel (only solids mode).
 Enter the following for the sample in the sample view (text view) on the PC:
 Name: Blank
 Method: e.g. NPOC/TNb - precise
 e.g. injection volume, if not determined in the method
 Start the blank value determination via System > Auto run.
 Once the measurements are finished you can compute the blank value. To do so, open the
"Blank values" dialog by selecting Math. > Blank values > Calculate.
 If "total" blank value calculation has been selected, the "Blank values" dialog will now open. Here,
the blank value just computed is displayed. Click OK to accept the blank value.
 The blank value is now automatically used for the following measurements.

Determining the daily factor

Note
Determination of the daily factor is only relevant in the solids mode.

Why is the daily factor determined?

The daily factor is determined in order to correct calibration according to atmospheric conditions (air
pressure, temperature) at the time of performing the analysis. The daily factor is factored into
subsequent measurements.

When must daily factor samples be measured?

Daily factor samples are measured on the following occasions:
 During routine measuring work, once a day.
 When the carousel is full daily factor samples are measured at the end (and between if
necessary) in order to check the condition of the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 152

Ways of determining the daily factor

There are three ways to determine the daily factor:
 You can compute the daily factor manually. This makes sense if you do not want to define the
substance as a factor sample.
 You can selectively trigger determination of the daily factor:
 You can then choose the time for determining the daily factor yourself.
 You can choose the standard samples with which the daily factor is determined yourself.
Condition: The daily factor samples must have a name defined in Options > Settings >
Standards and the standard substance must be enabled as a factor sample.
 Daily factor determination can be set to fully automatic.
 If you measure substances defined as factor samples, they are recognized and the daily
factor is automatically computed from them.
 Because the daily factor is determined several times a day, it will also offset any
fluctuations in the course of the day. Condition: The daily factor samples must have a name
defined in Options > Settings > Standards and the standard substance must be enabled
as a factor sample.

Computing the daily factor by hand

Proceed as follows:
 Measure any substance, that need not be defined in Options > Settings > Standard samples.
 Compute the daily factor. Daily factor = (theoretical content / actual content).
 Allocate the daily factor to the real samples in the sample view (text view). Enter the daily factor
in the corresponding factor column.

How to selectively trigger the daily factor

Proceed as follows:
 Define the type of factor calculation. For that purpose, open the "Configure Calculations" dialog in
the operating software by selecting Options > Settings > Calculation.
 Define the mode of factor determination:
If you in section "Factor determination"...
 ... select "sequentially" then the daily factor is computed group-by-group and changes
throughout the day.
 ... select "entirely" the daily factor is computed on the basis of all factor samples in the file.
An average factor is computed.
 Then click OK to save your settings.
 Measure a standard substance, that must be defined in Options > Settings > Standard
Samples, as a factor sample.
 If you only want to determine the daily factor from a certain number of samples, select these
samples in the sample view (text view).
 Open the "Daily factors" dialog in the operating software by selecting Math. > Factor.
 If you selected a certain number of samples for the calculation, check "Use standard samples
only".
 Click Yes to continue. The daily factor is computed automatically and allocated to the subsequent
samples.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 153

How to set automatic daily factor determination

Proceed as follows:
 Define the type and degree of automation for factor calculation. For that purpose, open the
"Configure Calculations" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Calculation.
 Define the mode of factor determination:
If you in section "Factor determination"...
 ... select "sequentially" then the daily factor is computed group-by-group and changes
throughout the day.
 ... select "entirely" the daily factor is computed on the basis of all factor samples in the file.
An average factor is computed.
 Specify the degree of automation for factor determination. Check "Automatic factor
determination". factor calculation.
 Then click OK to save your settings. As soon as you measure a substance defined as a factor
sample, the daily factors are automatically computed afterwards.

Recommendation for automated daily factor determination

When automatically computing the daily factor, it is useful to enable the "Standard tolerance
monitoring" function. This checks standard samples for fluctuations of results. If the tolerance define
in Options > Settings > Standards is exceeded, continuous analysis is stopped.

Enabling "Standard tolerance monitoring"

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Error handling" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Error handling.
 Check "Standard tolerance monitoring".
 Click OK. "Standard tolerance monitoring" is now enabled.

Description of the determination variants

Setting of the determination variants
The requested analysis variant can be selected under System > Mode and/or Options > Settings >
Method . The actual working processes are displayed in the status view under "process", e.g.
"standby" or "integration".

TC determination
The determination takes place in the following phases:
 Analysis run with single or continuous measurement
 Auto zero adjustment and baseline determination of the IR for the TC peak
 Flushing of the sampling tubes and the syringe (sampler runs, valves switch)
 Drawing up the sample
 Pressure drop carrier gas, injection of the sample into the Furnace
 Pressure drop carrier gas
 Integrator module waits for the start of the TC measuring peaks
 TC peak integration
 Integration end
 Water drain
 Process end, the new start can be done.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 154

NPOC determination
The determination takes place in the following phases:
 Analysis run with single or continuous measurement
 Auto zero adjustment and baseline determination of the IR for the NPOC peak
 Flushing of the sampling tubes and the syringe (sampler runs, valves switch)
 Drawing up the sample
 Pressure drop carrier gas, injection of the sample into the Furnace
 Pressure drop carrier gas
 Integrator module waits for the start of the NPOC measuring peaks
 NPOC peak integration
 Integration end
 Water drain
 Process end, the new start can be done.

General notes: When using an autosampler, the samples will be automatically acidified in NPOC
mode prior to the start of analysis. Provide one position in the autosampler with 10% HCl. The acid
position can be defined in the software under System > Feeding If no autosampler is available, the
samples have to be acidified to pH 2 with a suitable acid (e.g. HCl) prior to the measurement in due
time.

TIC / TC determination
The determination takes place in the following phases:
 Analysis run with single or continuous measurement
 Auto zero adjustment and baseline determination of the IR for the TIC peak
 Dosing of H3PO4 (1%) into the sparger
 Flushing of the sampling tubes and the syringe (sampler runs, valves switch)
 Drawing up the sample (double amount, since TIC/TC measurement)
 Pressure drop carrier gas, injection of the sample into the Sparger
 Pressure drop carrier gas, purging of the TIC
 Integrator module waits for the start of the TIC measuring peaks
 TIC peak integration
 Integration end, multiway valve goes to furnace position
 Baseline determination of the IR for the TC peak
 Pressure drop carrier gas, injection of the sample into the Furnace
 Pressure drop carrier gas
 Integrator module waits for the start of the TC measuring peaks
 TC peak integration
 Integration end
 Water drain
 Process end, the new start can be done.

General note: The TOC results from the difference of TC and TIC. For longer measuring breaks it is
recommended to flush the acid tube to the sparger by Maintenance > Flush Acid Path.

TIC determination
The determination takes place in the following phases:
 Analysis run with single or continuous measurement
 Auto zero adjustment and baseline determination of the IR for the TIC peak
 Dosing of H3PO4 (1%) into the sparger

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 155

 Flushing of the sampling tubes and the syringe (sampler runs, valves switch)
 Drawing up the sample
 Pressure drop carrier gas, injection of the sample into the Sparger
 Pressure drop carrier gas, purging of the TIC
 Integrator module waits for the start of the TIC measuring peaks
 TIC peak integration
 Integration end
 Water drain
 Process end, the new start can be done.

General note: For longer measuring breaks it is recommended to flush the acid tube to the sparger
by Maintenance > Flush Acid Path.

POC determination
The determination takes place in the following phases:
 Analysis run with single or continuous measurement
 Auto zero adjustment and baseline determination of the IR for the TC peak
 Flushing of the sampling tubes and the syringe (sampler runs, valves switch)
 Drawing up the sample
 Pressure drop carrier gas, injection of the sample into the Sparger
 Pressure drop carrier gas, purging and oxidation of the volatile organic carbon compounds
 Integrator module waits for the start of the POC measuring peaks
 POC peak integration
 Integration end
 Water drain
 Process end, the new start can be done.

General note: The POC mode requires a modification to remove volatile inorganic carbon
compounds.

TNb determination
The measurement of TNb can be added to all analysis modes. The processes do not change, simply a
detector will be connected. For the calibration, pay attention to the fact that the NO formation during
the combustion depends on the amount of C and N in the sample. Therefore, the TN b calibration
curve may proceed non linear - unlike TOC.

Precondition is that the instrument is equipped with an adequate detector.

Option particles
The option Particle may be added to all analyses modes (Options > Settings > Method). This is a
separate measuring process, in order to widely avoid sedimentation of the sample in the measuring
system. This means that for a multiple determination only one measurement will be drawn up as
sample and injected in order to keep the volume in the suction syringe as low as possible.

Furthermore, the stirrer will be automatically controlled and does not have to be activated under
System > Feeding.

Flushing the analyzer during an analysis run

Background
If samples with high concentration differences are measured, it is required to perform flushing steps
between the measurements.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 156

Procedure
Proceed as follows:
 Fill in the text box where you enter sample name, injection volume and the measuring method.
 Decide in which hole position (carousel) the flushing sample shall be and put the sample into this
position.
 Open the dialog "Insert flush sequence" via System > Insert Flush Sequence.
You can also open the dialog by means of the right mouse key: Go to the line in the text field
where the flush sequence shall be inserted and select Insert Flush Sequence.
The line number will be automatically adjusted.
 Enter the line number where the flush step shall be inserted.
 Enter the hole position where the flush sample is located in the carousel.
 Click OK to close the dialog again.
 The text filed now has an inserted line at the corresponding position, which is filled-out with the
selected hole position as well as the method "Flush".

Measurements in the trace range

Target group
Personnel working with the instrument.

Background
Basically, analytical works have to be performed with special diligence. This applies in particular for
works in the trace range, since smallest errors here can have serious influences on the result Main
task is to keep the blank value of all deployed reagents and vessels as low as possible and to avoid
additional contaminations.

The rule applies that the proper preparation of an anlysis already starts with the sampling. After the
sampling, the appropriate transportation and stocking follows. For this we refer to the relevant
technical literature for the corresponding analytical task.

Note
The following lists important topics which have to be carefully observed when performing
measurements in the trace range:
Object of observation Further explanation
Solutions of low content (concentration Therefore, samples with low concentration should be
< 5ppm) have a very short durability measured immediately after their sampling. Samples and
which is to be measured rather in standards with low concentrations should be prepared and/or
hours than in days. This applies both diluted from solutions with higher concentrations immediately
for samples and for reference / before they are to be analyzed.
calibration standards.
Use solutions and standards with low In case a short term stocking of samples and standards would
concentration always freshly. become necessary, the sample can be stabilized for a short
period by adding of diluted acid (e.g. approx. 10 µl 1 % HCl for
10ml sample). After that however, measurement of TIC is no
longer possible. Basically, H2SO4 should not be used.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 157

Sample preparation / Cleaning the A careful cleaning of the deployed sample vials is also part of
sample vials the sample preparation. Recommendations on preparation of
vessels are given in the U.S.Pharmacopoeia-NF, USP 30.
1051 . . 2007, p.500.
One of the methods described here is cleaning the vessels
with nitric acid (HNO3). This method has proven to be effective
and quite simple in its procedure. For this, an acid bath has to
be made by means of 20 % HNO3 and the vessels have to be
inserted for several hours (preferably over night). Then the
vessels have to be flushed with distilled water (aprox. 10
times) and another 3 - 5 times with ultra pure water. Now the
vessels have to be dryed in a clean and dedicated drying
cabinet at raised temperature (Attention: Do not dry volumetric
flasks at temperatures greater than 25 - 30 °C!). For further
storage the vessels have to be sealed with parafilm.
All sample vials must be carefully It shall be considered that with TIC measurements in the lower
cleaned before their usage. ppm and/or ppb range the solution tends to be balanced to the
carbon dioxide (CO2) content of the air.
If the samples remain on the sampler for a longer time, this
may lead to a measurable accumulation of the sample with
CO2 (increase of CO2 - concentration by and by). Therefore,
the samples have to be covered. The use of aluminum foil,
septum or other suitable covers are recommended. It is also
recommended to measure samples with a very low TIC
content immediately.
The processing of few sample numbers in mulitple sequences
brings more reliable results than when feeding the complete
sampler at once.
Samples with low TIC content Prior to the performance of an analysis run the quality of the
accumulate with CO2 from the air and used ultra pure water has to be checked by all means. The
have to be covered and always used minimum requirements for an operational qualification (OQ)
fresh. according to the requirements of the European
Pharmacopoeia 01/2005:20245 is as follows: conductivity <
0.1 µS·cm-1 at 25 °C, TOC < 0.1 mg/L. However, it is
recommended to use significantly lower values. As a rule,
measurements in the trace range shall always be processed
with fresh water and during an analysis run the same water
(from the same day and from the same source) for all
applications (blank determination, dilution of the samples,
preparation of standards, cleaning steps) shall be used. A
careful blank determination at the beginning of an analysis run
is precondition for reliable measuring results.
Use fresh water for all applications It may be possible that the used catalyst leads to an increased
during an analysis run. A careful blank carbon blank. This can be observed especially directly after an
determination is precondition for the exchange of the catalyst. In this case, the catalyst shall be
accuracy of an analysis. conditioned first by measuring several samples which only
contain diluted acid (e.g. 1 % HCl) or distilled water.
For measurements in the sub-ppm range it is helpful to do
without a catalyst.
A new catalyst has to be conditioned
prior to usage.
In the sub-ppm range the usage of a
catalyst is not necessary.

Calibration in the measuring range < 2 mg/l

Special care shall be taken for the calibration in the trace and ultra trace range.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 158

In general, at least a 5-point calibration and at least a triple determination per calibration point shall be
processed.

For calibrations in the ppb range it is recommended to work with a dilution series with fixed volumes
and higher injection volumes (2 ml).

It may be helpful to force the calibration curve through the point of origin. For this purpose set the
coefficient "a" = 0 manually after completion of the calibration evaluation. This shall only be applied in
exceptional cases.

Stopping continuous analysis

When do I stop continuous analysis?
It makes sense to stop a continuous analysis in the following cases:
 If the results of the conditioning sample indicate that parts of the instrument are defective or that
gas pressure and flow behaviors are not OK.
 If the measuring results of the control standard are outside the requirede range.

Stopping a continuous analysis spontaneously

Proceed as follows:
 Execute the command System > Single run in the operating software.
 This stops the analysis after measuring the current sample.

Moving a stop marker

The program automatically moves the stop marker to the last sample position during sample data
input. It is therefore only necessary to move the stop marker in special cases.

Nevertheless, if for any reason you have to move the stop marker proceed as follows:
 Open the "Set stop marker" dialog by selecting Edit > Stop tag.
 Use the arrow buttons to set the sample number at which to set a stop marker.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and moves the stop marker to the desired position.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 159

Preparing measuring data for evaluation

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section enables you to prepare measuring data for evaluation.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 160

Configuring the sample view

Configuring the sample view
Proceed as follows:
 Select cells in the sample view.
 Specify what you want to have displayed in the view. Open the "Configure view" dialog by
selecting View > Gridview > Configure.
 Decide:
If you want to...
 ... show a column: Select the entry in the "Hide" column and click <<<. The entry is moved
to the "Show" column.
 ... hide a column: Select the entry in the "Show" column and click >>>. The entry is moved
to the "Hide" column.
 Change the column display order using the ^ and v buttons.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves your settings.

Auto-optimizing a view
You can automatically adjust the width of individual columns to fit the whole headers and entries in
the cells.

Proceed as follows:
 Select cells in the sample view.
 Optimize sample view by selecting View > Gridview > Auto align. This optimizes the sample
view.

Determine measuring units and number of decimal places.

Determine measuring units and number of decimal places.
Proceed as follows:
 Select cells in the sample view.
 Open the "Configure view" dialog in the operating software by selecting View > Gridview >
Configure.
 Select the column in the "Show" section whose measuring units or decimal places you want to
set and click the right mouse button. A context menu opens.
 Open the "Column properties" dialog by selecting the Properties... menu item.
 Enter the desired measuring unit in the "Unit" filed. Note: This function is not available for all
columns/systems.
 Enter the desired number of decimal places in the "Decimal places" field. Note: This function is
not available for all columns.
 Click OK in the "Column properties" dialog.
 Click OK in the "Configure view" dialog. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 161

Saving the sample view

Saving the sample view
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "View configuration" dialog by selecting View > Gridview > Save configuration.
 Enter the name of the view in the text box at the top and click Save. The view is saved and can
be loaded at a later point.

Loading a sample view

Loading a sample view
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "View configuration" dialog by selecting View > Gridview > Load configuration.
 Select the desired view in the listbox and click Load. The desired view is loaded.

Configure statistics view

Configure statistics view
Proceed as follows:
 If the statistics view of the combi view is not already being displayed, execute the command View
> Toggle until statistics view appears or click on Statistic field in the menu bar above the combi
view.
 Klick on the statistic view to highlight it.
 Specify what you want to have displayed in the view. Open the "Configure Statistic Pane" dialog
by selecting View > Statistic > Configure.
 Decide:
If you want to...
 ... show a value: Check the appropriate checkbox.
 ... hide a value: Uncheck the appropriate checkbox.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves your settings.

Generating statistical data

What are statistical data?
Statistical data are mean values and standard deviations computed from groups of measuring data.
The operator compiles the groups, that may consist of analyzed samples and samples not yet
measured.

Ways of generating statistical data

There are two ways of generating statistical data:
 You can generate statistical data fully automated. In this case, the software combines all samples
of the same name into groups. The user can only exclude specific samples from the calculation.
Statistical data are then automatically generated for these groups.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 162

 You can generate statistical data manually. In this case, the user combines any samples in
groups. Statistical data are then automatically generated for these groups.

Generating statistical data fully automated

Proceed as follows:
 Click Statistics > By names. A warning appears which has to be confirmed.
 Respond to the warning note:
If statistics memory...
 ... may be deleted: Click Yes.
 ... must not be deleted: Click No and safe your data. Afterwards, repeat the steps descibed
above.
 Samples of the same name are combined in groups and the mean values and standard deviation
are computed automatically and displayed in the statistics view.
 If you want to exclude a sample from the calculation afterwards, select the appropriate sample
line in the statistics view. Subsequently execute the command Statistics > Include/Exclude

sample or click the button in the toolbar . The sample is discarded and the calculation
updates automatically.

Generating statistical data manually

Proceed as follows:
 Select all samples that you want to combine in a group in the sample view (text view). To do so,
click the "No." cell of the corresponding line.
 Select multiple contiguous samples by clicking and holding the SHIFT key.
 Select multiple non-contiguous samples by clicking and holding the CTRL key.
 Select Statistics > Group. The selected samples are displayed as a group in statistics view.
Mean values and standard deviation are computed automatically.
 If you want to exclude a sample from the calculation afterwards, select the appropriate sample
line in the statistics view. Subsequently execute the command Statistics > Include/Exclude

sample or click the button in the toolbar . The sample is discarded and the calculation
updates automatically.

Formulae for generating statistical data

Statistical data
The following statistical data can be generated fron sample groups:
 Mean value of the sample group
 Absolute standard deviation of the sample group
 Relative standard deviation of the sample group
 Delta of the sample group

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 163

Mean value
The mean value of "n" element concentrations is computed with this formula:
where:
/c = Mean value of concentrations
ci = Individual concentrations in the group
n = Number of group members
i = index from 1 to n

Absolute standard deviation

Absolute standard deviation is computed according to this formula:
where:
s = Absolute standard deviation
ci = Individual concentrations in the group
n = Number of group members
i = index from 1 to n

Relative standard deviation

Relative standard deviation is computed according to this formula:
where:
srel = Relative standard deviation
s = Absolute standard deviation
/c = Mean value of concentrations

Delta
Delta is computed according to this formula:
where:
 = Delta
cmax = Highest element concentration in a group
cmin = Lowest element concentration in a group

System Suitability Test

Background
This system suitability test enables you to test the quality of your instrument.

The system suitability test follows the

 European Pharmacopoeia 6.0, vol. 1 (20244) 2008, p.71

and the
 U.S. Pharmacopoeia-NF, USP 30 (643) 2007, p.257 ff.

Requirements
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 The instrument must be switched on.
 The PC must be switched on and the instrument software must be started.
 The instrument has to be ready to measure (parameters, mode etc.).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 164

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparation and measurement
 Evaluation

Phase 1: Preparation and measurement

Proceed as follows:
 Always use clean sample vials without any organic residues. Use ultra pure water for rinsing the
sample vials. Use ultra pur water for sample dilution as well as for blank value determination.
See cleaning sample vials (refers also to "Cleaning Glass Apparatus", US Pharmacopeia-NF,
USP 30 <1051> 2007, p.500).
 Prepare a standard solution (rs): For this, suspend sucrose in ultra pure water to a concentration
of 1.2 mg/l (results in a C concentration of 0.5 mg/l). The diluted sucrose represents for the
system suitability test the easily digestible substance.
 Prepare a system suitability test solution (rss). For this, suspend 1.4 benzoquinone in ultra pure
water to a concentration of 0.75 mg/l (results in a C concentration of 0.5 mg/l as well). The diluted
benzoquinone solution represents for the system suitability test the hardly digestible substance.
 Open the system suitability test wizard in the operating software by selecting Wizards > System
suitability test. The dialog "Step 1 of 3" appears. In this step the wizard shows a welcome
message.
 Click Next. The dialog "Step 2 of 3" appears.
 In step 2:
Enter the number of measurements per sample.
Enter the number of conditioning samples.
Enter the number of blan value samples.
Enter the number of easily digestible samples.
Enter the number of hardly digestible samples.
Enter the desired measure method.
 Click Next. The dialog "Step 3 of 3" appears. Step 3 shows you which actions necessary for the
system suitability test must subsequently be performed by you.
 Click Finish. This closes the winzard. The previously defined sample data will be automatically
carried over into the sample field.
 Load the carousel with the samples according to the list in the text view. Note: Loading samples
with an attached carousel is prohibited! Feed the carousel on a suitable work surface.
 Start the analysis process by selecting System > Auto run. The series of measurements will be
processed.

Phase 2: Evaluation
Proceed as follows:
 Open the dialog "System suitability test" via Math. > System suitability test after the samples
for the system suitability test have been analyzed.
 Check the corresponding result: The system suitability test is regarded as successful if a value
between 0.85 and 1.15 has been computed.

Formula
The following formula shows how the value for the system suitability test is calculated:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 165

where:
S = system suitability value
/css = averaged concentration of the hardly digestible substance
/css = averaged concentration of the easily digestible substance

Manual peak integration

What is "manual peak integration"?
The instrument software offers the possibility to manually determine area values of peaks measured
during an analysis run.

Why manual peak integration?

Normally the measurement of the peak areas (integration) is done automatically in the control
electronic and/or the firmware of the analyzer itself. In few cases, it may be possible that the
automatic integration algorithm does not give satisfactory results, in particular if two peaks are
superimposed etc. In these cases the "manual reintegration" is recommended.

Peak types
In these instructions you will find different peak types. Their characteristics are listed in the follwing.

Single peaks
In general a single peak looks as follows:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 166

Superimposed peaks
These are two peaks where one superimposes the other. Peak 1 is designated as "socket" and peak
2 is designated as "superimposed". The following picture shows such a run.

Melted peaks
These are two consecutive peaks where the second peak already starts although the first is not yet
finished. The graphic appears as follows:

Manual integratability
Regarding the integratability there are certain differences between the individual peak types.

Well integrable are:

 Sinple peaks with clear beginning and tailing. This peak type normally is integrated without any
problem from the firmware implemented in the algorithm. However, a reintegration may be
necessary, in particular if the peak is very small and therefore the end mark was set too early.
 Superimposed peaks where a significant difference in width between socket (large) and
"superimposed" (small) is noticeable.

Limited integrable are:

 Superimposed peaks, where a significant difference in width between socket and "superimposed"
is not noticeable.

Poorly or not at all integrable are:

 Melted peaks, since due to the undefined peak form no conclusions for the actual separation
points between the first and the second peak are possible.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 167

Baseline
The instrument software allows to select a straight or bevel baseline for integration. The automatic
integration always assumes a straight baseline. Therefore, also the manual peak integration should
be done with a straight baseline. The height of the baseline will be defined during the auto zero
adjust. During the manual integration the baseline can be specifically adjusted in height. The option to
perform the manual peak integration with a bevel baseline can be selected for special cases.

Procedure
Important note: Prior to the manual peak integration, create a copy of the actual loaded document
and only perform the manual peak integration there. A copy can be created via File > Save As with
subsequent input of a suitable (different) document name.

Depending from the predominant peak shape there are two different procedures:
 Integration of single peaks. Here, the requested peak start and end marks are set as well as the
adjustment of the height of the baseline
 Integration of superimposed peaks. Here, first the peak start and end marks of the socket and the
height of the baseline are set, subsequently the peak start and end marks of the "superimposed"
peak. If requested, an intermediate point for the separation of socket and "superimposed" peak
can be set. This serves as a better adjustment of the socket course.

Integration of single peaks

Proceed as follows:
 Open in the instrument software the dialog "Define type of peak" via Math. > Manual peak
integration > Type.
Note: The menu command is only accessible, if the grafic view is activated.
 Activate "single peak" and "straight baseline" and subsequently click OK, to leave the dialog.
 Select the requested sample so its peak course is displayed in the graphic view.
 Open the instrument software via the dialog "Define peak start/end" via Math. > Manual Peak
Integration > Integrate.
Note: The menu command is only accessible if the graphic view is activated and configured that
way only the single corresponding peak course is displayed. If necessary, deactivate other
graphics (e.g. pressure, temperature, etc.).

 Click and mark the peak start as follows: position the mouse pointer to the position where
the peak begins and click the left mouse key. The peak start tag is displayed as a vertical blue
line.

 Click and mark the peak end in the same way as described in the previous step for the
peak start. As soon as peak start and end are marked, a baseline is drawn automatically and the
integration result is displayed below the peak graphic. Furthermore, the area content appears in
light blue.

 Click to adjust the height of the baseline. To find out the original height which was
determined during the automatic integration, first place the peak start and end tags directly over
the tags generated from the automatic (magenta crosses). Then move the baseline until the
manual integration result matches the automatic one. Subsequently, you can move the peak start
and end tag to the requested position, if necessary (see description of the two previous steps).
 Click Assign, if the integration result meets your requirements. The dialog "Area assignment"
opens. Select the element which shall be assigned to the manually integrated peak area. Leave
the dialog by clicking OK.
 The peak area was entered in the corresponding cell in the sample view and the new
concentration value was calculated. Furthermore, the date for the corresponding sample was
deleted and the text "ManInt" was entered in the info column. Now the process of the manual
integration of single peaks is completed.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 168

Integration of superimposed peaks

Proceed as follows:
 Open in the instrument software the dialog "Define type of peak" via Math. > Manual peak
integration > Type.
Note: The menu command is only accessible, if the grafic view is activated.
 Activate "superimposed peak" and "straight baseline" and subsequently click OK, to leave the
dialog.
 Select the requested sample so its peak course is displayed in the graphic view.
 Open the instrument software via the dialog "Define peak start/end" via Math. > Manual Peak
Integration > Integrate.
Note: The menu command is only accessible if the graphic view is activated and configured that
way only the single corresponding peak course is displayed. If necessary, deactivate other
graphics (e.g. pressure, temperature, etc.).

 Click and/or to tag the peak start and and of the socket as described in the section of
the procedure of single peaks.

 Click to adjust the height of the baseline, as described in the section of the procedure for
single peaks.

 Click and mark the peak start of the "superimposed" peak as follows: position the mouse
pointer to the position where the superimposed peak begins and click the left mouse key. The
peak start tag is displayed as a vertical red line.

 Click and mark the peak end of the superimposed peak in the same way as described in
the previous step for the peak start. As soon as peak start and end are tagged, a red baseline is
drawn automatically and the integration result is displayed below the peak graphic. Furthermore,
the peak area of the superimposed peak is displayed in light red.

 Click , to set an intermediate point. By doing so, you may reach a better adjustment of the
socket course.
 Click Assign, if the integration result meets your requirements. The dialog "Area assignment"
opens. Select the manually integrated peak area and the element which shall be assigned. Leave
the dialog by clicking OK.
 The peak area was entered in the corresponding cell in the sample view and the new
concentration value was calculated. Furthermore, the date for the corresponding sample was
deleted and the text "ManInt" was entered in the info column. Now the process of the manual
integration of superimposed peak is completed.

Configuring the graph view

Configuring the graph view
Proceed as follows:
 If the graphic view of the combi view is not already being displayed, execute the command View
> Toggle until the graphic view appears or click Graphic field in the menu bar above the combi
view.
 Klick on the graphic view to highlight it.
 Specify what you want to have displayed in the view. Open the "Configure Graphic Pane" dialog
by selecting View > Graphic > Configure.
 Decide for the section "Y axis configuration":
If you want to...

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 169

 ... show a value: Check the appropriate checkbox. Enter the graph scale range in the
textbox next to it. You can have a max. of 4 checks, for the sake of clarity.
 ... hide a value: Uncheck the appropriate checkbox.
 In the "Zero line" section, specify which of the horizontal grid lines to take as the zero line for the
graph view. A value of 0 means that the zero line is at the bottom edge of the graph view. Use
the arrows to set the desired value.
 Specify the division of the time axis (X axis) in the "X-axis configuration" section. Enter the
desired value in the textbox.
 Specify what graph to display during analysis. Decide:
During an analysis, you want...
 ... to show only the graphic of the current sample: Check the checkbox next to "During
analysis run display current sample only".
 ... to show also the graphics of all samples: Uncheck the checkbox next to "During analysis
run display current sample only".
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves your settings.

Auto-optimizing a view
By selecting View > Graphic > Auto align you can auto-scale the graph to fit it completely in the
window.

Setting the size of the graph

Setting the size of the graph in the dialog
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Zoom In/Out" dialog in the operating software by selecting View > Zoom.
 Use the arrow button to open a listbox which lists the possible zoom factors.
 Select the the requested zoom factor from the list.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and displays the graph according to your settings.

Setting the size of the graph with the mouse

Proceed as follows:
 Drag a rectangle in graph view using the mouse.
 The selected area is displayed larger.

Setting the zoom factor back to 1

By clicking the button at the upper left corner of the graphic filed you can set the zoom factor
from any value back to 1.

Configure report
Configure report
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Configure Report" dialog by selecting File > Report configuration.
 Define the print settings as required:
 Enter up to three headers in the "Title" section.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 170

 Check the appropriate options in the "Report options" section.

 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Display print preview

Display print preview
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Configure report" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Print preview.
 Define your report settings. See Configure report (on page 169). You can also change the
report type in this dialog below the icon. Then click OK. Print preview is displayed.
 Assess the print preview:
 The Next and Previous buttons allow you to browse multiple page documents.
 The Two Pages and One Page buttons allow you to view two pages next to each other or a
single page.
 The Zoom in and Zoom out buttons allow you to zoom the document in/out in order to see
it better.
 Decide:
If the print preview...
 ... is OK and you want to print out the document: Click Print. The "Configure report" dialog
is displayed again, click OK. The "Print" dialog is displayed.
 ... is not OK and you want to change it: Click Close. Open the "Configure Report" dialog by
selecting File > Report configuration. See Configure report (on page 169).

Data backup and printing

Why backup and print data?
The measuring data of a sample are displayed on screen and saved to a temporary file after every
analysis. In order to save the data permanently, it is necessary to save them separately or print them
out.

Graph view
All graphical information (pressure, peaks, etc.) of a sample are saved. This allows you to view and
print various measuring variables in a graph. If any error messages or fluctuating measuring values
occur, it is useful to consult the graph.

Viewing and printing the graph

Proceed as follows:
 In the sample view (text view), select the sample line whose graph you wish to display.
 If the graphic view of the combi view is not already being displayed, execute the command View
> Toggle until the graphic view appears or click Graphic field in the menu bar above the combi
view.
 Specify what measuring variables you want to display in the graph. Open the "Configure Graphic
Pane" dialog by selecting View > Graphic > Configure.
 Define your settings:
 Check the measuring variables to display. You can select up to 4 measuring variables.
 In the "Zero line" section you can move the zero line up.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 171

 In the "X-axis configuration" section you can influence the graph display area.
 Click OK. The graph is displayed with your settings.
 Execute the command File > Print to print out the graphic. The "Configure report" dialog is
displayed.
 Define the print settings as required:
 Enter a title in the "Title" section. It can consist of up to three lines.
 Check the appropriate options in the "Report options" section.
 Click OK. The "Print" dialog is displayed in which you can start printing.

Permanently backing up measuring data and graphical information

Proceed as follows:
 Execute the following command: File > Save.
If the document...
 ... has already a name: The document is automatically updated. The storing process has
been completed.
 ... has not yet a name: The "Save document" dialog appears.
 Enter the desired document name in the header of the "Save document" dialog.
 Click OK. The measuring data are saved.

Overview of export and import file formats

Export and import
The analysis data are managed in a database, so it is not possible to load and save them as files in
the usual way. However, by using the File > Export/Import > Export and File > Export/Import >
Import menu functions it is possible to transport documents "out of" the database and to transport
external documents "into" the database.

Export and import file formats

The following table lists the file formats and their uses:
File type Import Export Description
*.mdb yes yes MS Access database file. Requires more memory than the
other file types. Includes graphical informations in the export.
Suitable for transferring files to be evaluated by someone else,
e.g. by the service department.
*.xls yes yes MS Excel file. Does not include graphical informations in the
export. Suitable for further numerical processing in MS Excel.
It is possible, but not advisable, to import these files because
graphical information is deleted if a file of the same name
exists.

Exporting analysis data to MS Excel and viewing

Exporting analysis data to MS Excel
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Export document" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Export/Import >
Export.
 Select the desired file in the listbox and click OK.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 172

 This displays the "Save file as" dialog.

 Select the directory to save to in the "Save" field.
 Select "MS Excel Files" in the "File type" field and click Save.
 A message dialog appears which informs that exporting to MS Excel will be done without
graphics. Click Yes to begin exporting.
 The export process is performed.

Viewing analysis data in MS Excel

Proceed as follows:
 Launch MS Excel.
 Open the "Open" dialog by selecting File > Open.
 Select "All Microsoft Excel Files" as the file type to open in the "File type" field.
 Select the directory containing the desired analysis file in the "Search in" field.
 Select the desired analysis file in the list below and click Open.
 The data are displayed on different tabs in MS Excel.
 Edit the imported data as required and save them when you are finished.

Exporting LIMS data

Selecting data to send
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "LIMS settings" dialog by selecting Options > Settings > LIMS.
 Open the "LIMS data" tab.
 Decide:
If you want to...
 ... send data: Check the appropriate checkbox in the "Data to send" section.
 ... not send data: Uncheck the appropriate checkbox in the "Data to send" section.
 Click OK in the "LIMS settings" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed.

Auto-exporting LIMS data

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "LIMS settings" dialog by selecting Options > Settings > LIMS.
 Open the "LIMS data" tab.
 Check the "Auto-export data after every analysis" checkbox.
 Click OK in the "LIMS settings" dialog. Your settings are saved and the dialog is closed. The
software now sends analysis data to LIMS after every analysis.

Exporting LIMS data manually

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Export to LIMS" dialog by selecting File > Export/Import > Export to LIMS.
 Select the desired option.
 Click OK in the "Export to LIMS" dialog. The export process is performed.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 173

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 174

Working with documents

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section enables you to work with database documents.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 175

Creating new documents

Usual procedure
Usually, one document is created per day. The data are separated and evaluated by customer at the
end of the day.

Document capacity
A document can store sample data from a maximum of 5 carousels.

Creating new documents

Proceed as follows:
 Select File > New to create a new document.
 Save the new document by selecting File > Save. The "Save document" dialog appears.
 Enter the desired document name in the text box at the top and click OK. This closes the dialog
and saves the document.

Editing documents
Note
Cell contents and lines can only be deleted or inserted until the samples have been completely
processed.

Deleting cell contents

Proceed as follows:
 Select the cell whose contents you want to delete.
 Delete the contents by selecting Edit > Cut. The cell now contains its default contents, for
example 0.0000. The deleted contents are in the clipboard.

Deleting lines
Proceed as follows:
 Select the line by clicking the number next to the line.
 Delete the line by selecting Edit > Delete Line. This deletes the line and the other samples move
up.

Inserting cell contents

Proceed as follows:
 Copy the desired contents to the clipboard.
 Select the cell in which to insert the contents.
 Insert the contents in the cell by selecting Edit > Paste.

Inserting lines
Proceed as follows:
 Select the line above which to insert the empty line by clicking the number next to the line.
 Insert the line by selecting Edit > Insert Line. This inserts the line and all of the following
samples move down one line.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 176

Swap samples
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Swap samples" dialog via Edit > Swap.
 Enter the sample numbers to be swapped and confirm with OK.

Editing finished samples

Finished samples are only edited in special cases. See Editing analysis data (on page 99).

Deleting documents
Who is allowed to delete?
Deleting documents is reserved for the Administrator level.

What is deleted?
The document itself is deleted along with all previous versions of the document.

Consequences
If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, the user is prompted to input a comment after deleting the
document.

Finding documents
Searching with filter criteria
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Open document" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Open. Activate
the "Selection" checkbox to show the document search filter criteria.
 Decide:
If you want to...
 ... look for documents beginning from a certain date: Enter a date in the "From" textbox and
check the checkbox next to it.
 ... look for documents ending at a certain date: Enter a date in the "To" textbox and check
the checkbox next to it.
 ... look for documents of a certain period: Enter a date in the "From" and "To" textboxes and
check the checkboxes next to them.
 ... look for documents with a certain name: Enter the document name you are looking for in
the "Name" textbox. Wildcards such as ? and * are also allowed.
 ... look for documents of a certain author: Enter the name of the author in the "Author"
textbox.
 The software now only displays documents matching your filter criteria. Select the desired
document in the listbox and click OK.
 Make a decision for the further proceeding:
If the coefficients of the selected document...
 ... match the current coefficients: The document is displayed immediately. Herewith, the
searching is finished.
 ... do not match the current coefficients: A message appears. Go to the next step.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 177

 A message appears which informs that the coefficients included in the document are different
and the current coefficients will be overwritten during the document is loaded. This message
must be confirmed by you. Click Yes to continue. The document is displayed.

Finding previous versions

Note: This function is only accessible if 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled.

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Open document" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Open.
 In the listbox select the document whose previous versions you want to view.
 Click Previous versions. The "Select version" dialog is displayed.
 Select the desired version in the listbox and click OK. The current version is indicated by number
0, previous versions are indicated by a minus sign.
 Decide:
If the coefficients of the selected previous version...
 ... match the current coefficients: The previous version is displayed immediately. Herewith,
the searching is finished.
 ... do not match the current coefficients: A message appears. Go to the next step.
 A message appears which informs that the coefficients included in the document are different
and the current coefficients will be overwritten during the document is loaded. This message
must be confirmed by you. Click Yes to continue. The previous version is displayed.

Copying documents via the clipboard

What can you copy?
You can only copy the contents of the sample view to the clipboard via Edit > Copy; you cannot copy
graphics. You must select the cells to copy in the sample view. The next paragraph explains how to
select cells.

Selecting cells
You can select cells in the sample view in the following ways:
 Select the whole sample view by left-clicking on the "No." field.
 Select a whole line by left-clicking on the number next to the line.
 Select a whole column by left-clicking on the title of the column.
 You can select multiple successive lines by clicking and holding the SHIFT key.
 You can select multiple non-contiguous cells, lines or columns by clicking and holding the CTRL
key.
 Left-click to select a single cell.

Inserting data
You can insert data from the clipboard by selecting Edit > Paste:
 to insert them into a new document in the database or
 into an MS Excel document.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 178

Importing documents
Importing documents
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Open" dialog by selecting File > Export/Import > Import.
 From the "Look in" dropdown listbox select the directory containing the document.
 Select the document file and click Open.
 Decide:
If the coefficients of the selected document...
 ... match the current coefficients: The document is imported immediately. Herewith, the
import is finished.
 ... do not match the current coefficients: A message appears. Go to the next step.
 A message appears which informs that the coefficients included in the document are different
and the current coefficients will be overwritten during the document is loaded. This message
must be confirmed by you. Click Yes to continue. The document is imported.

Signing documents
What signature is allocated?
The signature that is enabled in the "Sign" dialog and whose radio button is checked is allocated; for
example, the "created" signature is allocated. The following rules apply:
 The "created" signature is assigned to a document first.
 The "checked" signature is assigned to a document if it already has a "created" signature.
 The "released" signature is only assigned to a document if it already has a "created" and a
"checked" signature.

Note
Note the following:
 The signature program must be installed.
 Documents can only be signed if 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled.
 Only sign finished documents. After signing, the document is read-only.

Signing documents
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Sign" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Sign.
 Enter your name set up in the signature program in the "Name" field.
 Enter your password set up in the signature program in the "Password" field.
 Click Sign. The program checks whether you are authorized to sign the document. The result is
displayed in a message window:: "GOOD_PASSPHRASE" indicates that you are authorized to
create the signature. The signature has been created.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Using the instrument 179

Checking documents for authenticity

What signature is checked?
Only those signatures can be checked that are enabled in the "Verify digital signature" dialog and if
their radio button is checked; for example the "created" signature. If the document already has
multiple signatures, the user must select one to check.

Note
Note the following:
 The signature program must be installed.
 Signatures can only be checked or created if 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled.

Checking a signature
Proceed as follows:
 Open the document to check.
 Open the "Verify digital signature" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Verify.
 Check the radio button next to the signature you want to check.
 Click Verify. The program begins to check. The result is displayed in a message window and
indicates whether the signature is authentic or not. "Good signature from..." indicates that the
signature is authentic.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 8

Maintaining the instrument

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section is designed to maintain proper working order of the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 182

Important information about maintenance

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section provides important information about maintenance.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 183

Maintenance work to be performed by the customer

Note
Observe that the maintenance or replacement times indicated here are greatly dependent on the
respective sample matrix. All intervals and figures indicated are only examples and by no means
guarantee service life of consumables or wear and tear parts.

Maintenance work to be performed by the customer

The following table lists the maintenance work that you can perform yourself as customer and the
intervals for these tasks.
Maintenance work Interval See ...
Check absorption tubes/ Daily visual inspection Filling, removing and
installing drying,
Change filling absorption and filter tubes
Magnesium perchlorate / silver (on page 255)
wool
Replacement of the ash Depending on the sample matrix. Replacement of the ash
crucible/finger crucible/finger (on page
205)
Instrument and supply lines leak Daily visual inspection of the flow Performing a leak test.
test display.
Checking hard disk capacity and Backup every week, relocate data Starting the database
relocating data to disk if to disk as required. backup (on page 105).
necessary.
Calibration For deviations of the standard Performing calibration (on
solutions for measuring routine page 189, on page 193).
work.
3-point calibration is
recommended, when a measuring
series will be started.
When the daily factor is not
between 0.0-1.1 anymore.
Clean multiway valve, possibly Depending on the sample matrix. Clean, assemble and install
replacing seals. the multiway valve and the
injection plug. (on page 224)
Replace sealing elements As required. Replacing sealing elements
(o-rings, quad rings, half shells) (on page 217).
Cleaning the carousel As required ---
Clean syringe After particles containing samples Maintain syringe (on page
and demanding samples. 242)
Replace comubstion tube, replace Replacement intervals, see Removing the reaction
fillings, check plugs and o-rings at Options > Maintenance > tubes from the furnace (on
the same time Intervals in the operating page 251).
software.
Emptying and filling
reaction tubes (on page
245).
Installing reaction tubes in
the furnace and
conditioning (on page 252).
Fill acid container Daily visual inspection Filling the acid container
(on page 262)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 184

Check supply gases for correct Before every series of analyses. Gases and chemicals to be
intake pressure and sufficient provided (on page 116)
volume

Recommendation
Taking out a service contract for full annual maintenance saves time and money. Contact your service
office for details.

Viewing the status of maintenance intervals

Viewing maintenance intervals
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Maintenance intervals" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options >
Maintenance > Intervals.
 In the overview field on the left all maintenance events are displayed, i.e. the corresponding
assignment as well as the percentaged count as a highlighted bar.
 Click the respective event in the overview field. On the right, the "Status" field displays the
number of individual sample measurements performed since the last maintenance. The "Interval"
field indicates how many measurements until maintenance is due.

Defining maintenance intervals in the software

Background
In order to make it easier to observe replacement and maintenance intervals, you can define
"maintenance events" with set intervals in the operating software. Several maintenance events are
already defined by default and need to be adjusted according to the customer's long-term experience.

Defining maintenance intervals

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Maintenance intervals" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options >
Maintenance > Intervals.
 Click New. The fields in the right area are set to their default values.
 Enter the following:
 In the "Event" field enter the maintenance event, e.g. "combustion tube".
 In the "Interval" field specify the number of measurements of individual samples after which
the "combustion tube" has to be serviced.
 In the "Mode assignment" section check the modes for which the maintenance event applies, if
multiple modes can be selected.
 Select the following in the "If becoming due" section:
 Either "Indication only" if you just want to have a message displayed on screen when the
maintenance is due.
 Or "Indication and abort the auto run" if you want to have message displayed on screen and
contonuous analysis to be stopped when maintenance is due.
 Click OK to save your settings.
 The maintenance event is now defined.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 185

Notes regarding further operation

Observe the notes regarding further operation:
 The left area displays the number of measurements since the last maintenance in percent for all
maintenance intervals.
 For the selected event, the "Status" field displays the number of individual sample measurements
performed since the last maintenance.
 If the maximum number of measurements is reached, a message is displayed in the status view
in the "Maintenance" field reminding the user of the maintenance. See Fig. "Status view
message".

Status view message

If the maximum number of measurements is reached for a maintenance event:
 the due maintenance event is displayed in the status view in the "Maintenance" field
 the background of the "Maintenance" field turns red

To be observed after maintenance

If you have performed the due maintenance you must manually reset the "Status" field to zero for the
respective event.

Installing used tubes

Note
When you install an used tube, and if a maintenance event has been defined for this maintenance
work, you must increment the interval counter in the "Maintenance intervals" dialog accordingly. See
Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Preparing and following up maintenance work

Why prepare and follow up maintenance work?
In order to perform maintenance work it is necessary to make certain preparations so as to avoid risks
for the user. This also prevents the instrument from sending an error message and shutting down
automatically. It is also necessary to perform follow-up work after maintenance in order to get the
instrument ready to measure again.

Decision table
The following table helps you with further procedure:
If you are going to perform the following ... then...
maintenance work...
 Removing or installing the absorption tube ... requires special preparation/follow-up work.
 Replacement of the ash crucible/finger This is explained in the specific instructions.
 Replace sealing element
 Removing the reaction tubes from the furnace
 Installing reaction tubes in the furnace
 Removing and installing the drying tube
 Removing the combustion tube connection
 Fill acid container

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 186

Ball valve maintenance ... requires special preparation/follow-up work.

This is explained in the specific instructions.
Maintain multiway valve ... requires special preparation/follow-up work.
This is explained in the specific instructions.
Maintain syringe ... requires special preparation/follow-up work.
This is explained in the specific instructions.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

"Preparing the instrument: Gas pressure"

Proceed as follows:
 Shut off gas supply. Open the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software by selecting
Options > Maintenance > Replace Part.
 Wait for pressure drop without pressing any buttons until the message "Part can now be
replaced." is displayed and the Finish button becomes accessible.
 Pressure has been reduced when the following displays show "0" on screen:
 "MFC" (only vario TOC cube)
 "Flow"
 "Pressure".
 The instrument is now ready for replacement of the part.

Follow-up instrument preparation: Gas pressure / gas-tightness

Proceed as follows:
 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on.
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Conditioning newly installed tubes

Purpose of conditioning
Newly installed tubes must be conditioned:
 to remove moisture from the tube fillings.
 to remove contaminations.

Without conditioning, analysis results would be distorted.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 187

Types of conditioning
There are the following types of conditioning new tubes:
 Flushing the tubes with distilled H2O (alternatively with 0.8% HCl) and high injection volume.
 Baking out tubes to remove moisture and contaminations from the tube fillings.

Flushing tubes
Requirements:
 A new tube has been installed.
 The tube ends are closed
 The analyzer is in "Replace part" status.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Proceed as follows:
 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on..
 Decide:
If the operating software status view displays...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again. Go to the next step.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Only move on to the next step once the leak test is
successful.
 Perform a function test or a blank value determination for instance. Utilize a high injection volume
for flushing. See
 Only complete the function test or the blank value determination when the measuring values are
stable and small. The instrument is then ready to measure again.

Conditioning of the combustion tube

The following tables explains conditioning rules for the various modes:
Mode Conditioning rule
Solids Bake out at working temperature for 30 minutes.
Liquid Heat out for 30 minutes at operating temperature. Flush, if
necessary, with high injection volume (e.g. over night).

Heat out the combustion tube

Requirements:
 A new combustion tube has been installed.
 The analyzer is in "Replace part" status.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Installing and conditioning the reaction tubes" under Warning
notes during operation (on page 24).

Proceed as follows:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 188

 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on..
 Wait the required conditioning time. Refer to the above table "Conditioning rules for combustion
tube".
 Make sure that:
 the "Pressure" display shows 1000mbar on screen.
 the "MFC" display shows 200 ml/min on screen (only vario TOC cube).
 the flow meter "Flow" displays approx. 200 ml/min on screen.
 Decide:
If the operating software status view displays...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See The instrument is only ready to measure when the
leak test is successful.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 189

Performing the calibration

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section provides facts about calibration and also enables you to perform calibration.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 190

Defining standard substances

Background
These operating instructions contain specific rules for the calibration. If you want to use these rules,
you must define the standard substances used there as calibration samples. Of course, you can also
use different substances but then you must develop the calibration rule yourself.

Defined calibration samples are displayed along with their theoretical contents in the sample view.

Required substances
The instrument needs standard substances which represent the sample matrix to be measured.

By means of the dialog opened by Options > Settings > Standards you can define and/or edit the
standard substances.

Defining custom standard substances

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Standard samples" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Standards.
 Click New. The input boxes on the right area are now empty. Enter the data of the standard
sample to be newly defined.
 For the substance, enter...
 ... the name of the substance in the "name" field.
 ... the theoretical element content in percent in the "Conc. [%]" fields (or in ppm in the
"Conc. [ppm]" fields respectively). If you enter 0 for the theoretical element content of a
substance element, the element is ignored in the calculation.
 ... the permissible tolerance for each element in the "Tolerance [%]" fields (usually 5%).
 Click Create. Your new standard sample will now be included in the list in the left area of the
dialog.
 You have now defined the standard substance.
 Click Close to close the dialog.

Viewing list of defined factor, monitor and standard samples

Viewing the list
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Standard samples" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Standards.
 The list box displays all currently defined standards. By checking the requested standard sample
the settings are displayed in the right area of the dialog.

Defining standard substances as calibration samples

Background
These operating instructions contain specific rules for the calibration. If you want to use these rules,
you must define the standard substances used there as calibration samples. Of course, you can also
use different substances but then you must develop the calibration rule yourself.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 191

Defined calibration samples are displayed along with their theoretical contents in the sample view.

Required substances
If you want to perform calibration on the basis of the calibration tables, you must define certain
standard substances depending on the operating mode for which you want to perform calibration.

The following table lists the standard substances required for calibration in the respective operating
mode:
Operating Potassium Sodium Sodium nitrate Ammonium
mode hydrogen carbonate chloride
phthalate
TOC X
TC X X
TIC X
NPOC X
TNb X X
POC X)*

)* Coefficients are transferred (from TOC to POC).

Theoretical element contents of standard substances

The following tables lists the theoretical element contents of the standard substances used in the
calibration tables:
Standard substance Ctheor Ntheor
Potassium hydrogen phthalate 47,1 %
Sodium carbonate 11,33 %
Sodium nitrate 16,47 %
Ammoniun chloride 26,17 %

Defining calibration samples

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Standard samples" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Standards.
 Click New. The input boxes on the right of the dialog are empty and ready for the input of a new
standard.
 For the substance, enter...
 ... the name of the substance in the "name" field.
 ... the theoretical element content in the "Conc. [mg/l]" fields. If you enter 0 for the
theoretical element content of a substance element, the element is ignored in the
calculation.
 ... the permissible tolerance for each element in the "Tolerance [%]" fields (usually 5%).
 Click Close. This closes the dialog and saves your settings.
 Open the "Standard samples display" dialog in the operating software by selecting View >
Standard samples.
 Select the option "Show as calibration sample (theoretical concentration)".
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and saves the settings.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 192

Viewing calibration coefficients

Viewing calibration coefficients
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Calibration coefficients" dialog in the operating software by selecting Calibration >
Coefficients.
 Highlight the name of a coefficient set in the listbox.
 The calibration coefficients of the coefficient set and the limits the calibration is valid within are
displayed.

Optimizing instrument condition for calibration

Note
Note that calibration only makes sense if you have previously checked and optimized the condition of
the instrument.

Why does the condition of the instrument need to be checked and optimized?
The condition of the instrument needs to be checked and optimized in order to avoid...
 ... leaks of the instrument.
 ... old tube fillings from distorting results.
 ... no residues in the instrument.

Checking and optimizing the condition of the instrument

Proceed as follows:
 Check the parameter settings by selecting Options > Settings > Parameters. Correct them if
necessary. See Setting instrument parameters (on page 43).
 Replace all tube fillings.See
 Filling the standard reaction tube (Liquid mode) (on page 246).
 Filling the standard reaction tube (Solid mode) (on page 248).
 Filling, removing and installing drying, absorption and filter tubes (on page 255).
 Check the complete injection unit (multiway valve, injection cannula and syringe). See
 Clean, assemble and install the multiway valve and the injection plug (on page 224).
 Maintain syringe (on page 242).
 Replace the ash finger/ash crucible. See Replacing the ash crucible/finger (on page 205).
 Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test.
 Determine the blank value as a measure of gas-tightness. Perform blank value determination
during calibration measurement.See Types of blank value determination and their settings
(on page 150).
 Perform test measurements so that the instrument is stable when you subsequently perform the
calibration measurement. Measure 5 triple determinations 10 ppm each according to the
standard solution.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 193

Performing the calibration

Target group
Personnel authorized by the customer. Successful calibration is only possible if the user is familiar
with the operating instructions and the analyzer.

Note
Perform the calibration carefully since a correct calibration is a prerequisite for correct measuring
results.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Prepare samples and perform measurement
 Perform calculation
 Optimizing calibration curves and apply calibration

Requirements:
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Read Background knowledge required for calibration (on page 48) and Assessing the
calibration curves (on page 196).
 If you have not already done so, define the following by selecting Options > Settings >
Standards:
 the required calibration substances. See Defining standard substances as calibration
samples (on page 130).
 the required substances for daily factor determination.
 Check and optimize the condition of the instrument. Otherwise it makes no sense to calibrate.
See Optimizing instrument condition for calibration (on page 192).

Phase 1: Prepare samples and perform measurement

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Sample vials" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Proceed as follows:
 Move the empty carousel to zero position. To do so, open the "Set carousel position" dialog in
the operating software by selecting System > Sample Position.
 Select the radio button next to "Reference run" and click OK. The carousel moves to zero
position.
 Prepare the samples. Only fill the sample vials when the carousel has been taken off.
 Prepare conditioning samples and calibration samples. Refer to Calibration tables for the
recommended settings for each mode. See calibration tables (on page 198).
 Insert the filled sample vials on the carousel.
 Put the carousel with the samples onto the instrument.
 Proceed as follows if you do not want to overwrite the existing calibration but would like to add a
new one:
 Open - when the sample memory is empty (after invocation of File > New) - the dialog
"Calibration coefficients" via Math. > Coefficients....

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 194

 Here, create a new coefficients set by typing-in a name into the name box at the left lower
area and followed by clicking Create. After that all coefficients of the new set have the
value 0.
 Click OK to leave the dialog again.
 After input of the sample data (see next step) select the new coefficients set in column
"Coefficients".
 Enter the following sample data in the sample view (text view) on the PC:
 the name of the sample (max. 32 characters):
"Blank" for blank samples,
Daily factor or calibration samples must have the name defined in Options > Settings >
Standards.
 the adequate method,
 the injection volumen in [ml] if it has not been transmitted by the method,
Note: Input of sample data can be performed via the calibration wizard as well. See Calibration
wizard (on page 54).
 Start the analysis process by selecting System > Auto run.
 Observe the measuring results whether they are stable. If not, stop the continuous analysis by
selecting System > Single.
 Save the original values. See Data backup and printing (on page 170).

Phase 2: Perform calculation

Proceed as follows:
 Execute the following command: Math. > Calibration. If sequential blank value determination is
activated a message window opens showing the corresponding information.
 Click Yes to continue. The dialog "Configure calibration" appears where the polynominal degree
and the calibration range can be selected for the corresponding parameter.
 Recommended settings:
 For TOC, TIC, TC: Polynominal degree 1.
 For TNb: Polynominal degree 1 or 2.
 The use of two calibration ranges is required in exceptional cases only.
 Click OK to save your settings and close the dialog.
 The first calibration curve for the corresponding measuring method appears now in the calibration
view.

Phase 3: Optimizing calibration curves and apply calibration

Background information can be found in Assessing the calibration curves (on page 196).

In order to optimize the calibration curve you must exclude samples that deviate significantly from the
curve.

Proceed as follows:
 Zoom in/out the graph by selecting View > Zoom in/out so that you can check the overall curve.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 195

 Click the and buttons to move from sample to sample in the calibration curve and
check the deviation "Diff.". Samples that display excessive deviation must be deleted.

 Select a sample to delete. Then click the "Include/Exclude" button" . The deleted sample is
highlighted red.

 Compare "r" (new value) and "r_old" (old value) of the calibration curve and check whether
deleting has had the desired effect. See Assessing the calibration curves (on page 196).
 If deleting has not had the desired effect, you can undo it. To do so, select the deleted sample

and click the "Include/Exclude" button again. The sample is now included again.
 Once you have excluded all samples with significant deviations from the calibration curve, click

the "Next" button. The calibration curve of the next measuring method is displayed in the
calibration view.

 Once you have optimized the last calibration curve and clicked the "Next" button, the
"Calibration coefficients" dialog is displayed.
 Check the calibration coefficients for each element:
 calibration coefficients "a" to "e"
Note:
For the lower calibration range it is important that the coefficient "a" is as small as possible.
Coefficient "a" corresponds to a calibrated blank value and should be as small as possible.
 as well as the possible working range defined in "Min." and "Max.".
 Decide:
If...
 ... you accept the calibration coefficients: Click OK. The calibration coefficients are applied.
 ... you do not accept the calibration coefficients: Click Cancel. Calibration is aborted.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 196

Assessing the calibration curves

Calibration curve display in the calibration view
After the calibration curves have been computed, the calibration points and the calibration curve are
displayed in the calibration view. The individual calibration points are displayed as circles. The
following picture shows an example of a calibration curve for TIC:

Displayed characteristics
The following table explains the characteristics relating to the calibration curve, as displayed in the
above picture:
Characteristic Description
Zoom Shows the current graph zoom factor.
a...e Coefficients of the current polynomial.
r Quality factor for the degree of fit of the current curve calculation.
 For a polynomial calculation of the first degree, "r" is the correlation
coefficient. The optimum is 1.
 For polynomial calculations of a higher degree, "r" is the sum of error
squares. The optimum is 0.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 197

r_old Quality factor for the degree of fit of the last curve calculation. It is used for
comparison with "r". This allows you, for example, to check whether it makes
sense to delete certain samples.
Proc-SD Process standard deviation: a measure of the degree of distribution of sample
values around the calibration curve.

The following table explains the characteristics relating to the sample, as displayed in the above
picture:
Characteristic Description
Sample No. Shows the analysis number of the sample selected at the cursor.
Area Integral of the selected sample.
slope Slope of the curve at the calibration point of the selected sample.
{Element name}theo Theoretical absolute content of the selected sample
{Element name}act Absolute content of the selected sample, computed with the current curve
Diff. Difference between "theo" and "act", absolute
Diff. Difference between "theo" and "act", relative

Aids for assessing the calibration curve

The following aids are available for assessing the calibration curve:
 Via View > Zoom in / Zoom out you can display the graph so that you can visually check the
curve.
 You can click on the circle to select any sample. This displays the characteristics of the sample.

 You can also select a sample using the buttons and . This displays the
characteristics of the sample.

Assessing the calibration curve

The following are used to assess the calibration curve:
 Process standard deviation "Proc-SD"
 Quality factor "r"
 Coefficient "a", that corresponds to a calibrated blank value.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 198

Calibration tables
Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section contains specific rules for calibration in the respective operating mode. If you want to use
these rules, you must define the standard substances used there as calibration samples. Of course,
you can also use different substances but then you must develop the calibration rule yourself.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 199

Calibration table direct method (TC, NPOC)

Calibration table direct method
The following presents a suggestion for NPOC calibration with a 10 ppm standard. The user can
customize settings to the specific analytical task.
Groups Sample type Injection volume Absolute Name Method
[ml] content
3 Conditioning 10 ppm NPOC - RunIn NPOC precise
Standard 0.2 ml
5 Blank value distilled H2O 0.6 - Blank NPOC precise
ml
6 Calibration 10 ppm NPOC 10 ppm NPOC std-npoc 10 ppm NPOC precise
Standard 0.1-0.6 Standard
ml corresponds to:
0.1 ml -> 1 µg
0.2 ml -> 2 µg
0.3 ml -> 3 µg
0.4 ml -> 4 µg
0.5 ml -> 5 µg
0.6 ml -> 6 µg

If smaller concentrations shall be calibrated, it is recommended to use ultra pure water instead of 10
ppm NPOC standard for conditioning.

Kalibration table difference method (TIC/TC)

Calibration table difference method
The following presents a suggestion for TIC/TC calibration with a 2-fold standard, 10 ppm TOC, 10
ppm TIC. The user can customize settings to the specific analytical task.
Groups Sample type Injection Absolute content Name Method
volume [ml]
3 Conditioning TIC/TC-Standar - RunIn TIC / TC
d 0.2 ml
5 Blank value distilled H2O 0.6 - Blank TIC / TC
ml
6 Calibration TIC/TC-Standar 10 ppm TIC/TC std-tic/tc 10 ppm TIC / TC
d 0.1-0.6 ml standard corresponds
to:
0.1 ml -> 1 µg / 2 µg
0.2 ml -> 2 µg / 4 µg
0.3 ml -> 3 µg / 6 µg
0.4 ml -> 4 µg / 8 µg
0.5 ml -> 5 µg / 10 µg
0.6 ml -> 6 µg / 12 µg

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 200

Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to remove, clean and install the carousel.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 201

Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel (liquid mode)

Purpose of cleaning
Dust accumulations or damaged sample packings may soil the carousel in the course of time.
Cleaning the carousel prevents these foreign substances from entering the apparatus when you
introduce the sample and cause errors.

Requirements
Keep the following ready:
 a soft cloth.
 some water with a mild laboratory cleaner.

Cleaning the carousel

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Damaged base panel" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Proceed as follows:
 Perform a reference run via System > Sample position in order to move the carousel to the
correct position. If necessary, move the sample arm up via System > Arm up.
 Loosen both screws and lift the carousel toward the top. Also remove the cover plate.

 Clean the plastic top section and ring with a soft cloth and some water with a mild laboratory
cleaner.
 Allow the carousel to dry. If necessary, remove the last traces of moisture with warm air.
 Put the cover plate back onto the instrument:
 Put the carousel back into the recess and tighten both screws.
 The analyzer performs the automatic carousel recognition. Wait until it is completely processed.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 202

Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel (solids mode)

Purpose of cleaning
Dust accumulations or damaged sample packings may soil the carousel in the course of time.
Cleaning the carousel prevents these foreign substances from entering the apparatus when you
introduce the sample and cause errors.

Requirements:
Keep the following ready:
 a soft cloth or bottle brush.
 some water with a mild laboratory cleaner.

Cleaning the carousel

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Damaged base panel" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Proceed as follows:
 Ensure that all samples have been removed from the carousel.
 Perform a reference run in order to move the carousel to the correct position.
 Press both handles down and lift the carousel with the protruding handles toward the top.
Also remove the cover plate when working with the combustion tube.

 Dismantle the carousel into its two component parts:

 the metal ring and
 the plastic top section with the ring holder magnets.
Remove the four hexagon head screws (1) with a wrench and lift off the ring at the pilots.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 203

 Clean the plastic top section and ring with

 a soft cloth or bottle brush and
 some water with a mild laboratory cleaner.
 Allow the carousel to dry. If necessary, remove the last traces of moisture with warm air.
 Replace the ring on the plastic top section and use a wrench to turn the hexagon head screws so
that the tips of the screws prevent you from lifting off the ring (tighten the screws only slightly).
The metal ring will be held with the plastic top section by means of a magnet.
 Move the plastic section until the reference hole (bore in the plastic section without number
indicated by a white ring) matches the bore in the metal ring.

 Insert the carousel into the holder and observe that the ejector openings of the ring must be
above the ball valve.
 Subsequently, perform a reference run.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 204

Replacement of the ash crucible/finger

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to replace the ash crucible and/or the ash finger.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 205

Replacement of the ash crucible/finger

Why replace the ash crucible/finger?
This is necessary because combustion residues in the ash crucible/finger can distort readings.

Types of ash crucibles

The following table lists the various types of ash crucibles and their usage:
Type of ash crucible Usage
Ash crucible with bottom  Ash crucible for liquid samples
 Protection of the catalyst
Protection tube slotted on the side Protection of the combustion tube

Types of ash finger

The following table lists the various types of ash fingers and their usage:
Type of ash finger Usage
Ash crucible, open at bottom and top and  Usually employed ash finger for solid samples.
slotted on the side  Protection of the catalyst

Distinction aid ash crucible / ash finger

The following table informs under which circumstances the instrument is equipped with an ash
crucible or an ash finger:
If... Then...
... the system is operated with standard reaction ... use ash crucibles and proceed with Removing
tubes in the liquid mode: the ash crucible and/or Installing the ash crucible.
... the system is operated with special reaction ... use ash fingers and proceed with Removing the
tubes in the solids mode ash finger and/or Installing the ash finger.

Removing the ash crucible (liquid mode)

Note
The following section describes the first part of replacing the ash crucible. The topic is continued in
Installing the ash crucible (liquid mode) (on page 208).

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparing the instrument, gas pressure
 Filling a new ash crucible
 Removing the ash crucible

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Replacing the ash crucible/finger" under Warning notes
during operation (on page 24).

Requirements:
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 206

 Keep a tube rack ready to hold hot components.

 Keep the catcher, the plug tool and a screwdriver ready.

Phase 1: Preparing the instrument, gas pressure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Phase 2: Filling the new ash crucible

Proceed as follows:
 Place the ash crucible on a level surface.
 Compress quartz wool with the plug tool to a 10 mm strong bottom in the ash crucible.

Phase 3: Removing the ash crucible

Proceed as follows:
 Move the sample arm up via System > Arm up.
 Also remove the cover plate.
 Remove the carousel and open the front door.

 Loosen the locking screw from the multiway valve as well as the gas supply to the combustion
tube. Loosen the plug with multiway valve out of the combustion tube with careful jiggling
motions. Pull the injection unit out from the tube. Put the plug and the multiway valve into the
provided park position.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 207

 Proceed with replacing the ash crucible. Caution: Temperature of ash crucible and sheath tube is
approx. 800 °C! Use heat proof gloves for protection. Insert the tongs from the top into the
combustion tube and pull out the sheath tube. Place the sheath tube on a non-combustible
surface.

 After clamping the tongs in the ash crucible, pull the ash crucible slowly upwards. If the ash
crucible has been almost completely removed from the combustion tube, grip it by pliers or
strong tweezers. Place the ash crucible into the vent or else on a heat-resistant surface until it
has completely cooled down.
 If there are any quartz chips on the bottom of the ash crucible, top up some quartz chips in the
combustion tube.

Furnace area in detail

The following picture shows the furnace area in detail:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 208

Legend:
1 Multiway valve
2 Combustion tube
3 Park position multiway valve

Installing the ash crucible (lliquid mode)

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Installing a new ash crucible
 Preparing the Instrument for measurements

Requirements:
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Keep the catcher, the plug tool and a screwdriver ready.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Replacing the ash crucible/finger" under Warning notes
during operation (on page 24).

Step 1: Installing the new ash crucible

Proceed as follows:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 209

 Grasp the new ash crucible with the catcher und insert it carefully and slowly into the combustion
tube. If the ash crucible has a plugged bottom it must not be pushed to the top.

 Check whether the ash crucible is placed in the combustion tube at the proper position. If
necessary, top up with quartz chips.
 Grip the protection tube with the tongs and place it carefully on the ash crucible in the
combustion tube.
 Now check the plug and the multiway valve for cleanliness and clean the injection unit if
necessary. See Clean, assemble and install the multiway valve and the injection plug (on
page 224).
 Proceed with replacing the ash crucible: Put the plug with the multiway valve into the combustion
tube, where there is a guiding provided for the multiway valve which has to snap into the tappet
of the motor.

Furnace area in detail

The following picture shows the furnace area in detail:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 210

Legend:
1 Multiway valve
2 Combustion tube
3 Park position multiway valve

Phase 1: Installing the new ash crucible, continued

Proceed as follows:
 Check the correct position of the plug in the multiway valve.
 Tighten the multiway valve with both lock screws.
 Connect the gas supply to the combustion tube.
 Put the cover plate back onto the instrument: Put the carousel on the instrument and tighten it.

The analyzer performs the automatic carousel recognition. Wait until it is completely processed.
 Close the front door.
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Phase 2: Instrument must be ready to measure

 After completing all maintenance work, put the instrument back into a state ready for
measurement.
 Leave the dialog "Replace parts" by clicking "Finish".

To be observed after maintenance

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 211

If you have performed maintenance work that has a defined maintenance interval, you must manually
reset the "Status" field to zero on the "Maintenance intervals" dialog (accessible via Options >
Maintenance > Intervals. See Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Phase 3: Empty the old ash crucible

If the ash crucible is not damaged it may be cleaned and used again.

Proceed as follows:
 Empty the cooled down ash crucible or scratch it out by means of a screwdriver.
 Dispose of the chemicals according to the relevant disposal categories.

Remove the ash finger (solids mode)

Note
The following section describes the first part of replacing the ash finger. The topic is continued in
"Installing the ash finger". Please observe that this ash finger is only used for instruments equipped
with reaction tubes in the solids mode.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparing the instrument, gas pressure
 Filling a new ash finger
 Removing the ash finger

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Replacing the ash crucible/finger" under Warning notes
during operation (on page 24).

Requirements:
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Remove all samples from the carousel.
 Keep a tube rack ready to hold hot components.
 Keep a catcher ready

Phase 1: Preparing the instrument, gas pressure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

To prepare the instrument for maintenance work follow the instructions in Preparing and following
up maintenance work (on page 185).

Furnace area
The following picture shows the furnace area of the analyzer.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 212

Legend:
1 Ball valve
2 Locking screws
3 Carrier gas supply

Phase 2: Filling the new ash crucible

Proceed as follows:
 Place the ash finger in the tube rack.
 In the ash finger produce a 10 mm thick bottom by densifying Al 2O3 wool using the plug tool.
 If your ash finger is virgin, once more plug the bottom extra solid. The Al 2O3 wool adheres poorly
on the polished quartz wall of a new ash finger.

Phase 3: Removing the ash finger

Proceed as follows:
 Also remove the cover plate. Remove the carousel and open the front door.

 Loosen the locking screw from the ball valve as well as the gas supply to the combustion tube.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 213

 Pull the ball valve out of the combustion tube with careful jiggling motions.

Pull it out from the tube.

 Place the ball valve on the tube rack.
 Insert the tongs into the combustion tube. After clamping the crucible tongs in the protection tube,
pull it out. Then, in the same manner, pull out the ash finger from the combustion tube.

 Place both the ash finger and the protection tube in the tube rack into the vent or on a
heat-resistant surface until they have completely cooled down. Protect the hot parts from
unauthorized access.
 If there are any quartz chips on the bottom of the ash finger, top up some quartz chips in the
combustion tube.

Installing the ash finger (solids mode)

Note
The following section is a continuation of "Removing the ash finger". All steps described in "Removing
the ash finger" must already have been performed.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Installing the ash finger

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 214

 Follow-up instrument preparation: Gas pressure / gas-tightness

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Replacing the ash crucible/finger" under Warning notes
during operation (on page 24).

Requirements
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Remove all samples from the carousel.
 The instrument must be in "Replace part" status. See
 Keep a catcher ready.
 Keep a filled ash finger ready.

Phase 1: Installing the ash finger

Proceed as follows:
 Clean the new ash finger of fingerprints before installing. Use acetone, for example, for cleaning.
 Insert the new ash finger with the crucible tongs into the combustion tube.

 Subsequently, put the protection tube with the crucible tongs on the ash finger in the combustion
tube.
 Put the ball valve onto the combustion tube.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 215

Ensure that the tappet of the ball valve engages to the tappet of the motor.
 Tighten the ball valve with the locking screws and fasten the carrier gas supply lines at the ball
valve by means of the ground-in clamp.

Furnace area in detail

The following picture shows the furnace area in detail:

Legend:
1 Ball valve
2 Locking screws
3 Carrier gas supply

Phase 1: Installing the ash finger, continued

Proceed as follows:
 Put the cover plate back onto the instrument: Observe the throw-in hole position of the carousel.

Put the carousel onto the instrument. Observe the throw-in hole position of the carousel.
 Close the front door.
 Decide:
If...

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 216

 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Phase 2: Follow-up work: gas pressure/ tightness

Proceed as follows:
 After completing all maintenance work, put the instrument back into a state ready for
measurement.
 Leave the dialog "Replace parts" by clicking "Finish".

To be observed after maintenance

If you have performed maintenance work that has a defined maintenance interval, you must manually
reset the "Status" field to zero on the "Maintenance intervals" dialog (accessible via Options >
Maintenance > Intervals. See Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 217

Replacing sealing elements

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar.

Purpose
Replacing sealing elements prevents leaks. As a result of chemical corrosion, mechanical and
thermal stress, sealing elements in various components of the instrument can become leaky over
time.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 218

When to replace sealing elements

What sealing elements are used?
The following sealing elements are used:
 Half shells
 O-rings
 Quad rings
 Ferrules

When to replace sealing elements

The following table gives an overview of what instrument components contain which sealing elements
and when to replace these sealing elements:
Instrument component What to replace To be replaced when...
Ball valve / multiway valve Half shells ... the ball valve/the multiway valve is serviced
and the half shells exhibit grooves.
O-rings  ... the ball valve/multiway valve is serviced
and
 ... the o-rings exhibit cracks or other
damage or
 ... the o-rings no longer protrude round out
of the grooves.
Condenser O-rings ... you cannot feel any elastic resistance when
you press in the o-rings when installing the
quartz glass bridge.
Injection cannula / plug Ferrules ... ferrules exhibit cracks or other damage.
Carrier gas supply O-rings  ... the ball valve/multiway valve is serviced
and
Combustion tube
 ... the o-rings exhibit cracks or other
damage or
 ... the o-rings no longer protrude round out
of the grooves.

Visual o-ring/quad ring check

You can tell when o-rings or quad rings need to be replaced if they no longer protrude round out of
the grooves of the respective component. The following picture shows o-rings in a closing plug as an
example:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 219

Removing sealing elements from grooves

Note
Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Cutting sealing elements apart/out (o-rings, quad rings, half shells, ferrules).
When cutting sealing elements apart/out with a knife you may damage sealing
surfaces.
Never remove sealing elements with a knife but rather with tweezers.

Removing sealing elements

Proceed as follows:
 Grasp the sealing element (o-ring, quad ring, half shell, ferrule) between your thumb and
forefinger.
 Push the sealing element out to the side so that it forms a loop.

 Grasp the loop with a pair of tweezers and pull the sealing element off.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 220

Maintain multiway valve and injection plug

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to maintain the manifild valve and the injection plug.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 221

Remove and dismantle the multiway valve and the injection plug
Note
The following section describes the first part of "Maintain multiway valve and injection plug".

Purpose of maintenance
The maintenance of the manifild valve and the injection plug is meant to avoid leaks. Foreign particles
have to be removed. If necessary, half shells and o-rings must also be replaced.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Allow instrument to cool down and disconnect from the mains
 Remove multiway valve and injection plug
 Dismantle multiway valve and injection plug

Requirements:
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Keep the following tools ready:
 pliers
 Syringe
 Keep acetone ready to clean components.

Phase 1: Allow instrument to cool down and disconnect from the mains

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Hot instrument parts" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Phase 2: Remove multiway valve and injection plug

Proceed as follows:
 Remove the carousel.

 Open the front door and remove the cover plate from the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 222

 Loosen the locking screws at the multiway valve and the ground-in clamps of the carrier gas line
to the combustion tube.

 Pull the injection unit out of the combustion tube with careful jiggeling motions.

Hold the combustion tube with one hand and pull slowly at the plasic plug.
 Loosen the hose pipes at the multiway valve after you have pulled the injection unit out from the
furnace.

Furnace area
The following picture shows the furnace area of the analyzer.

Legend:
1 Locking screws
2 Multiway valve
3 Injection plug
4 Ground-in clamp/carrier gas supply
5 Combustion tube
6 Park position multiway valve

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 223

Step 3: Dismantling the injection plug valve

Please observe the following instructions:
Caution Cutting sealing elements apart/out (o-rings, quad rings, half shells, ferrules).
When cutting sealing elements apart/out with a knife you may damage sealing
surfaces.
Never remove sealing elements with a knife but rather with tweezers.
Caution Dismantling the multiway valve may lead to irreparable damages !!!

Proceed as follows:
 Loosen the injection plug from the multiway valve by a counter clockwise rotation.

 Carefully pull the injection cannula out of the injection plug toward the top and loosen the sealing.

Caution: During loosening of the sealing the injection cannula may break! Turn out the sealing
with a slight pull!
 Now the injection unit can be maintained.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 224

Clean, assemble and install the multiway valve and the injection plug.
Note
The following section is a continuation of "Removing and dismantling the multiway valve and the
injection plug".

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Cleaning the injection plug and the injection cannula
 Cleaning the multiway valve
 Assembling the multiway valve and the injection plug
 Installing multiway valve and injection plug
 Preparing the Instrument for measurements

Requirements
 Keep a plastic syringe ready.
 Keep rubbing water to clean components.
 The multiway valve and the injection plug had to be removed.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Hot instrument parts" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Disassamble multiway valve with holder

The following picture shows the details of the multiway valve:

Legend:
1 Multiway valve
2 Injection cannula with sealing
3 Plastic ring
4 Injection plug

Step 1:Cleaning the injection plug and the injection cannula

Proceed as follows:
 Remove the sealing elements from injection cannula and injection plug.
 Clean both plugs and the injection cannula with water.
 Clean light soiling with a cloth, strong soiling with a fine abrasive paper.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 225

Step 2: Cleaning the multiway valve

Proceed as follows:
 Take the provided syringe (filled with water) and fasten it in position 13 of the multiway valve.

 Turn tappet at the back side of the multiway valve by a quarter rotation. Thoroghly flush this
position with distilled water. Perfom this for each possible position of the multiway valve.

Step 3: Assemble multiway valve and injection plug

Proceed as follows:
 Check all the sealings and o-rings for their capability.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 226

 Put the sealilng onto the injection cannula. Put the plastic ring onto the injection plug. Insert the
injection cannula into the injection plug.

Caution: During assembly the injection cannula may break!

 Screw the plug with injection cannula onto the multiway valve. The carrier gas line connection
shall be directed towards the front.
 Connect the tube connections. The preset position is marked on the mounting plate. It is
adjustable by turning the plastic ring.

Step 4: Install multiway valve and injection plug

Caution: Improper installation may break the injection cannula.

Proceed as follows:
 Insert the manifold valve and the injection unit into the combustion tube.
 Put the the multiway valve and the injection plug into the combustion tube, where there is a
guiding provided for the multiway valve which has to snap into the tappet of the motor.

 Tighten the injection unit with the locking screws.

 Connect the ground-in ball-and-socket joints that lead to the injection unit (carrier gas supply).
 Decide:
If...

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 227

 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.
 Mount the carousel and the cover plate again. The analyzer performs the automatic carousel
recognition. Wait until it is completely processed.

 Close the front door.

Phase 5: Instrument must be ready to measure

Proceed as follows:
 After completing all maintenance work, put the instrument back into a state ready for
measurement.
 Leave the dialog "Replace parts" by clicking "Finish".

To be observed after maintenance

If you have performed maintenance work that has a defined maintenance interval, you must manually
reset the "Status" field to zero on the "Maintenance intervals" dialog (accessible via Options >
Maintenance > Intervals. See Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 228

Maintaining the ball valve (solids mode)

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to maintain the ball valve.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 229

Removing and dismantling the ball valve

Note
The following section describes the first part of "Ball valve maintenance". The topic is continued in
Cleaning, assembling and installing the ball valve (on page 232).

Purpose of maintenance
Maintenance of the ball valve serves to avoid ball valve leaks. For this purpose, it is necessary to
remove particles such as dust or sample abrasion that sticks between the ball and the Teflon half
shells. If necessary, half shells and o-rings must also be replaced.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparing the instrument: Gas pressure
 Removing the ball valve
 Dismantling the ball valve

Requirements:
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Remove all samples from the carousel.
 Keep acetone ready to clean components.
 Keep the following tools ready:
 Knock-out
 Hook wrench
 Phillips screwdriver / Allen wrench 3 mm
 8 mm open jaw wrench

Phase 1: Allow instrument to cool down and disconnect from the mains

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Hot instrument parts" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

To prepare the instrument for maintenance work follow the instructions in "Preparing the instrument:
Gas pressure" in Preparing and following up maintenance work (on page 185).

Furnace area
The following picture shows the furnace area of the analyzer.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 230

Legend:
1 Ball valve
2 Locking screws
3 Ground-in clamp and carrier gas
supply

Step 2: Removing the ball valve

Proceed as follows:
 Open the front door.
 Remove the carousel and the cover plate.

 Loosen the locking screws of the ball valve.

 Remove the ground-in clamp at the ball valve and remove the carrier gas supply.
 Pull the ball valve out of the combustion tube with careful jiggling motions. Pull it out from the
tube.

Dismantled ball valve

The following picture shows the disassembled ball valve:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 231

Legend:
1 Wheel flange of the half shells
2 O-ring
3 Top and bottom half shell
4 Ball with blind hole
5 Recess
6 Screws
7 Drive bearing
8 Holder plate
9 O-ring
10 Carrier gas supply line

Phase 3: Dismantling the ball valve

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Cutting sealing elements apart/out (o-rings, quad rings, half shells, ferrules).
When cutting sealing elements apart/out with a knife you may damage sealing
surfaces.
Never remove sealing elements with a knife but rather with tweezers.

Proceed as follows:
 Unscrew and remove the wheel flange of the half shells using the hook wrench.

 Unscrew the Phillips screws of the holder plate and remove the holder plate.

 Remove the drive bearing.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 232

 Remove the ball and top half shell.

 Remove the bottom half shell. To do so, rotate the ball valve casing and knock it on a table until
the half shell drops out.

Cleaning, assembling and installing the ball valve.

Note
The following section is a continuation of "Removing and dismantling the ball valve". All steps
described there must already have been performed.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Cleaning the half shells and ball
 Assembling the ball valve
 Mounting the ball balve
 Preparing the Instrument for measurements

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 233

Requirements
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Keep the following tools ready:
 Hook wrench
 Phillips screwdriver
 8 mm open jaw wrench.
 Keep acetone ready to clean components.
 The ball valve must have been removed.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Hot instrument parts" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

To prepare the instrument for maintenance work follow the instructions in "Preparing the instrument:
Gas pressure" in Preparing and following up maintenance work (on page 185).

Dismantled ball valve

The following picture shows the disassembled ball valve:

Legend:
1 Wheel flange of the half shells
2 O-ring
3 Top and bottom half shell
4 Ball with blind hole
5 Recess
6 Screws
7 Drive bearing
8 Holder plate
9 O-ring
10 Carrier gas supply line

Phase 1: Cleaning the half shells and ball

Proceed as follows:
 Clean the half shells (3) and the ball (4) with acetone.
 Check the half shells (3) for grooves. If there are any grooves, replace the half shells.
 Check the ball (4) for grooves. If there are any grooves, replace the ball.

Phase 2: Assembling the ball valve

Proceed as follows:
 Insert the bottom half shell (3) and observe the following
 the fit of the o-ring (2)
 the recess for the drive bearing (5).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 234

 Insert the ball (4) with the blind hole facing down and observe the position of the recess for the
drive bearing (5).

 Insert the drive bearing (7). Observe the following

 the fit of the o-ring (9)
 and that the cylinder pin snaps into the blind hole bore of the ball.

 Insert the top half shell (3) and observe the recess for the drive bearing (5).
 Screw the holder plate (8) onto the ball valve.
 Insert the wheel flange of the half shells (1) and tighten it gently by hand.
 Move the ball valve to its basic position with the blind hole facing down.

Step 3: Installing the ball valve

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Ball valve set too tight
Setting the ball valve too tight damages the mechanical drive system. If the bar in
the "Ball valve setting" dialog is red, loosen the wheel flange with a hook wrench
until the bar turns green.

Proceed as follows:
 Insert the ball valve into the combustion tube.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 235

 2 Position the ball valve in the combustion tube and ensure that the axis of the motor shaft
engages in the motor tappet.

 Tighten the ball valve with the locking screws.

 Close the ground-in ball-and-socket joints of the tubes leading to the ball valve.
 Mount the carousel and the cover plate again.

 Close the front door.

 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Phase 5: Instrument must be ready to measure

Proceed as follows:
 After completing all maintenance work, put the instrument back into a state ready for
measurement.
 Leave the dialog "Replace parts" by clicking "Finish".

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 236

To be observed after maintenance

If you have performed maintenance work that has a defined maintenance interval, you must manually
reset the "Status" field to zero on the "Maintenance intervals" dialog (accessible via Options >
Maintenance > Intervals. See Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 237

Removing, cleaning and installing the condenser

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to remove, clean and install the condenser.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 238

Removing the condenser

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparing the instrument: Gas pressure
 Removing the condenser

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Installing/removing the condenser" under Warning notes
during operation (on page 24).

Phase 1: Preparing the instrument, gas pressure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

To prepare the instrument for maintenance work follow the instructions in Preparing and following
up maintenance work (on page 185).

Phase 2: Removing the condenser

Proceed as follows:
 Open the front door.
 Loosen the ground-in clamp of the combustion tube connection at the lower end.
 Open the left side wall.
 Remove the fan.
 Loosen the screw cap at the upper and lower end of the condenser.
 Carefully pull the condenser out of the holding clamps.

View installed condenser

The following pictures show the position of the condenser:

Legend:
1 Top protection cap
2 Condenser
3 Fan
4 Holding clamp
5 Bottom screw cap

View condenser, detail

The following pictures show the condenser in detail:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 239

Phase 2: Removing the condenser, continued

Proceed as follows:
 Place the condenser on a non-combustible surface. Protect the hot quartz glass bridge from
unauthorized access.

Cleaning and installing the condenser

What contaminations are possible?
The following contaminations at the conser are possible:
 Salt deposits
 Sludge or particle deposits

When to clean the condenser

The condenser has to be checked for contaminations after each tube exchange and with heavily
loaded samples and cleaned, if necessary. In case of blockings, the condenser has to be cleaned

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Cleaning the condenser
 Re-installing the condenser
 Follow-up instrument preparation: Gas pressure / gas-tightness
 Performing the necessary follow-up work

Requirements:
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Remove the condenser.
 Allow the condenser to cool down.
 Keep the following ready:
 Detergent
 Distilled water

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Installing/removing the condenser" under Warning notes
during operation (on page 24).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 240

Phase 1: Cleaning the condenser

Proceed as follows:
 Remove the o-rings from the ground-in connection of the quartz condenser. Check whether the
o-rings need to be replaced. See Replacing sealing elements (on page 217).
 Clean the condenser. Place it
 either in commercial laboratory rinsing agent in an ultrasonic bath for 20 minutes.
 or in a commercial laboratory rinsing agent overnight.
 Then rinse the condenser thoroughly with distilled water.
 Clean the condenser.
 Insert the o-rings in the ground-in connections. Use new o-rings if necessary.

Phase 2: Re-installing the condenser

Before starting work, the following requirement must be met:
 The instrument must be in "Replace part" status.

Proceed as follows:
 Carefully push the condenser through the provided opening and jam it in the holding clamps.
Note: When you close a ground-in ball-and-socket joint, you must be able to feel an elastic
resistance when you press-in the o-ring, otherwise you must replace the o-ring.

 Tighten the screw caps at the upper and lower end of condenser.
 Fasten the fan in the provided guiding.
 Connect the ground-in clamps to the lower end of the combustion tube.
Note: When you close a ground-in ball-and-socket joint, you must be able to feel an elastic
resistance when you press-in the o-ring, otherwise you must replace the o-ring.
 Close the front and the side door (left).

Phase 3: Follow-up work, gas pressure/ tightness

 After completing all maintenance work, put the instrument back into a state ready for
measurement.
 Leave the dialog "Replace parts" by clicking "Finish".

Phase 4: Performing the necessary follow-up work

Once you have reinstalled the condenser, you must perform the following work:
 Perform a leak test, siehe Performing a leak test. Only if the instrument is leak free, the
measurement can be started.
 Perform blank value determinations as a test. See Determining blank values (on page 150).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 241

 Only stop the measurements once you have reached normal blank values again.

To be observed after maintenance

If you have performed maintenance work that has a defined maintenance interval, you must manually
reset the "Status" field to zero on the "Maintenance intervals" dialog (accessible via Options >
Maintenance > Intervals. See Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 242

Maintain syringe
Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to maintain the syringe.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 243

Maintain syringe
When does the syringe have to be maintained?
The syringe has to be maintained after heavily loaded samples since they are in direct contact with
the syringe. Therefore, perform this maintenance work when starting the measurement slightly loaded
samples after having measured heavily loaded samples

General syringe matters

The syringe serves for dosing the sample into the furnace and for flushing the measuring system. The
syringe has permanent contact with the sample and therefore needs regular maintenance.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Hot instrument parts" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Preparing the instrument:

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Remove syringe
 Clean syringe
 Installing the syringe
 Necessary follow-up work

Syringe unit installed

The following picture shows the front of the syringe unit:

Legend:
1 Sampling hose
2 Fastening screw
3 Fastening rail

Step 1: Removing the syringe

Proceed as follows:
 Move the syringe to the original postion (top).
 Loosen the four fastening screws and both fastening rails.
 Loosen the sampling hose.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 244

 Carefully pull the syringe out of the syringe guiding.

Step 2: Cleaning the syringe

Proceed as follows:
 Disassemble the syringe into its components. Pull out the piston from the cylinder.

 Thoroughly flush the syringe parts with distilled water.

 Dry the syringe parts.
 Assemble the syringe.

Step 3: Installing the syringe

Proceed as follows:
 Insert the syringe in the provided guidings.
 Screw the sampling tube onto the syringe.
 Fasten the syringe with both fastening rails and with the four fastening screws.
 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on.
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Phase 4: Performing the necessary follow-up work

Proceed as follows:
 Perform blank value determinations as a test. See Determining blank values (on page 150).
 Only stop the measurements once you have reached normal blank values again.

To be observed after maintenance

If you have performed maintenance work that has a defined maintenance interval, you must manually
reset the "Status" field to zero on the "Maintenance intervals" dialog (accessible via Options >
Maintenance > Intervals. See Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 245

Emptying and filling reaction tubes

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to empty and refill reaction tubes.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 246

Empty standard reaction tube, liquid mode

Requirements
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 The reaction tube has been removed from the furnace.
 The reaction tube has been cooled down.
 Keep a tube rack ready.
 Keep a tongs ready.
 Keep a screwdriver ready.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Emptying the reaction tubes" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Emptying the combustion tube

Proceed as follows:
 Remove the ash crucible and the protection tube with the tongs.
 Empty the quartz chips above the combustion tube.
 Empty the catalyst balls out of the combustion tube.
 Empty the quartz chips below the combustion tube.
 Remove the quartz wool out of the combustion tube.
 Check whether the tube is soiled or damaged. Remove the soiling with a suitable solvent. In case
of damages on its glass wall replace the combustion tube.
 Dispose of the chemicals according to the relevant disposal categories.

Filling the standard reaction tube (Liquid mode)

Note
Note the following rules:
 Observe the filling heights indicated as exactly as possible.
 Carbon blank values of the new catalyst may lead to a drift. It is recommended to flush the
catalyst with a high injection volume prior to the measurements (e.g. over night).

Combustion tube (Liquid mode)

The following picture shows the fillings and filling heights of the combustion tube:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 247

Legend:
1 Sheath tube
2 Ash crucible
3 Quartz chips, coarse (15 mm)
4 Quartz wool (5 mm)
5 Pt catalyst (25 mm)
6 Quartz wool (5 mm)
7 Quartz chips, coarse (85 mm)
8 Quartz wool (5 mm)

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Filling reaction tubes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Filling the combustion tube

Proceed as follows:
 Insert a layer of quartz wool (8).
 Fill in the quartz splinters (7).
 Insert a layer of quartz wool (6) and plug it in very tight.
 Fill in Pt catalyst (5).
 Insert a layer of quartz wool (4) and plug it in very tight.
 Fill in the quartz chips (3).
 Insert the ash crucible (2) and, if necessary, the protection tube (1).

Notes regarding operation:

Observe the following notes regarding further operation:
 Operating temperature: 850 °C. Application related deviations are possible.
 In liquid mode, newly filled combustion tubes have to be conditioned before you can perform
measurements. Cf. Conditioning newly installed tubes (on page 186).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 248

Empty standard reaction tubes (Solid mode)

Requirements
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 The reaction tube has been removed from the furnace.
 The reaction tube has been cooled down.
 Keep a tube rack ready.
 Keep a tongs ready.

Keep a screwdriver ready.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Emptying the reaction tubes" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Emptying the combustion tube

Proceed as follows:
 Remove the ash finger and the protection tube with the tongs.
 Empty the catalyst balls out of the combustion tube.
 Empty the quartz chips below the combustion tube.
 Check whether crusts are visible in the tube. Remove the crust with a suitable solvent.
 Dispose of the chemicals according to the relevant disposal categories.

Filling the standard reaction tube (Solid mode)

Note
Note the following rules:
 Observe the filling heights indicated as exactly as possible.

Combustion tube (Solids mode)

The following picture shows the fillings and filling heights of the combustion tube:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 249

Legend:
1 Sheath tube
2 Ash finger
3 Al2O3 wool (ash finger bottom)
4 Corundum balls or quartz wool (5 mm)
5 Copper oxide catalyst (85 mm)
6 Corundum balls or quartz wool (5 mm)
7 Quartz chips, coarse (40 mm)
8 Quartz wool (5 mm)

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Filling reaction tubes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Filling the combustion tube

Proceed as follows:
 Insert a layer of quartz wool.
 Fill in the quartz chips (7) and above it one layer of quartz wool (6).
 Insert the copper oxide (5).
 Insert a layer of quartz wool (4).
 Insert the ash finger (2). This has to be closed at the bottom with a layer of Al 2O3.
 Insert the sheath tube (1).

Notes regarding operation:

Observe the following note regarding further operation:
 Operating temperature: 950 °C, max. 980 °C.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 250

Removing/installing and conditioning the reaction tubes

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to remove and install reaction tubes and to condition them properly.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 251

Removing the standard reaction tube from the furnace

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparing the instrument: Reduce gas pressure
 Removing the reaction tube

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Removing reaction tubes" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Requirements
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 Remove all samples from the carousel.
 Keep a tube rack ready to hold hot components.

Phase 1, Preparing the instrument: Gas pressure

In order to be able to prepare the instrument for maintenance works follow the instructions

"Preparing the instrument: Gas pressure" in Preparing and following up maintenance work (on
page 185).

Phase 2: Removing the reaction tube

Proceed as follows:
 Open the front door. Remove the carousel and the cover plate.

 Remove the carrier gas supply to the combustion tube connection and loosen the ground-in
clamps at the lower end of the combustion tube.
 Loosen the fastening of the multiway valve or the ball valve.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 252

 Loosen the multiway valve with injection plug / ball valve out of the combustion tube with careful
jiggling motions. Pull it out of the tube toward the top and place it into the provided park position.

 Pull the combustion tube out of the furnace and place it into the tube retainer.

Installing standard reaction tubes in the furnace and conditioning

Note
The following section is a continuation of Removing the reaction tube from the furnace (on page
251). All steps described there must already have been performed.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Installing the reaction tube
 Conditioning reaction tube, getting the instrument ready to measure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Installing and conditioning the reaction tubes" under Warning
notes during operation (on page 24).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 253

Requirements
Before starting work, the following requirements must be met:
 The instrument must be in "Replace part" status. See instructions "Preparing the instrument: Gas
pressure" in Preparing and following up maintenance work (on page 185).
 The front door has to be open and the carousel and/or the cover plate have to be removed.
 Clean off all fingerprints on quartz parts before installing them. This prevents premature ageing of
quartz parts. Use acetone, for example, for cleaning.

Phase 1: Installing reaction tubes

Proceed as follows:
 Insert the reaction tube into the furnace:
 Connect the ground-in ball and socket joint at the lower end of the combustion tube to the
condenser.
Note: When you close a ground-in ball-and-socket joint, you must be able to feel an elastic
resistance when you press-in the o-ring, otherwise you must replace the o-ring.
 Insert the injection plug with multiway valve / ball valve into the combustion tube.

Caution: Improper insertion of the injection unit may cause broken glass!
 Fasten the dosing unit with both fastening screws.
 Connect the carrier gas supply to the gas supply connection of the combustion tube by means of
the ground-in clamp.
 Close the front door and reinstall the cover plate and the carousel on the instrument. The
analyzer performs an automatic carousel recognition. Wait until it is completely processed.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 254

Phase 2: Conditioning the reaction tube, getting the instrument ready to measure
Proceed as follows:
 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on..
 Wait the required conditioning time. Cf. Conditioning newly installed tubes (on page 186).
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

To be observed after maintenance

If you have performed maintenance work that has a defined maintenance interval, you must manually
reset the "Status" field to zero on the "Maintenance intervals" dialog (accessible via Options >
Maintenance > Intervals. See Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Carbon blank values of the new catalyst may lead to a drift. It is recommended to flush the catalyst
with a high injection volume prior to the measurements (e.g. over night).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 255

Filling, removing and installing drying, absorption and

filter tubes
Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to fill, remove and install the drying, absorption and filter tubes.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 256

Filling the drying tube

Note
 Observe the filling heights indicated as exactly as possible.
 The tube filling must not have any cavities. Therefore, tap the tube wall with a piece of wood or
cork when filling the tubes or stuff the absorption agent tightly.

Drying tube
The following picture shows the fillings and filling heights of the drying tube:

Legend:
1 Filter pad
2 Drying agent

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Installing/removing and filling the drying/absorption tube" under
Warning notes during operation (on page 24).

Filling the drying tube

Proceed as follows:
 At the bottom, insert a filter pad.
 Fill in the drying agent.
 At the top, insert a filter pad.

Notes regarding further operation

The drying tube fillings must be replaced regularly in order to ensure correct readings.

Filling the absorption tube

Note
 Observe the filling heights indicated as exactly as possible.
 The tube filling must not have any cavities. Therefore, tap the tube wall with a piece of wood or
cork when filling the tubes or stuff the absorption agent tightly.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 257

Absorption tube
The following picture shows the fillings and filling heights of the absorption tube:

Legend:
1 Filter pad
2 Absorption reagent

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Installing/removing and filling the drying/absorption tube" under
Warning notes during operation (on page 24).

Filling the absorption tube

Proceed as follows:
 At the bottom, insert a filter pad.
 Plug the absorption reagent as high as there is still room left for a filter pad on the upper part of
the tube.
 At the top, insert a filter pad.

Notes regarding operation:

The absorption tube fillings must be replaced regularly in order to ensure correct readings.

Filling the filter tubes

Filter tube
The following picture shows the fillings and filling heights of the filter tube:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 258

Legend:
1 Filter pad

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Installing/removing and filling the drying/absorption tube" under
Warning notes during operation (on page 24).

Filling the filter tube

 Insert a filter pad.

Removing and installing drying, absorption and filter tubes

Function
The tubes serve the water absorption as well as halogen absorption and avoid dirt deposits at
important construction parts.

Postion of the tubes

The following picture shows the positions of the different tubes in the front area:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 259

Legend:
1 Absorption tube
2 Drying tube with drying agent

The following picture shows the positions of the different tubes in the left area:

Legend:
4 Filter tube

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparing the instrument, gas pressure
 Removing tubes
 Installing tubes, getting the instrument ready to measure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Installing/removing and filling the drying/absorption tube" under
Warning notes during operation (on page 24).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 260

Phase 1: Preparing the instrument, gas pressure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

To prepare the instrument for maintenance work follow the instructions in Preparing and following
up maintenance work (on page 185).

Phase 2: Removing tubes

Proceed as follows:
 Open the door (front, side door)
 Loosen the screw caps at the inlet and outlet of the tube.
 Remove the tubes from the holding clamps.

Phase 3: Installing tubes, getting the instrument ready to measure

Please note:
Caution Cutting sealing elements apart/out (o-rings, quad rings, half shells, ferrules).
When cutting sealing elements apart/out with a knife you may damage sealing
surfaces.
Never remove sealing elements with a knife but rather with tweezers.

Proceed as follows:
 Screw the screw caps on the inlet and outlet.
 Fasten the tubes from the holding clamps.
 Close the door (front, side door)
 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on..
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

To be observed after maintenance

If you have performed maintenance work that has a defined maintenance interval, you must manually
reset the "Status" field to zero on the "Maintenance intervals" dialog (accessible via Options >
Maintenance > Intervals. See Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 261

Filling the acid container

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to fill the acid container.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 262

Filling the acid container

Note
The acid container is located behind the front door. It contains 125 ml and has to be filled with 1%
phosphoric acid (H3PO4)

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Filling the acid container" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Filling the acid container

Proceed as follows:
 Unscrew the front screw cap from the container.
 Fill up distilled water to the filling mark 125 ml. Then fill approx. 1.5 ml 85 % acid (1% H 3PO4) in
the acid resservoir container.
 Screw the screw caps back onto the acid container.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 263

Flushing the combustion tube and the sparger.

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section enables you to flush the reactor and the sparger.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 264

Flushing the combustion tube with salt containing samples

Background
If mainly salt containing samples with e.g. 35 g/l NaCl are analyzed, the capacity of the combustion
tube for salt is saturated after approx. 50-100 samples.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Removing reaction tubes" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Requirements
 The combustion tube has been removed from the instrument.
 The combustion tube is cold.

Flushing the combustion tube

Proceed as follows:
 Flush the combustion tube incl. filling it with deionized water.
 By doing so, water sollulable salt will be dissolved and removed from the reactor.

Note
To avoid longer working breaks during the sample measurement, it is recommended to work with two
combustion tubes alternately.
 One combustion tube is in the instrument
 One combustion tube is being flushed.

Flushing the sparger

Background
If mainly salt containing and particle containing samples are analyzed, the sparger has to be flushed
regularly, in order to avoid blockings and inaccurate measurements (carry-over effects).

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Flushing the sparger" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Illustration
The following picture shows the relevant components in this section:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Maintaining the instrument 265

Legend:
1 IR detector (here: vario TOC cube)
2 Sparger
3 Condenser
4 Fan
5 Membrane gas drying
6 Filter
7 Acid pump
8 Waste drain valve
9 Capillary

Flushing the sparger

Proceed as follows:
 Flush the acid path via Options > Maintenance > Fush Acid Path.
 Wait until the flushing process is complete.

Under normal circumstances this flushing procedure is sufficient. However, proceed as follows if there
are still residues in the sparger:
 Shut off the gas supply. To do so, execute the Options > Maintenance > Replace parts
command.
 Remove the sparger. Loosen the upper and lower screw connections.
 Flush the sparger with distilled water.
 Reinstall the sparger after cleaning.
 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on..
 Flush the acid path via Options > Maintenance > Fush Acid Path.
 Wait until the flushing process is complete.
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 9

Repairing the instrument

Target group
Personnel authorized by Elementar and having undergone training.

Purpose
This section is designed to restore proper working order of the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Repairing the instrument 268

Interpreting PC error messages

Software reaction to errors
When an error is detected, the software displays its error code on screen and saves it to the "error
buffer".
 If the error is a critical error, the instrument is stopped immediately.
 If the error is a non-critical error, the instrument is only stopped:
 if you have defined a maximum number of permissible errors in the Options Settings
Error Handling menu and
 the maximum number has been exceeded defined in Options > Settings > Error
Handling.

On-screen error message

When an error is detected the "Error information window" is displayed on screen. Here, the name of
the module which has detected the error as well as the error number is displayed.

Interpreting error code

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Error buffer" dialog by selecting Options > Diagnostics > Error Buffer.
 Double-click on the error code you want to interpret in the "Event" column.
This displays the "Error display" dialog that is automatically open at the appropriate tab. The
causes of the error are indicated by a red dot.
The error texts have different colors.
 red: Critical error. Requires immediate correction.
 blue: Warning. Requires no activity for now. If occuring repeatedly with succeeding
analyses, look for the cause and find a remedy.
 green: Hint. Informs about an unusual behaviour, however, under normal circumstances no
activities are necessary.

Performing a system test

What does the system test check?
The system test checks the following components of the analyzer for proper functioning:
 Sparger drain
 Acid pump
 Gas inlet
 Condenser drain
 Magnetic stirrer
 multiway valve

Performing a system test

Perform the system test in consultation with the service department. The service department will give
you the necessary instructions to perform the system test.

You can contact the service department on the following phone number:

Tel.: +49 6184 9393 - 220

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Repairing the instrument 269

Further information
Further information can be found in:
 System test (on page 406).

Performing a leak test

Purpose of the leak test
The leak test checks the instrument for leaks.

Performing a leak test (vario TOC cube)

Proceed as follows:
 Click Options > Diagnosis > Leak test. A message window appears which requests you to
confirm the execution of the leak test once more.
 If the instrument is equipped with an EC sensor for TNb determination, please remove tubes from
the EC cell and connect them directly.
 Click Yes to start the leak test. The program opens the "Leak test: Whole device" dialog. The
tubing diagram of the analysis system is displayed.
 Click Start to begin "Whole System" leak test. The "Leak test: Whole device" dialog appears.
 The leak test begins. On the left, the arrow indicates the current stage of the leak test.
 The result of the leak test is displayed at the bottom:

 If the leak test has passed the symbol becomes visible.

 If the leak test has failed the symbol becomes visible.

 Print out the result if you wish. Click Print to do so.
 Click Close to close the dialog again.

Performing a leak test (vario TOC select)

Proceed as follows:
 Click Options > Diagnosis > Leak test. A message window appears which requests you to
confirm the execution of the leak test once more.
 Click Yes to start the leak test. The program opens the "Leak test: Whole device" dialog. The
tubing diagram of the analysis system is displayed.
 Connect the dummy screw connection at the combustion tube.
 Disconnect the hose no. 5 at the hose connection and provide the opening with a dummy screw
connection.
 Click Start to begin "Whole System" leak test. The "Leak test: Whole device" dialog appears.
 The leak test begins. On the left, the arrow indicates the current stage of the leak test.
 The result of the leak test is displayed at the bottom:

 If the leak test has passed the symbol becomes visible.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Repairing the instrument 270

 If the leak test has failed the symbol becomes visible.

 Print out the result if you wish. Click Print to do so.
 Click Close to close the dialog again.

Further information
Further information can be found in:
 Leak test (on page 403).

Leak test procedure

Process
By clicking Options > Diagnostics > Leak test the "Leak test: Whole device" dialog opens. In the
dialog the tubing diagram of the analyzer is displayed as well as the preparing activities to be carried
out. Moving the mouse pointer over a colored area of the tubing diagram causes the program to
display additional information about the corresponding object.

After the necessary preparing activities have been carried out the leak test can be started.

The execution of the leak test is done by clicking Start. The "Leak test" dialog will open. Here, the test
run can be observed.

Measures when the leak test has failed

In case the leak test fails, the leak has to be localized.

Proceed as follows:
 Close the check valve at the connection to tube No. 10 and press Start.
If the leak test is successful, restore the original connection.
 Then close the outlet of the reaction tube by means of a blind pan and press Start.
If the leak test is successful, restore the original connection.
 Then close the outlet of the condenser by means of a blind pan and press Start.
If the leak test is successful, restore the original connection.
 Then close the outlet of the halogen absorber to tube no. 21 by means of a blind cap and press
Start.
If the leak test is successful, restore the original connection.
 Then close the outlet of the membrane gas drying to tube no. 23 by means of a blind pan and
press Start.
If the leak test is successful, restore the original connection.
 Then close the outlet of the drying tube no. 24 by means of a blind cap and press Start.
If the leak test is successful, restore the original connection.

If the leak test indicates the result "failed" in one of the above steps, the leak in the corresponding
area of the gas path should be suspected.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Repairing the instrument 271

What to do after a computer crash

After a computer crash
Because open documents are saved to a temporary file every 3 minutes, large-scale loss of data is
not usual. After a computer crash, restart the operating software and the software automatically loads
the most recent temporary file.

Reacting to a power failure

Open document
An open document is not lost in the event of a power failure. The temporary document file is
automatically loaded when the operating software is restarted.

What to do after a power failure

Depending on when the power failure occurred, proceed as follows:
Case Procedure
When the power failure occurred while you were Follow the instructions in "Reacting to a power
performing an analysis and there was a sample in failure during analysis".
the analyzer.
Although you were performing an analysis when Follow the instructions in "Reacting to a power
the power failure occurred, there was no sample failure".
in the analyzer.
The analyzer was in standby mode when the Follow the instructions in "Checking the
power failure occurred. The power failure lasted gas-tightness of the instrument".
longer than 15 minutes.
The analyzer was in standby mode when the No special measures required.
power failure occurred. The power failure lasted
less than 15 minutes.

Reacting to a power failure during analysis

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Inserting multiple samples into the ball valve (only for
solid operation)
If there are samples in the carousel while you are changing the position of the
carousel via System > Carousel position, multiple samples may fall into the ball
valve at the same time. In this case, a service technician is required.
Before changing the position of the carousel, always remove all samples from the
carousel.

Proceed as follows:
 If the analyzer is still switched on, switch it off and wait for a moment.
 Switch the analyzer on again.
If the multiway valve...
 ... does perform a reference run: Go to the next step.
 ... ...does not perform a reference run: Disconnect the instrument from the mains, check the
fuses and replace them if necessary. See Replacing fuses. After replacing the fuse repeat
this step.
 Restart the operating software. The temporary file of the most recent document is loaded.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Repairing the instrument 272

 All measuring results exist except for the most recent sample. A message appears which informs
that the sample position is not definied and a reference run has to be carried out.
 Confirm this message by clicking OK.
 Create a backup of the current document via File > Save as.
 Perform a leak test by selecting Options > Diagnostics > Leak Test.
 There may still be some residue of the last sample in the combustion section. Perform blank
value determinations to remove the residues. See Determining blank values (on page 150).
 Correct the number of the current sample via Edit > Current sample. See Adjusting the current
sample.
 Insert additional sample lines (standard 10 ppm) at the top of the sample view for a recovery
determination via Edit > Insert Line.
 Prepare standard samples and place them on the carousel. Put the other samples behind this.
 Restart the measurement via System > Continuous.

Reacting to a power failure

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Inserting multiple samples into the ball valve (only for
solid operation)
If there are samples in the carousel while you are changing the position of the
carousel via System > Carousel position, multiple samples may fall into the ball
valve at the same time. In this case, a service technician is required.
Before changing the position of the carousel, always remove all samples from the
carousel.

Proceed as follows:
 If the analyzer is still switched on, switch it off and wait for a moment.
 Switch the analyzer on again.
If the ball valve...
 ... audibly does perform a reference run: Go to the next step.
 ... ...does not perform a reference run: Disconnect the instrument from the mains, check the
fuses and replace them if necessary. See Replacing fuses. After replacing the fuse repeat
this step.
 Restart the operating software. The temporary file of the most recent document is loaded.
 All measuring results exist except for the most recent sample. A message appears which informs
that the sample position is not definied and a reference run has to be carried out.
 Confirm this message by clicking OK.
 Create a backup of the current document via File > Save as.
 Perform a leak test by selecting Options > Diagnostics > Leak Test.
 Correct the number of the current sample via Edit > Current sample. See Adjusting the current
sample.
 Insert additional sample lines (standard 10 ppm) at the top of the sample view for a recovery
determination via Edit > Insert Line.
 Prepare standard samples and place them on the carousel. Put the other samples behind this.
 Restart the measurement via System > Continuous.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Repairing the instrument 273

Checking air-tightness of instrument

Proceed as follows:
 Perform a leak test to check the air-tightness of the instrument. See Performing a leak test.
 If any leaks are detected, replace all sealing elements in the furnace area. See Replacing
sealing elements (on page 217).

Changing the position of the carousel

When is this necessary?
It is necessary to change the position of the carousel in the following cases:
 If the analyzer was switched off, the carousel is no longer in zero position. Before you can start
an analysis, you must move the carousel back to zero position.
 If you lose samples, it may be necessary to move the carousel to a different position.

Changing the position

Please observe the following instruction:
Caution Inserting multiple samples into the ball valve (only for
solid operation)
If there are samples in the carousel while you are changing the position of the
carousel via System > Carousel position, multiple samples may fall into the ball
valve at the same time. In this case, a service technician is required.
Before changing the position of the carousel, always remove all samples from the
carousel.

Proceed as follows:
 Remove all samples from the carousel.
 Open the "Set carousel position" dialog via System > Sample Position.
 Decide:
If you want to...
 ... move the carousel to a position other than zero position, select the radio button next to
"Position" and use the arrows to set the position in the box next to it.
 ... move the carousel to the zero position, select the radiobutton next to "Reference run".
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and moves the carousel to the desired position.

Stopping continuous analysis

When do I stop continuous analysis?
It makes sense to stop a continuous analysis in the following cases:
 If the results of the conditioning sample indicate that parts of the instrument are defective or that
gas pressure and flow behaviors are not OK.
 If the measuring results of the control standard are outside the requirede range.

Stopping a continuous analysis spontaneously

Proceed as follows:
 Execute the command System > Single run in the operating software.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Repairing the instrument 274

 This stops the analysis after measuring the current sample.

Moving a stop marker

The program automatically moves the stop marker to the last sample position during sample data
input. It is therefore only necessary to move the stop marker in special cases.

Nevertheless, if for any reason you have to move the stop marker proceed as follows:
 Open the "Set stop marker" dialog by selecting Edit > Stop tag.
 Use the arrow buttons to set the sample number at which to set a stop marker.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and moves the stop marker to the desired position.

Re-weighing after sample loss (Solid mode)

Sample loss
If you drop a sample on the floor when loading the carousel, for example, the sample is contaminated
and should not be analyzed. You have to prepare, pack and weigh a new sample.

Re-weighing after sample loss

Proceed as follows:
 Prepare the sample again and pack it.
 Open the "Set current weight" dialog by selecting System > Current weight.
 Use the arrows to specify the sample to re-weigh.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and the cursor moves to the "Weight" column of the selected
sample number.
 If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, the "Comment change" dialog is displayed. Enter a
justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close.
 Weigh the sample If the weight is not transmitted online, enter the weight by hand in the sample
view on the PC.
 Insert the new sample on the carousel.
 Open the "Set current weigt" dialog again by selecting System > Current weight.
 Use the arrows to set the number following the number of the last sample.
 Click OK. This closes the dialog and the cursor moves to the "Weight" column of the selected
sample number.
 If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, the "Comment change" dialog is displayed. Enter a
justification in the "Comment modification" dialog and click Close.

Export analysis data for support

Export for support
The service department can draw conclusions about the condition of the analyzer from the analysis
data, particularly the graphical information. Therefore, analysis data must be exported in mdb format
for support, as this also contains graphical data.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Repairing the instrument 275

Exporting analysis data

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Export document" dialog in the operating software by selecting File > Export/Import >
Export.
 Select the desired document file and click OK. This displays the "Save file as" dialog.
 Select the directory to export the document to from the "Save" dropdown listbox.
 Select the "MS Access Files (*.mdb) file type from the "File type" dropdown listbox and click
Save.
 The document is exported and saved under the corresponding name.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 10

Variants and modifications

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section enables you to know the different instrument variants and to modify the instrument

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 278

Instrument variants
Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
The section is meant to explain the instrument variants.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 279

The basic model

Purpose
The basic model enables you to measure in liquid and solid samples in single mode. In addition it is
possible to homogenize samples in liquid mode when installing a stirring motor.

The instrument
The following picture shows the instrument:

The model with automatic sampler in liquid mode

Purpose
The model with an automatic sampler in liquid mode enables you to feed the instrument with different
carousel attachments.

The carousel attachments can be provided for 32, 50 and 80 sample vials.

An integrated stirrer can homogenize the samples in the liquid mode.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 280

The instrument
The following picture shows the instrument:

The variant with automatic sampler in solids mode

Purpose
The model with an automatic sampler in solids mode enables you to feed the instrument with different
carousel attachments.

The carousel attachments can be provided for 80 and 120 sample vials.

The samples will either be measured by the folding technique packed in tin boats or by capsule
technique in tin capsules.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 281

The instrument
The following picture shows the instrument:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 282

Modifying the instrument

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
The section is meant to explain the individual modifications.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 283

Modifying from single mode "liquid" to single mode "solids"

The instrument
The following picture shows the instrument:

Note: The modification from single mode "liquid" to single mode "solids" only requires a tube
exchange and the mounting of the ball valve.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:

Preparing the instrument, gas pressure

 Modifying the instrument
 Getting the instrument ready to measure

Phase 1: Preparing the instrument, gas pressure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Phase 2: Modifying the instrument

Proceed as follows:
 Remove the cover plate and open the front door.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 284

 Loosen the locking screws at the multiway valve and the ground-in clamps of the carrier gas line
to the combustion tube.

 Hold the upper end of the combustion tube with one hand and move the multiway valve out of the
combustion tube with careful jiggeling motions with the other. Put the multiway valve into the
designated park position.

 Take the combustion tube for solid samples and insert it into the furnace. See Filling the
standard reaction tube (Solid mode) (on page 248).
 Fasten the ground-in clamp at the lower end of the combustion tube and connect the condenser
with the combustion tube.
 Carefully insert the ball valve into the combustion tube so that the ball valve tappet is in the
multiway valve motor.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 285

 Tighten the ball valve with the locking screws.

 Fasten the carrier gas line at the ball valve with ground-in clamp.
 Close the front door and put the cover plate on the analyzer.
 Remove the lid for the hole of the solid samples from the cover plate.

 Put the cover ring for the ball valve into the feeding hole.

Phase 3: Getting the instrument ready to measure

Proceed as follows:
 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on..
 Change the operating mode to Solid mode. See Selecting the operating mode (on page 138).
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 286

 Open the "Device parameters" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings
> Parameters.
 Activate the "Temperatures" section and check the setting of the reactor temperature. In solid
mode it must be set to 950 °C. If not done so far set it to this value.
 Click OK to close the dialog.
 Open the "Feeding" dialog in the operating software by selecting System > Feeding. Select the
option "No sampler".
 Click OK to close the dialog.

Modifying from single mode to automatic operation

The instruments
The following picture shows the instruments:

Purpose
The modification from single mode to automatic operation enables you to independently measure
samples either in liquid or in solids mode.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Allow instrument to cool down and disconnect from the mains
 Modifying the instrument
 Deciding about the instrument variant
 Turn on instrument

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Modifying the instrument" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 287

Phase 1: Allow instrument to cool down and disconnect from the mains
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Device parameters" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings
> Parameters.
 Set furnace setpoint temperature to 0 °C.
 Wait 2–3 hours until the instrument has cooled down to <55 °C.
 Quit the operating software. Execute the following command: File > Exit.
 Switch off the analyzer and its peripherals.
 Disconnect the analyzer from the mains. Disconnect the power supply plug. The instrument is
now ready for the modification.

Phase 2: Modifying the instrument

Proceed as follows:
 Open the front door and remove the cover plate.
 Loosen the locking screws at the multiway valve and the ground-in clamps of the carrier gas line
to the combustion tube.

 Loosen the injection unit from the combustion tube with careful jiggeling motions. Insert the
injection unit into the parking position.

 Loosen ground-in clamp at the lower end of the combustion tube and pull the combustion tube
out of the furnace. Place the combustion tube in the tube rack.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 288

 Remove the traverse (1) from the instrument.

 Detach the electrical connections.

 Unscrew the multiway valve motor (2) from the traverse (1).

 Take the retaining plate with lifting unit (1) and fasten the multiway valve motor (2).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 289

 Put the feeding unit (1) onto the retaining ridges.

Ensure that the injection unit is in the middle of the furnace hole. For this, you can attach the
multiway valve to the motor. Now shift and align the feeding unit and tighten it with screws. Then
unscrew the multiway valve again.
 Connect the electrical connections.

Phase 3: Decision about the instrument variant "Liquid" mode

Proceed as follows to modify the instrument to "liquid" mode:
 Insert the combustion tube for liquid samples into the furnace. See Filling the standard reaction
tube (Liquid mode) (on page 246).
 Fasten the combustion tube at the lower end with the condenser by means of a ground-in clamp.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 290

 Put the the multiway valve into the combustion tube, where there is a guiding provided for the
multiway valve which has to snap into the tappet of the motor.

 Tighten the multiway valve with the locking screws and reconnect the carrier gas line with
ground-in clamp.
 Put the cover plate and the carousel back onto the instrument: The analyzer performs the
automatic carousel recognition.
 Wait until it is completely processed.
 Put the suction and purging needle into the designated position.
 Put the stirring motor to the ideal height, see The stirring unit (on page 296).

Note: Ensure that the stop pin is in hole No. 2.

 Close the front door.

Phase 3: Decision about the instrument variant "Solid" mode

Note: With the analyzer in automatic liquid mode it is possible to determine solid samples individually
with the corresponding modification. Modify the instrument for the solids mode. Select in dialog
"Feeding" (via System > Feeding) the option "No sampler" and select in dialog "Analysis mode" (via
System > Mode) the mode "Solid".

The hole one the carousel serves as insertion hole.

All measurements are menu guided.

Proceed as follows to modify the instrument to "solids" mode:

 Insert the combustion tube for solid samples into the furnace. See
 Fasten the combustion tube at the lower end with the condenser by means of a ground-in clamp.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 291

 Insert the ball valve into the combustion tube, so that the tappet is in the multiway valve motor.

 Tighten the ball valve with the locking screws and reconnect the carrier gas line with ground-in
clamp.
 If the instrument has a stirring device, put them to the bottom by means of the provided locking
screws. See The stirring unit (on page 296).
 Place the stop pin (2) into hole no. 2. By loosening the screws move the stirring motor toward the
bottom.

 Put the cover plate and the carousel back onto the instrument: Close the front door.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 292

Phase 4: Switch on the instrument

Proceed as follows:
 Plug the power supply plug of the analyzer into the socket.
 Switch
 PC,
 monitor
 and printer on. Wait until the boot process is completed.
 Switch the main instrument switch (2) on. The instrument performs a reference run of the
autosampler.

 Launch the operating software. See Starting the operating software (on page 138).
 Open the "Device parameters" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings
> Parameters.
 Activate the "Temperatures" section and check the setting of the reactor temperature. In solid
mode it must be set to 950 °C, in liquid mode it must be set to 850 °C. If not done so far set it to
this value.
 Click OK to close the dialog.
 Open the "Feeding" dialog in the operating software by selecting System > Feeding. Here,
select the optione "Carousel" and the size of the carousel.
 Click OK to close the dialog.
 Open the dialog "Analysis mode" in the operating software by selecting System > Mode. Here,
select the desired solid or liquid mode.
 Click OK to close the dialog.
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 293

Modifying from automatic liquid operation to automatic solids operation

The instruments
The following picture shows the instruments:

Note: Modifying from one mode to the other requires tube and carousel exchange.

Process
The section is divided into the following phases:
 Preparing the instrument, gas pressure
 Modifying the instrument
 Getting the instrument ready to measure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Modifying the instrument" under Warning notes during
operation (on page 24).

Phase 1: Preparing the instrument, gas pressure

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Phase 2: Modifying the instrument

Proceed as follows:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 294

 Remove the carousel and the cover plate from the instrument. Pull the suction and purging
needle out of the sampler arm. Open the front door.

 Loosen the locking screws at the multiway valve and the ground-in clamps of the carrier gas line
at the multiway valve.
 Pull the injection unit (multiway valve, injection plug) out of the combustion tube with careful
jiggeling motions. Hold the combustion tube with one hand. Put the multiway valve into the
designated park position.

 Loosen ground-in clamp at the lower end of the combustion tube and pull the combustion tube
out of the furnace. Place the combustion tube in the tube rack.
 Take the combustion tube for solid samples and insert it into the furnace.
 At the lower end of the combustion tube connect the end of the condenser with a ground-in
clamp.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 295

 Carefully insert the ball valve into the combustion tube so that the tappet at the back of the ball
valve is in the multiway valve motor.

 Tighten the ball valve with the locking screws and fasten the carrier gas supply lines at the ball
valve by means of the ground-in clamp.
 If the instrument has a stirring unit, move it by adjusting the screws to the bottom. The stirring
unit is located behand the right side wall of the analyzer. See The stirring unit (on page 296).
 Place the stop pin (2) into hole No. 1 (1).

 Put the carousel for solids onto the instrument. The feeding hole of the carousel has to be placed
above the ball valve and the carousel has to snap into the holes of the rail.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 296

Note: Suction and purging needle do not have to be installed in the solids mode. When changing
from solid to liquid mode place the stop pin into hole No. 2 (2) and align the stirring unit by
moving the screws upwards.
 Put the cover plate on the instrument and close the front door.

Phase 3: Getting the instrument ready to measure

Proceed as follows:
 Close the "Replace part" dialog in the operating software. To do so, click Finished in the
"Replace part" dialog. By doing so, the gas will be automatically turned on..
 Open the "Device parameters" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings
> Parameters.
 Activate the "Temperatures" section and check the setting of the reactor temperature. In solid
mode it must be set to 950 °C. If not done so far set it to this value.
 Click OK to close the dialog.
 Open the "Feeding" dialog in the operating software by selecting System > Feeding. Here,
select the optione "Carousel" and the size of the carousel.
 Click OK to close the dialog.
 Open the dialog "Analysis mode" in the operating software by selecting System > Mode. Here,
select the solid mode.
 Click OK to close the dialog.
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

The stirring unit

Purpose
The stirring unit serves for the homogenization of particles containing samples. These may be
homogenized with either general or special methods.

The stirring unit

The following picture shows the details of the stirring unit:

Legend:
1 Stirrer magnets
2 Setscrews for height adjustment

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 297

Note: To adjust the stirring unit use the setcrews and define the position by moving it up and down.

Adjusting the suction and purging needle

Purpose
Adjusting the suction and purging needle is important for not to influence the sampling and for not to
damage the instrument.

Condition
Installation of the suction and purging needle has to be carried out only if the carousel has been taken
off.

Suction device
The following picture shows the suction device:

Legend:
1 Suction device
2 Lock screw purging needle
3 Lock screw suction needle
4 Purging needle
5 Suction needle

Adjustment of the needles

Proceed as follows:
 Put the suction device (without needles) into the sample arm and fasten it with an Allen wrench.
 Move the sample arm up via System > Arm up.
 Install the purging and suction needle as in the picture shown above.
 Put the hose No. 12 over the suction needle and the hose No. 7 over the purging needle.
 Proceed as follows to adjust the exact height of the needles:
 Pull the needles as far as they are flush with the deflector plate (3). Note: If septum is used,
work with suction needle only! Both holes of the outer sheating of the suction needle have
to be in the septum.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 298

 Tighten the needles with the locking screws (1, 2).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 299

Modification to POC operation

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section is meant to explain the modification to POC operation.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 300

Scope of delivery
Scope of delivery
POC module

Accessory to the vario TOC cube which allows the measurement of volatile compounds (POC) in
liquids.

Prod. No. 38.00-0407

Spare parts list

Following the list of furnished spare parts:
Spare part Article no.
CO2 absorption tube. 38.00-0007
Hose line 38.00-0540
Ground-in clamps 05 000 287
CO2 absorber 38.00-0408
Filter pads 03 002 399

The components
The components
The following picture shows the POC module in detail:

Legend:
1 Multiway valve
2 Syringe
3 Halogen absorber
4 Furnace with heat protection cladding
5 Drying tube
6 Acid container
7 Absorption tube (POC mode only)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 301

Functional diagram POC module

Functional diagram
The following picture shows the functional diagram of the POC module:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 302

General measuring principle POC

General measuring principle
The sample insertion in direct procedure (POC) and the initiation of measurement is divided into the
following phases:
 The IR detector performs autozero alignment of the measuring signal.
 Meanwhile the measuring system is flushed with the corresponding sample. The multiway vale
goes to two different positions:
 Suction of the sample
 Waste
 Subsequently, the syringe is filled the corresponding injection volume.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 303

 The IR detector determines the baseline.

 The multiway valve goes to the 4th position (sample injection into the sparger).
 A pressure drop takes place and the sample is injected into the sparger.
 CO2 of inorganic origin (TIC) will be absorbed.
All volatile organic compounds (POC) are purged and completey oxidized.
 The gas flows through different absorption and drying steps and is then analyzed in the IR
detector for CO2.
 From the integral value the POC concentration will be calculated by means of a calibration
coefficient.
After completion of the analysis the result can be saved.

Selecting the operating mode

Essential condition
Before switching operating modes, you must have performed all refitting work required for the new
operating mode.

The tube fillings contain the same materials as for the TOC liquids mode.

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Changing mode" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Selecting the operating mode

Proceed as follows:
 Perform all refitting work required for the new operating mode.
 Execute the command System > Mode in the instrument software. A message window appears
which requests you to confirm the change of the operating mode once more.
 Click Yes if you want to continue. The "Analysis mode" dialog is displayed.
 Select the desired analysis mode. Select also the type of detector and feeding. Then click OK.
 The "Change to new mode" dialog is displayed. If not done so far, follow here the instructions for
the modification.
 Click OK if you have refitted the instrument. The operating mode is changed.

Modification to POC mode

Modification of the basic instrument
For modifying the basic instrument the following steps shall be completed one after the other. It is not
necessary to turn off the vario TOC cube basic instrument.

Proceed as follows:
 Turn on the operation mode POC in the software under System > Mode.
 Go to System > Maintenance > Replace Parts.
 Take the holders top (1) and bottom (2) and screw them into the provided bores next to the
halogen absorber.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 304

 Clamp the filled absorption tube (1) into the holders.

 Take the carrier gas tube No. 10 (2) and clamp it to the upper end of the absorption tube.
Subsequently, take the tube No. 40 (1) and clamp it to the lower end of the absorption tube.

 Confirm the maintenance dialog with Finish.

 Check the temperature of 850°C in the software under Options > Settings > Parameters .
 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 305

Defining custom methods

View and define methods
In the "Methods" dialog you can view existing methods or define new methods.

View existing methods

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.
 In the left field, select the appropriate method. In the fields at the right side the parameters of the
selected method are now displayed.
 Click Close to close the dialog again.

Defining custom methods

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.
 Click New. The input boxes on the right of the dialog are now empty. Enter the parameters of the
method to be newly defined:
 Enter the following:
 Enter the name of your method in the "ID" field.
 Enter the purpose of the method, for example, in the "Description" field.
 Input the corresponding method parameters in the other boxes.
 Click Create. Your new method will now be included in the list in the left area of the dialog. You
have now defined the method.
 Click Close to close the dialog.

Defining custom standard substances

Defining custom standard substances
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Standard samples" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Standards.
 Click New. The input boxes on the right area are now empty. Enter the data of the standard
sample to be newly defined.
 For the substance, enter...
 ... the name of the substance in the "name" field.
 ... the theoretical element content in percent in the "Conc. [%]" fields (or in ppm in the
"Conc. [ppm]" fields respectively). If you enter 0 for the theoretical element content of a
substance element, the element is ignored in the calculation.
 ... the permissible tolerance for each element in the "Tolerance [%]" fields (usually 5%).
 Click Create. Your new standard sample will now be included in the list in the left area of the
dialog.
 You have now defined the standard substance.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 306

 Click Close to close the dialog.

Check list, prior to the analysis run

Prior to the analysis run
Prior to starting an analysis run, the following points shall be completed:
 Maintenance intervals observed?
 Operation mode set?
 Gas on?
 Pressure on?
 Lecktest passed?
 Absorption tube filled and installed?
 Detector signal stable?
 Sample name, method and standard samples edited and assigned?

Calibration
Background
These operating instructions contain specific rules for the calibration. If you want to use these rules,
you must define the standard substances used there as calibration samples. Of course, you can also
use different substances but then you must develop the calibration rule yourself.

Defined calibration samples are displayed along with their theoretical contents in the sample view.

Required substances
If you want to perform calibration on the basis of the calibration tables, you must define certain
standard substances depending on the operating mode for which you want to perform calibration.

The following table lists the standard substances required for calibration in the respective operating
mode:
Operating Potassium Sodium Sodium nitrate Ammonium
mode hydrogen carbonate chloride
phthalate
TOC X
TC X X
TIC X
NPOC X
TNb X X
POC X)*

)* Coefficients are transferred (from TOC to POC).

Theoretical element contents of standard substances

The following tables lists the theoretical element contents of the standard substances used in the
calibration tables:
Standard substance Ctheor Ntheor
Potassium hydrogen phthalate 47,1 %

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 307

Sodium carbonate 11,33 %

Sodium nitrate 16,47 %
Ammoniun chloride 26,17 %
Performing calculation and optimization of calibration curves

The calculation of optimization of calibration curves will be done as in the liquid mode.

Viewing calibration coefficients

Proceed as follows to view calibration coefficients:
 Open the Calibration coefficients dialog in the operating software by selecting Math >
Coefficients.
The calibration coefficients and the limits within the calibration is valid are displayed.

Maintenance work
Maintenance work to be performed by the customer
The following maintenance work shall be performed by the user in regular intervals:
 Exchange of the CO2 absorber and the filter pads in the absorption tube
 Open the front door.
 Loosen the hose connections and the screw caps.
 Pull out the absorption tube.
 In addition, the maintenance of the basic instrument remain.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 308

TIC solids module

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section is meant to explain working with TIC solids module.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 309

General information
The TIC solids module
The TIC solids module is an auxiliary unit to the vario TOC cube. The knowledge of the vario TOC
cube operating instructions is also prerequisite for the proper operation of the TIC solids module.
 The TIC module is exclusively suitable for the analysis of the TIC in solid or pasty samples which
release CO2 by adding diluted hydrochlorid acid.
 The analysis of aggressive chemicals or materials which may form gas mixtures of potentially
explosive nature by adding acid is strictly prohibited. It may lead to serious damages of the
instrument and injuries to the operating personnel.

Difficult applications
For the above mentioned and/or for difficult applications you may use the counseling service of our
application lab in order to develop safe working instructions..

Scope of delivery
Scope of delivery
TIC module soliTIC

Additional attachment to vario TOC cube instrument which allows TIC measurements in solids,
suspensions or sludges.

Recommended working range:

 max. 2 g sample weight or
 max. 10 mg TIC

Prod. No. 36.00-0000

You will find further order information for spares or consumables in the annex and in the current
consumables catalog.

Analytical characteristics
Analytical characteristics
The following table explains the analytical characteristics:
Analytical characteristic Comments
Operation modes TIC solids
Working range 1 µg - 10 mg TIC
Calibration linear and/or polynomial
Standard deviation  < 1 % rel. for 6-fold determination
Sample weight  max. 2 g, depending on sample density
Duration of analysis 4 - 10 Min
depending from digestion behaviour, sample weight and TIC content
of the sample
Sample digestion Acid at 50°C

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 310

Data storage and data output Storage on hard disk or external storage media.
LIMS transfer possible.
Data output to screen and printer.

Technical specifications
Standardization
The instrument conforms to CE standards in accordance with EC Directives:
 EMC 89/336/EEC
 LVD 73/23/EEC

Control and data processing

The following table contains the technical specifications of the control and data processing system:
Reference value Technical specifications
Control and evaluation unit PC with operating system Windows 7® Professional or a newer
version of Windows Professional
Printer (optional)
Software Multilingual (at least German and English)
Menu-driven
Status display during analysis
Real-time graphics
Interfaces USB, Safety low voltage as per DIN IEC 380/VDE 0806/08.81

Dimensions and weights

The following table contains dimensions and weight of the instrument:
Reference value Technical specifications
Dimensions 250 mm x 200 mm x 440 mm (Width x Depth x Height)

Weight approx. 5 kg

Electrical and gas supply

The following table contains the technical specifications of the electrical and gas supply:
Reference value Technical specifications
Mains voltage 100-230 Volt AC ± 10%; 50-60 Hz

Carrier gas Synthetic air or oxygen, 1.2 bar

Consumption approx. 500 ml/min

Ambient conditions
The following table contains the technical specifications of the ambient conditions:
Reference value Technical specifications
Protection class Protection class I, protective conductor connection
Mode of protection IP20, installation in dry rooms only
Noise level 55 dB (A), as per DIN 45635 section 1
Permissible ambient temperature Maximum: + 35 °C, minimum: + 15 °C

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 311

Functional diagram TIC module

Functional diagram TIC module soliTIC
The following picture shows the functional diagram of the TIC module soliTIC.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 312

Funktional diagram coupling TIC module with vario TOC cube basic instrument
The following picture shows the coupling of the TIC module (soliTIC) with the vario TOC cube basic
instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 313

The components
The components
The following picture shows the TIC module in detail:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 314

Legend:
1 Acid dosing
2 Measuring outlet
3 Buffer volume (U-tube)
4 Sample inlet
5 TIC reactor
6 Heater
7 Acid container
8 Gas supply
9 Changeover gas/waste

Installation and initial start up of the TIC module

Modification of the basic instrument
For modifying the basic instrument the following steps shall be completed one after the other.

It is not necessary to turn off the vario TOC cube basic instrument.
 Turn on the operation mode "TIC solids" in the software under System > Mode.
 Go to System > Maintenance > Replace Parts.
 The furnace will not be used during the TIC operation. Therefore, it can be set to 0°C under
Options > Settings > Parameters.
 The electronic communication between the vario TOC cube and the TIC module will be prepared
with cable no. 5.
 Jam the exhaust and waste water line to the remaining connections.
 Connect all lines to the rear of the TIC module. The following picture shows the connections at
the rear of the TIC module:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 315

Legend:
1 Outlet hose line no. 78
2 Inlet hose line no. 77
3 Gas drain
4 Water drain
5 Communication vario TOC - TIC module

 Connect the communication cable No. 5 to the vario TOC cube.

 The following picture shows the connection (1) at the rear of the vario TOC cube.

 Unscrew the upper cap from the condenser (tube No. 36) of the vario TOC cube basic
instrument.
 Lead the inlet hose No. 77 and the outlet hose No. 79 through one of the louvers (2) of the vario
TOC cube (left sidewall, bottom).
 Screw hose no. 77 onto the condenser.
 Connect hose no. 78 and hose no. 36 (1) by means of a small filter tube.
 The follwing picture shows the left side (inside view) of the vario TOC cube:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 316

 Fill the 1.6% HCl into the acid container in the TIC module.
 Confirm the maintenance dialog with Finish.
 The TIC module will be connected with the vario TOC cube basic instrument via the gas
connections "Inlet" hose no. 77 and "Outlet" hose no. 78.
 Connect the power supply cable (2) and switch on the instrument.
The On/Off switch (1) is located on the right side of the TIC module.

After the modification

 Decide:
If...
 ... approximately the same flow and pressure values as prior to maintenance work are
displayed: The instrument is ready to measure again.
 ... distinctly different flow and pressure values to those displayed prior to maintenance work
are displayed: Perform a leak test. See Performing a leak test. The instrument is only ready
to measure when the leak test is successful.

Selecting the operating mode

Essential condition
Before switching operating modes, you must have performed all refitting work required for the new
operating mode.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 317

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Changing mode" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Selecting the operating mode

Proceed as follows:
 Perform all refitting work required for the new operating mode.
 Execute the command System > Mode in the instrument software. A message window appears
which requests you to confirm the change of the operating mode once more.
 Click Yes if you want to continue. The "Analysis mode" dialog is displayed.
 Here, check the option "TIC Solid (with soliTIC module)". Then click OK.
 The "Change to new mode" dialog is displayed. If not done so far, follow here the instructions for
the modification.
 Click OK if you have refitted the instrument. The operating mode is changed.

General measuring principle TIC

General measuring principle TIC
The following steps show the measuring principle:
 For the determination of the TIC, the sample to be measured has to be homogenized first and
weighed-in into the furnished boat.
 The weight will be entered in the instrument software. The analysis will be started by clicking the
Single symbol.
 After auto-zero of the detector and after turning off the carrier gas the boats are put on the TIC
reactor and the sample is flushed into the reactor by means of little water.
 After confirmation of the feeding hyrochloric acid will be automatically dosed and hte carrier gas
started. The sample will be heated up to 50°C.
 The carrier gas flows through different drying and absorption steps and will be subsequently
analyzed in the detector for CO2.
 The TIC concentration will be calculated from the integral value of the measurement by means of
the calibration coefficient.
 After completion of the analysis the result can be saved.

Analysis steps
The following pictures show the analysis steps:

 Start of the single measurement

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 318

 Inserting the sample

 Drain and flush container. The following steps are to be performed:

 For draining turn lever upwards and wait for an adequate time.
 Remove sealing cap.
 Fill water into the container by means of a wash bottle.
 Put on the sealing cap again.
 For gassing turn lever downwards (4 o'clock position) ant wait for an adequate time.
 For draining turn lever upwards and wait for an adequate time.
 For gassing turn lever downwards (4 o'clock position).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 319

Analysis run
Note
For feeding it is recommended to weigh-in the samples into the furnished boats. It shall be taken care
that the TIC reactor of the module is closed.

Performing an analysis
Proceed as follows:
 Enter sample name, sample weight and measuring method into the corresponding text field of
the instrument software.

 Start the measuring process by clicking the Single start button, .

 After the autozero and baseline recording you will be asked by the dialog to feed the TIC module.
The following dialog appears:

 Unscrew the front screwing of the TIC reactor, put on the boat and flush the sample into the
reactor with some UP water. After this the reactor has to be closed again.
 Click Next. Now the feeding will be displayed in the software. Now the acid is automatically
dosed and the carrier gas started.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 320

 After completion of the peak recording the user will be requested to empty the system. The
following dialog appears:

 To empty the container turn the lever at the casing front to the vertical position.
 Wait an appropriate time until the container is competely empty.
 To avoid subsequent measurement errors the container must be flushed once again. Unscrew
the front screwing of the TIC reactor and fill some UP water into the reactor by means of a wash
bottle.
 Close the container with the front screwing again.
 Then turn the lever back to its original position and wait for an adequate time until pressure has
built up again in the container.
 To remove the flushing water from the container turn the lever at the casing front to the vertical
position again.
 Wait an appropriate time until the container is competely empty.
 Now turn the lever back into the horizontal position. The instrument is ready for the next analysis.

Make sure that air gets into the TIC container during the flushing process. This air produces an
"interference peak" in the detector which occurs approx. 2-3 minutes after closing the lever.

Prior to a new analysis start monitor the detector signal in the status display of the PC whether it is
stable at zero or near at zero.

Defining custom methods

View and define methods
In the "Methods" dialog you can view existing methods or define new methods.

View existing methods

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 321

 In the left field, select the appropriate method. In the fields at the right side the parameters of the
selected method are now displayed.
 Click Close to close the dialog again.

Defining custom methods

Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.
 Click New. The input boxes on the right of the dialog are now empty. Enter the parameters of the
method to be newly defined:
 Enter the following:
 Enter the name of your method in the "ID" field.
 Enter the purpose of the method, for example, in the "Description" field.
 Input the corresponding method parameters in the other boxes.
 Click Create. Your new method will now be included in the list in the left area of the dialog. You
have now defined the method.
 Click Close to close the dialog.

Defining custom standard substances

Defining custom standard substances
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Standard samples" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Standards.
 Click New. The input boxes on the right area are now empty. Enter the data of the standard
sample to be newly defined.
 For the substance, enter...
 ... the name of the substance in the "name" field.
 ... the theoretical element content in percent in the "Conc. [%]" fields (or in ppm in the
"Conc. [ppm]" fields respectively). If you enter 0 for the theoretical element content of a
substance element, the element is ignored in the calculation.
 ... the permissible tolerance for each element in the "Tolerance [%]" fields (usually 5%).
 Click Create. Your new standard sample will now be included in the list in the left area of the
dialog.
 You have now defined the standard substance.
 Click Close to close the dialog.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 322

Operation with the chemiluminescence detector (CLD)

Target group
Personnel with basic knowledge of chemistry and experience with laboratory work, e. g. chemistry
laboratory workers.

Purpose
This section describes the usage of the CLS and the modification to CLD operation.

Note
This section is only relevant for the vario TOC cube instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 323

General information
The measuring principle:
During the combustion process the nitrogen in the sample is converted to NO at a rate of >80 %. The
NO rate depends on the combustion temperature, the catalyst and the nitrogen compound. The NO
goes to the detector, where the reaction with the ozone (O3, produced in the detector) takes place. By
this reaction, nitrogen dioxide in an electronic excited state (NO2*) is produced. NO2* relaxes with
emission of a photon in the wavelength range 600-3000 nm (maximum at 1200 nm).

TNb + O2  NO

NO+O3  NO2*

NO2*  NO2 + h

The detection of the emission appears at slight vacuum (ca. 400 mbar) in order to minimize
luminescence quenching by collsision between molecules.

Technical specifications
Analytical characteristics
The following table explains the analytical characteristics:
Analytical characteristic Comments
Analysis method Determination of the total bound nitrogen (TNb) in aqueous samples
by means of high temperature combustion and conversion to NO.
Detector Chemiluminescence detection (CLD).
Sample volume 0.05 - 2 ml
Working range Detection limit: 8 µg/l
Measuring range: 25 µg/l - 1000 mg/l (with Gas split)
Precision / standard deviation < 2 % for ammonium/nitrate mixed standard
(TNb concentration 10 mg/l, injection volume 0.5 ml)
Duration of analysis 3 - 10 minutes
(depending on selected
measuring method and
concentration)
Calibration Linear and non-linear curve adjustment; total work range.
Data storage and data output Storage on hard disk or external storage media.
LIMS transfer possible.
Data output to screen and printer.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 324

Functional diagrams
Functional diagram, sensitive measuring range
The following illustration shows the flow diagram of the vario TOC cube with CLD for the sensitive
measuring range:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 325

Functional diagram, insensitive measuring range

The following illustration shows the flow diagram of the vario TOC cube with CLD for the insensitive
measuring range:

Installation
Note
The measures described in this section must be performed only during the first-time installation of the
CLD.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 326

Installation
Please observe the following instruction:
Risk Hot parts and live parts!
During installation there is a risk of burning or electric shocks.
Before the installation:
 Allow the furnaces to cool down.
 Quit the software and switch off the instrument.
 Disconnect the power supply plug.

Proceed as follows:
 Open the right side door.
 In the cable duct (1) there is a ready-to-use cable with a 9 pin D-SUB plug. Lead that cable to the
board (2) located below the cable duct.

 Insert the delivered RS232 module (1) into the middle slot of the board and fix it with the four
screws (2).

 Connect the cable from the cable duct to the 9 pin D-SUB female of the RS232 module.
 Close the right side door again.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 327

 Connect the data terminal at the CLD and the CLD connector (1) at the vario TOC cube via the
delivered data cable.

Perparing the measurement of low/high N concentrations

Note
The total measuring range is divided into two sub-ranges:
 Sensitive range for the measurement of low N concentrations (0.025 - 100 mg/l).
 Insensitive range for the measurement of high N concentrations (5 - 1000 mg/l).

The following describes how to prepare the system for the corresponding measuring range.

Preparation for the measurement of low N concentrations (0.025 - 100 mg/l)

The following picture shows the rear view of both instruments:

Legend:
1 vario TOC cube
2 CLD
3 Hose line no. 80
4 Outlet IR
5 Hose line (thick) /
inlet CLD (Sample Inlet)

Proceed as follows:
 Screw the hose line (thick) to the connector "Sample Inlet" at the CLD (5).
 Connect the hose line no. 80 (thin) (3) to the connector "Outlet IR" at the vario TOC cube (4).
 Plug the opposite end of hose line no. 80 (3) into the thick hose line at the CLD (5).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 328

Preparation for the measurement of high N concentrations (5 - 1000 mg/l)

The follwing picture shows details of the left side of the vario TOC cube:

Legend:
1 Hose line no. 77
2 Water trap
3 Hose line no. 76
4 Double manifold with holding angle
5 Capillary
6 Hose line no. 79
7 Rear wall opening

Proceed as follows:
 Open the left side wall.
 Mount the double manifold with the holding angle (4) to the lower profile rail of the casing by
means of the delivered slot nuts and screws. Make sure the distance to the rear corner is about
190 mm.
 Remove hose line no. 115 between water trap (2) and capillary (5).
 Connect the free connector of the water trap and the manifold by means of the hose line line no.
76 (3).
 Connect the free connector of the capillary and the manifold by means of the hose line line no. 77
(1).
 Remove the cap of the opening in the rear wall (7).
 Connect the hose line no. 79 (6) to the manifold and lead it outwards through the opening in the
rear wall (7).
 Screw the hose line (thick) to the connector "Sample Inlet" at the CLD.
 Plug the opposite end of hose line no. 79 (1) into the thick hose line at the CLD.

Note

Observe the following items during operation in the high measuring range:
 Roughly, the set-up consists of a gas split which leads approx. 80 % of the measuring gas into
the IR, the remaining amount into the CLD. This in turn means that the whole system (not only
the N channel) has to be re-calibrated since the IR no longer receives 100 % of the measuring
gas.
 If the system is to be operated in solids mode (see next paragraph) the hose line no. 79 must be
removed from the manifold and be replaced by a blind plug, since due to possible matrix
dependencies of the calibration no gas split operation should be used in the solids mode.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Variants and modifications 329

Changing from high to low measuring range

If the system was prepared for the high measuring range and has afterwards to be prepared for the
low measuring range the triple manifold can be left in the instrument. Proceed as follows:
 Remove the one end of hose line no. 79 from the thick hose line at the CLD.
 Loosen the opposite end of the hose tube no. 79 from the triple manifold and replace it by the
delivered blind plug (1). The hose line no. 79 can be left in the instrument.

 Connect the hose line no. 80 (thin) to the connector "Outlet IR" at the vario TOC cube.
 Plug the opposite end of hose line no. 80 into the thick hose line at the CLD.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 11

Menu and dialog descriptions

Target group
Personnel involved with the instrument.

Purpose
This section describes the dialogs and commands in the various menus in the software.

Note
The order of the menu commands in this document corresponds to the menu structure of the
instrument software.

If the invokation of a menu command opens a dialog the corresponding dialog wil be described
directly instead of describing the menu command.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 332

Dialog descriptions key

Element types
The following list provides pictures of element types that feature in the dialog descriptions:
Element type Example picture
Label

Dropdown listbox

Checkbox

Listbox

Radiobutton

Button

Sliding controller

Listbox column

Textbox

Textbox/label

Textbox with checkbox

Textbox with buttons

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 333

File menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 334

File > New (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command creates a new document.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Invocation via hot key: CTRL + N

Select document name (Dialog)

Function
The function of this dialog differs depending on how you open it:
 If it was opened via File > Export/Import > Export, you can select a document to be exported.
 If it was opened via File > Open you can select a file to load from the database into sample
memory.
 If it was opened via File > Save or File > Save as you can select a file to save from the sample
memory into the database.

Open
Open the dialog via:
Menu command Button Hot key
Datei > Export/Import > --- CTRL + E
Export
File > Open CTRL + O

File > Save CTRL + S

File > Save As. --- ---

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Textbox/label  Field to input a document name, that is automatically
completed if necessary.
 Field displaying a document name if a document is
selected in the listbox below.
Name / Date / Listboxes Fields listing all documents in the database if the filter
Time / Author / function is not enabled.
Mode / Previous
versions /
Signatures
Selection Checkbox If activated the filter elements "Mode", "From", "To",
"Name" and "Author" will appear.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 335

Label Element type Meaning

Mode Dropdown listbox Field in which you can select the operating mode as the
filter criterion. Only documents in the selected operating
mode are displayed.
from Textbox with Field in which you can select a date as the filter criterion.
checkbox Only documents as from the selected date are displayed if
the checkbox next to the date display is checked.
In connection with the "To" textbox you can limit the display
to documents in a certain period.
to Textbox with Field in which you can select a date as the filter criterion.
checkbox Only documents up to the selected date are displayed if the
checkbox next to the date display is checked.
In connection with the "From" textbox you can limit the
display to documents in a certain period.
Name Textbox Field in which you can select a document name as the filter
criterion. Only documents with the selected name are
displayed. Wildcards such as ? and * are also allowed.
Author Textbox Field in which you can select an author as the filter
criterion. Only documents from the selected author are
displayed. Wildcards such as ? and * are also allowed.
OK Button Depending on how the dialog was opened:
 Loads the selected document in the current version
(File > Open)
 or saves data under the selected name in the
database. (File > Export/Import > Export; File >
Save; File > Save as)
Previous Button Opens the "Select version" dialog in which you can select a
versions version of the document. When you select a previous
version you cannot edit it but only view or print it out.
Previous versions are read-only.
Signatures Button Opens the "Verify digital signatures" dialog in which you
can verify a document's digital signatures.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Depending on how the dialog was opened, some elements may not be enabled.

Listbox columns
The following describes the columns of the listbox.
Label Element type Meaning
Name Listbox column Document name
Date/Time Listbox column Date and time when the document was last saved.
Author Listbox column Name of the user who was logged in at the time of last
saving.

Mode Listbox column Analysis mode in which the document was created. The
document can only be loaded in the mode in which it was
created, otherwise a message is displayed.
Previous versions Listbox column A figure in parentheses indicates how many previous
versions of the document exist.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 336

Label Element type Meaning

Signatures Listbox column Column displaying for what purpose the document was
already signed.
 If the document is unsigned, the column is empty.
 For the first signature the column displays "created".
 For the second signature the column displays "checked".
 For the third signature the column displays "released".
Documents with a signature cannot be edited after loading
but rather only viewed or given another signature for
monitoring purposes.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Data backup and printing (on page 170).
 Exporting analysis data to MS Excel and viewing (on page 171).
 Finding documents (on page 176).
 Creating new documents (on page 175).
 Export analysis data for support (on page 274).

Select version (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can select a version of a document and load it from the database into sample
memory. This dialog is only relevant if 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled.

Open
Open the dialog by clicking the Previous versions button in the "Select document name" dialog.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Label This field displays the document to load if you selected a
document in the listbox below.
--- Listbox This field lists all versions of document in the database
along with the index number, creation date, and user
name:
 The current version is prefixed with index number 0.
 Previous versions are prefixed with index numbers -1,
-2, etc.
OK Button Loads the selected version into sample memory.
If you load a previous version, you cannot edit it but only
view or print it out. Previous versions are read-only.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 337

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Finding documents (on page 176).
 Versioning (on page 75).
 21 CFR Part 11 functionality (on page 74).
 Consequences of modifying analysis data (on page 100).
 Select document name (on page 334).

Save file as (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can specify the following for the file to export:
 Directory in which to save the export file,
 File name of the export file,
 File type of the export file.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting File > Export/Import > Export. First the "Select document name" is
displayed in which you select the export file before the "File saves as" dialog is displayed.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Save Dropdown listbox Field in which you select the directory to save in.
--- Listbox Field displaying all files in the selected directory that match
the file type specified below.
File name Textbox/label Field displaying the name of the file selected in the
previous "Select file name" dialog. You can still edit this
name.
File type Dropdown listbox Field in which you select the file type for the document
export.
 MS Excel format (export without graphical information)
 MS Access database file (export with graphical
information)
Save Button Exports the file according to the settings.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Exporting analysis data to MS Excel and viewing (on page 171).
 Export analysis data for support (on page 274).
 Overview of export and import file formats (on page 171).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 338

File > Delete (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command allows you to remove the current open document from the database. Before deleting,
the program displays a dialog in which you must confirm that you want to delete the document.

Note
If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, the "Comment change" dialog is displayed after deleting
the document from the database. The user must justify deletion of the document in this dialog.

Comment modification (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog the user must justify certain actions with a comment. The comment input in this dialog is
stored in the logbook together with information on the action. This allows you to track actions
performed by various users.

Open
The dialog opens automatically,
 if the user makes any changes that have to be commented
 and if 21CFR functionality is enabled.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Textbox Field to input a comment.
The comment must be at least 10 characters long.
Close Button Closes the dialog.
The button is only enabled if the comment contains 10
characters or more.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Granting authorizations (on page 96).
 Reorganize database (on page 105).
 Defining logon timeout (on page 90).
 Creating new sections (on page 91).
 Defining the analyzer / PC interface (on page 98).
 Defining the autoexport directory (on page 104).
 21 CFR Part 11 functionality (on page 74).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 339

Sign (Dialog)
Function
In the dialog:
 the user is warned about signing documents that may still need to be edited. After signing, the
document is read-only.
 you can sign a document with an electronic signature. A document may be signed up to three
times.

Open
You can open this dialog, if 21CFR11 functionality is enabled, via File > Sign:

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
created Radiobutton The "created" signature is assigned to the document.
This is the first signature a document may receive.
checked Radiobutton The "checked" signature is assigned to the document.
A document may only be given the "checked" signature if it
has already been given the "created" signature.
released Radiobutton The "released" signature is assigned to the document.
A document may only be given the "released" signature if it
has already been given the "created" and "checked"
signatures.
Name Textbox Field to input the user's name defined in the signature
program.
Password Textbox Field to input the password defined in the signature
program.
Signing Button Creates the signature. The program checks whether the
signature is valid on the basis of a key. The result of the
signature authenticity check is displayed in another dialog.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Signing documents (on page 102).
 21 CFR Part 11 functionality (on page 74).

Verify digital signature (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can verify the authenticity of a document's digital signatures. This dialog is only
relevant if 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 340

Open
You can open this dialog, if 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, via:
 File > Verify or via
 the Signatures button in the "Select document name" dialog.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
created Radiobutton verify "created" signature.
If the radio button is locked, the signature does not yet
exist.
checked Radiobutton verify "checked" signature.
If the radio button is locked, the signature does not yet
exist.
released Radiobutton verify "released" signature.
If the radio button is locked, the signature does not yet
exist.
Verify Button Starts verification of the selected signature.
Opens a dialog displaying the results of verification.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Checking documents for authenticity (on page 179).
 21 CFR Part 11 functionality (on page 74).
 Database (on page 59).

Export to LIMS (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can specify how to perform manual transfer to a higher-level LIM system before the
transfer is started.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting File > Export/Import > Export to LIMS.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
export all samples Radiobutton Exports all samples in sample memory.
export only Radiobutton Exports selected samples in sample memory only.
selected samples
You can only select this radio button if at least one sample
is selected.
OK Button Starts the export according to the settings.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 341

Label Element type Meaning

Cancel Button Aborts the process and discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Exporting LIMS data (on page 172).
 Laboratory information and management system (LIMS) (on page 73).
 LIMS export settings (on page 93).
 Conditions for operating the LIMS (on page 73).
 LIMS settings (on page 412).

Export peak graphics (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can define settings for exporting graphic data. For each sample for which a graphic
shall be exported a text file will be created. The names of these files have the following format:

easgraph.xxx,

where xxx represents the serial number of the corresponding sample (e.g. "easgraph.001" for sample
no. 1 etc.). If a file with the same name already exists, the content of this file will be overwritten with
the new graphic information.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting File > Export/Import > Export graphics.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
export all samples Radiobutton The graphic data of all samples listed in the sample view
will be exported. For each sample a new file will be
generated.
export only Radiobutton The graphic data of the samples marked in the sample
selected samples view will be exported. For each sample a new file will be
generated.
Directory Textbox Defines the name of the directory where the graphic files
shall be filed.
... Button Allows the selection of the directory via the dialog "Browse
for folder".
OK Button Starts the export according to the settings.
Cancel Button Aborts the process and discards settings not yet saved.

Configure report (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can define up to three headers to appear on every page of the log printout and the
type of printout.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 342

Open
Open the dialog via:
Menu command Button Hot key
File > Print CTRL + P

File > Report configuration --- ---

File > Print preview CTRL + S

File > Report configuration --- ---

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Title":
Label Element type Meaning
Line 1 Textbox Field to input a header.
Line 2 Textbox Field to input a header.
Line 3 Textbox Field to input a header.

In section "Report options":

Label Element type Meaning
Print parameters Checkbox The analysis log is preceded by a list of the currently valid
parameters.
Print coefficients Checkbox The analysis log is preceded by a list of the currently valid
calibration coefficients.
Print tagged Checkbox Only samples that are highlighted in the text field will be
samples only printed.
Print colors Checkbox The printout is in color.
If you are using a black/white printer and the gray values
corresponding to the colors are unsatisfactory, do not
check this box.
Print selected Checkbox By activating this option, only columns are printed which
columns only were selected in the dialog "Select print columns".
--- Dropdown listbox This allows the selection which screen shall be printed:
text, graphics, statistics, calibration. This option is not
accessible if the dialog was invoked via File > Report
configuration.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Data backup and printing (on page 170).
 Configure report (on page 169).
 Display print preview (on page 170).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 343

 Optimizing data evaluation (on page 109).

Print (Dialog)
Function
In this dialog you can define print settings. The appearance of this dialog depends on the type of
printer installed / activated. It is usually used to define the following:
 the number of copies to print,
 the print format, and
 print quality.

Open
Open the dialog via:
Menu command Button Hot key
File > Print CTRL + P

First the "Configure report" dialog is displayed, in which you can select the headers and type of
printing, before the "Print" dialog is displayed.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Printer":
Label Element type Meaning
Name Dropdown listbox Field displaying a list of printers connected to the
computer.
Properties Button Opens a dialog in which you can define the properties of
the printer selected on the left in the "Name" field.
Status Label Displays the status of the selected printer.
Type Label Displays the type of the selected printer.
Location Label Displays the location of the selected printer.
Comment Label Displays a comment on the printer.
Print to file Checkbox The print output is sent to a file instead of to a printer.

Note: Use the Windows control panel to install printers and configure printer connections.

In section "Print range":

Label Element type Meaning
All Radiobutton Prints all pages.
Pages from ... to Radiobutton Prints a certain range. You can define the start and end
pages in the textbox next to this button.
Selection Radiobutton Prints the selection only.

In section "Copies":
Label Element type Meaning
Number of copies Textbox with buttons Field to input the number of copies to print.
Sort Checkbox Prints multiple complete copies of a document
successively.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 344

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Starts the printing process according to the settings.
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Data backup and printing (on page 170).
 Configure report (on page 169).
 Display print preview (on page 170).
 Optimizing data evaluation (on page 109).

Print preview (Dialog)

Function
This dialog displays the active document as it will print out.

Open
Open the dialog via:
Menu command Button Hot key
File > Print preview ---

First the "Configure report" dialog is displayed, in which you can select the headers and type of
printing, before the "Print preview" dialog is displayed.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Print Button Opens the "Print" dialog in which you can start a print job.
Next Button Displays the next page to print.
Previous Button Displays the previous page to print.
One Pages/Two Button Determines whether you want one or two pages to be
Pages visible.
Zoom in Button Zooms in on the page.
Zoom out Button Zooms out of the page.
Close Button Closes the dialog.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Display print preview (on page 170).
 Optimizing data evaluation (on page 109).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 345

Printer setup (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can specify the printer and its connection. The appearance of this dialog depends
on the type of printer installed / activated.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting File > Printer Setup.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Printer":
Label Element type Meaning
Name Dropdown listbox Field displaying a list of printers connected to the
computer.
Properties Button Opens a dialog in which you can define the properties of
the printer selected on the left in the "Name" field.
Status Label Displays the status of the selected printer.
Type Label Displays the type of the selected printer.
Location Label Displays the location of the selected printer.
Comment Label Displays a comment on the printer.

Note: Use the Windows control panel to install printers and configure printer connections.

In section "Paper":
Label Element type Meaning
Size Dropdown listbox Field in which you can select the size of the paper to print
on.
Source Dropdown listbox Field to select the paper tray.

In section "Alignment":
Label Element type Meaning
Portrait Radiobutton The page is in portrait format.
Landscape format Radiobutton The page is in landscape format.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
Network Button Connects to a shared network.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Printer setup (on page 111).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 346

Open (Dialog)
Function
In this dialog you can specify the following for the file to import:
 Directory containing the file to import,
 File name of the import file,
 File type of the import file.

Note
You can only import files:
 created with the operating software via File > Export/Import > Export.
 generated by the "Balance" weighing data capture program.

Imported data are stored in sample memory. When you import weighing data (Balance files), the data
can be deposited in sample memory in different ways.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting File > Export/Import > Import.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Search in Dropdown listbox In this field you can select the directory containing the
import file.
--- Listbox This field displays files in the selected directory that match
the specified file type.
File name Textbox/label If you have selected a file in the listbox above, the name of
the selected file is displayed here. You can still edit this
name.
File type Dropdown listbox In this field you can select the file type of the document to
import.
 MS Excel format (export without graphical information)
 MS Access format (export with graphical information)
 Balance format (weighing data)
 Open Button Imports the file according to the settings.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Importing documents (on page 178).
 Administrative work on the database (on page 59).
 Overview of export and import file formats (on page 171).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 347

Configure backup (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can define settings for creating backups of the database. Backup copies the
complete existing database file to a certain directory under a different name, thereby "capturing" a
certain state.

In this dialog you specify

 what directory to save the backup file to,
 how many backup files to keep at the same time,
 when the backup starts.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting File > Backup/Restore > Backup.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Backup":
Label Element type Meaning
Select Button Opens the "Find directory" dialog in which you can select
the directory to save to.
The operating software must have write access to the
directory in order to be able to save the backup correctly.
--- Label Field displaying the selected directory.
Keep max. last n Textbox with buttons Field to input the number of backup files to keep at the
backup files same time.
If you input 7, for example, and if the backup is performed
once day, you can track the database file back in intervals
of one day up to one week. However, avoid keeping too
many backup files for reasons of memory. If the number of
backup files already equals the maximum number, the
oldest file is deleted when you create a new backup copy.

In section "Start backup":

Label Element type Meaning
Never Radiobutton The backup is never started automatically.
Daily Radiobutton The backup is started automatically once a day. You can
set the time in the textbox next to the button.
Every Radiobutton The backup is started automatically several times a day.
 In the textboxes next to the button you can specify the
intervals in minutes, hours or days.
 In the following textboxes you can set the date and
time as of when to start backing up several times a
day.
Too frequent backups can disrupt the analysis and the
operating software once the database file has reached a
certain size.
Once Radiobutton The backup is started automatically once. In the textboxes
next to the button you can define the date and time to start
the backup.
Backup now Button Manually starts the backup immediately.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 348

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
Next backup Label Field displaying when the next backup will start according
to the settings.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Backup der Datenbank starten (on page 105).
 Administrative work on the database (on page 59).
 Database backup (on page 60).

Clean database (Dialog)

Function
In the dialog:
 the user is warned about reorganizing the database without backing up first.
 you can start a backup,
 you can start reorganizing the database.
Caution Data loss!
Reorganizing the database irrevocably deletes all sample data and the contents
of the database logbook.
Always backup your data before reorganizing the database.

What does "Clean" mean?

The size of the database is limited to 2 gigabytes, so it is necessary to reorganize the database from
time to time. The software displays a warning if the size of the database exceeds 1 gigabyte or if
available disk space is less than 1 gigabyte.

Reorganization removes all sample data and the contents of the logbook from the database file, but
retains the other data such as settings, coefficients, etc.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting File > Backup/Restore > Clean.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Backup now Button Opens the "File save as" dialog in which you can save the
database.
Reorganize Button Starts reorganization of the database. The button is only
enabled if you have previously created a backup.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 349

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Reorganize database (on page 105).
 Database (on page 59).
 Administrative work on the database (on page 59).

Restore database (Dialog)

Function
In the dialog:
 the user is warned that importing an old database file irrevocably deletes all the current data,
 you can start a backup of the current database file before importing the old database file,
 you can reimport an old database file.
Caution Data loss!
Restoring the database via Restore irrevocably overwrites all sample data, the
contents of the logbook and the database configfuration parameters.
Always backup your data before restoring the database via Restore.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting File > Backup/Restore > Restore.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Backup now Button Opens the "Save file as" dialog in which you can backup
the current database file under any name.
Restore Button Opens the "Open file" dialog in which you can select an old
database file to reimport. The button is only enabled if you
have previously created a backup.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Reloading an old database file (on page 106).
 Administrative work on the database (on page 59).

Log in as (Dialog)
Function
This dialog is used to input user data.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 350

Open
Open the dialog:
 automatically when you start the operating software or
 automatically if the operating software is already running and you have not input any data for a
long time or
 automatically if you call a menu command which requires a higher access permisson than the
current one or
 via File > User logon if another user shall take over the operation of the system.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
User Textbox Field to input the user name.
Password Textbox Field to input the password.
Domain Textbox Field to input the domain for company networks.
OK Button Launches the operating software or applies the changed
user data if the operating software is already running.
Cancel Button Aborts the process or discards the new user data if the
operating software is already running.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Starting the operating software (on page 138).
 User administration (on page 95).

File > Logoff (Command)

What is the command used for?
The current user will be logged off. This allows a log-on of a different user while the program is
running. The logon dialog appears in which the log-on of a different user can be performed.

File > Exit (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command closes the operating software. If a document is open, the program prompts the user to
save it.

Short cuts

Invocation via the Windows symbol:

Invocation via hot key: ALT + F4

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 351

File > Export/Import > Create Excel sheet (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command saves the content of the sample view to an Excel file.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 352

Edit menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Edit > Redo (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command restores an action that you have previously undone.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Invocation via hot key: CTRL + Y

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 353

Edit > Undo (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command undoes a previous action.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Invocation via hot key: CTRL + Z

Note
You can undo up to five previous actions. You can no longer undo an action if you have loaded a
document or if the analysis system has received data during an analysis run in the meantime.

The undo function only applies to actions immediately connected with editing sample data.

Edit > Cut (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command removes selected cells and copies them to the clipboard.

Short cuts
Invocation via hot key: CTRL + X

Note
You cannot execute this command if no data are selected.

Cutting and copying data to the clipboard overwrites the data previously stored in the clipboard.

Edit > Copy (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command copies selected cells and/or selected rows to the clipboard.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Invocation via hot key: CTRL + C

Note
You cannot execute this command if no data are selected.

Copying data to the clipboard replaces the data previously stored in the clipboard.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 354

Edit > Paste (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command inserts a copy of the clipboard contents at the cursor position.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Invocation via hot key: CTRL + V

Note
This command is not available if the clipboard is empty.

Edit > Insert line (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command inserts a line at a certain position in sample memory.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Note
The line at which to insert the new line must be selected. Executing this command inserts the new
line at the desired position.

The inserted line is an "empty" line, i.e. every column is filled with its default value.

Edit > Delete line (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command deletes a line at a certain position in sample memory.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Note
The line to delete must be selected. Executing this command deletes the line and all subsequent lines
move up one line.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 355

Swap samples (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can swap unprocessed samples in sample memory, e.g. if you want to prioritze
urgent samples.

Note
The samples are only swapped in sample memory. After displaying the dialog, you must swap the
appropriate samples on the carousel by hand.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Edit > Swap.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Swap sample No. Textbox Field to input the number of the sample to swap.
with sample No. Textbox Field to input the number of the sample to swap.
OK Button Swaps samples in sample memory.
If the input is incorrect, i.e. if you specify samples that are
already finished, you can quit the dialog by clicking OK.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Prioritizing urgent samples (on page 142).
 Optimizing sample data editing (on page 108).

Edit > Modify (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command allows you to edit a finished (analyzed) sample.

Note
The field you want to change must be selected. After executing this command you can edit the
contents of the field.

If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, a new version of the document is created the next time it is
saved.

Set stop tag (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can specify the sample at which to set the stop marker. Usually, the program
automatically moves the stop marker while you input sample data. Therefore it is only necessary to
move the stop marker manually in special cases.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 356

Open
Open the dialog:
 via the menu command Edit > Stop tag or
 by clicking the right mouse key to the corresponding sample cell. Select Set stop tag... from the
popping-up context menu.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Stop marker at: Textbox with Field to input the sample number at which to set the stop
buttons marker.
You can also set the sample number in the textbox using
the arrows.
OK Button Saves the setting.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Stopping continuous analysis (on page 158).
 Right mouse button function (on page 71).

Select current sample (Dialog)

Function
You set the number of the current sample in the dialog. The current sample is the sample that is
currently being analyzed (analysis mode) or that will be analyzed next (idle mode). It is only
necessary to set the current sample after breakdowns (power failure, etc.), for example if the carousel
position no longer matches the serial sample number.

Note
The current sample is only set in sample memory. Therefore, it is necessary to check that the data of
the current sample in sample memory match the data of the sample on the carousel that will actually
be analyzed next. Otherwise, measurements will be incorrect.

Open
Open the dialog:
 via the menu command Edit > Current sample or
 by clicking the right mouse key to the corresponding sample cell. Select Set current sample...
from the popping-up context menu.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Current sample at: Textbox with Field to input a sample number
buttons
You can also set the sample number in the textbox using
the arrows.
OK Button Saves the setting.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 357

Label Element type Meaning

Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Reacting to a power failure (on page 271).
 Right mouse button function (on page 71).

Set current weighed sample (Dialog)

Function
You set the number of the current weighed sample in the dialog. The current weighed sample is the
sample that receives a weighing value next. It is only necessary to set the current weighed sample
after breakdowns, for example if you lose a sample already when you put it on the carousel and
therefore need to weigh in another sample.

Open
Open the dialog:
 via the menu command Edit > Current weight or
 by clicking the right mouse key to the corresponding sample cell. Select Set current weight...
from the popping-up context menu.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Current weighed Textbox with Field to input a sample number
sample at: buttons
You can also set the sample number in the textbox using
the arrows.
OK Button Saves the setting.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Edit > Update hole positions (Command)

What is the command used for?
By this command the hole positions of the individual samples will be calculated from anew.

Note
After invoking this command the dialog "Recalculate Hole Postions " opens.

Here you can define when the recalculation of the hole positions shall be started. Samples with a low
number will not be influenced by the recalculation.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 358

View menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 359

View > Toggle (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command changes the field in the combi view.

Note
Execute this command several times to switch to the desired view. The sequence is: Calibration view
- progression graph - statistics view - calibration view, etc.

Also by clicking on the caption bar of the combi view you can change to the reqested view.

Zoom in/out (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can zoom in/out details of the graphical progression of an analysis or the calibration
graph.

Open
Open the dialog via:
Menu command Button Hot key
View > Zoom in/out ---

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Zoom factor Dropdown listbox Field to select the zoom factor. You can choose between
zoom factors of 1; 2, 5; 10; 20; 50 and 100. At factor > 1
the graph view is enclosed by scrollbars so that you can
select a specific area.
OK Button Zoom in/out of the graph.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Setting the size of the graph (on page 169)

Configure view (Dialog)

Function
This dialog is used to configure the sample view. It is possible to show/hide every column and to
change the display sequence.

Open
Open the dialog via View > Gridview > Configure. The sample pane must be active in order to open
the dialog.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 360

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Display column Label All sample data listed in this column are displayed.
Hide column Label All sample data listed in this column are not displayed.
^ Button Changes the display sequence of the sample data.
Moves selected samples one position to the left in the
sample view (text view).
<<< Button Moves the sample data from the "Hide" section into the
"Display" section.
>>> Button Moves the sample data from the "Display" section into
the "Hide" section.
v Button Changes the display sequence of the sample data.
Moves selected samples one position to the right in the
sample view (text view).
Reset Button Shows all columns and resets the display sequence to
the default setting.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Number of decimal places

You can specify the number of decimal places used in columns in the "Column properties" dialog.
Open this dialog from the "Configure view" dialog with the aid of the context menu. See Column
properties (on page 364).

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Specifying the number of decimal places (on page 160).
 Configuring the sample pane (on page 160).

Save views (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can save the current sample view that the user has configured according to his own
requirements.

Open
Open the dialog via View > Sample pane > Save configuration. The sample pane must be active in
order to open the dialog.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Textbox/label Field to input a name under which to save the view.
If you have selected a file in the listbox, the name of the file
is displayed here and you can overwrite the file.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 361

Label Element type Meaning

--- Listbox Field listing the saved views.
OK Button Saves the view under the selected name.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Saving the sample view (on page 161)
 Optimizing data evaluation (on page 109).

Load views (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can reload saved sample views. However, you can only load a view if the view was
saved in the same operating mode as the current mode in which the analyzer is running.

Open
Open the dialog via View > Gridview > Load configuration.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Textbox/label Field displaying the name of the selected view.
--- Listbox Field listing the available views.
Load Button Loads the selected view.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Loading a sample view (on page 161).

Delete views (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can delete saved sample views.

Open
Open the dialog via View > Gridview > Delete configuration. The sample pane must be active in
order to open the dialog.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 362

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Textbox/label Field displaying the name of the selected view.
--- Listbox Field listing the available views.
Delete Button Deletes the selected view.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

View > Gridview > Auto align (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command optimizes the sample view:
 The individual columns are automatically widened or narrowed to make the headers and entries
completely visible.

Configure graph view (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can define the appearance of the graph view.

Open
Open the dialog via View > Graphic > Configure. Progression view (graph view) must be enabled in
order to open the dialog.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Y axis configuration":

Label Element type Meaning
{Graph type} Checkbox Displays the appropriate progression graph. You can set
the scale range of the progression graph in the adjacent
textbox.

Note: The number of progression graphs you can display at the same time is limited to four for the
sake of clarity.

In section "Zero line":

Label Element type Meaning
At height Textbox with buttons In this field you specify which of the horizontal grid lines in
the graph view is assumed to be the zero line. A value of 0
means that the zero line is at the bottom edge of the graph
view.

In section "X axis configuration":

Label Element type Meaning
Time axis Textbox In this field you can define the division of the time axis (X
axis).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 363

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
During analysis Checkbox During an ongoing analysis you cannot view a progression
run display current graph of a previously analyzed sample.
sample only
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Data backup and printing (on page 170).
 Configuring the graph view (on page 168).
 Right mouse button function (on page 71).

View > Gaphic > Auto align (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command optimizes the graph view:
 The graph is scaled so that it is completely visible.

Configure statistics view (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can define the appearance of the statistics view.

Open
Open the dialog via View > Statistic > Configure. The statistics view must be active in order to open
the dialog.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Show":
Label Element type Meaning
{Element name} Checkbox Only display statistical data for the corresponding
element if this box is checked.

In section "show/hide":
Label Element type Meaning
Std. dev. absolute Checkbox Only displays absolute standard deviation of the
individual groups if this box is checked.
Std. dev. relative Checkbox Only displays relative standard deviation of the individual
groups if this box is checked.
Delta Checkbox Only displays the delta value of the individual groups if
this box is checked.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 364

Note:The percentage contents and the computed mean value are always displayed and cannot be
hidden.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Configure statistics view (on page 161).
 Right mouse button function (on page 71).

View > Statistic > Auto align (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command optimizes the statistics view:
 The individual columns are automatically widened or narrowed to make the headers and entries
completely visible.

Select columns (Dialog)

Function
The dialog allows selection of the elements for the enhanced display of the sample analyzed most
recently.

Open
Open the dialog via View > Recent sample.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
{Column name} Checkbox Displays the corresponding column only if this box is
checked.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Column properties (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you specify the number of decimal places.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 365

Open
Proceed as follows:
 Activate the sample view.
 Open the "Configure view" dialog in the operating software by selecting View > Gridview >
Configure.
 Select the column in the "Show" section whose decimal places you want to set and click the right
mouse button.
 Open the "Column properties" dialog by selecting the Properties... menu item.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Column Label This field displays the column for which to set the number of
decimal places.
Decimal places Textbox Field to input the desired number of decimal places. 0 to 7
decimal places are possible.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Specifying the number of decimal places (on page 160).
 Right mouse button function (on page 71).
 Configure view (on page 160).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 366

Menu Wizards
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 367

Calibration Wizard
Function
The calibration wizard supports you in creating a calibration series. The data required for the creation
have to be entered in several steps. After completion the program enters the corresponding sample
data automatically into the sample view.

Open
Open the wizard via Wizards > Calibration.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In step 1:

A general introduction is given in this step. No settings will be made here.

In step 2:
Label Element type Meaning
Number of Radiobutton Defines the number analysis which shall be taken from a
measurements per sample container.
sample
Note: When selecting this option in connection with the
injection volume make sure that the sample in the
corresponding container is available in sufficient quantity!
Number of run-in Textbox with Defines the number of the conditioning samples. The
samples buttons conditioning samples are placed in first place in the analysis
series.
Number of blanks Textbox with Defines the number of the blank value samples. The blank
buttons value samples are placed after the conditioning samples in
the analysis series.
Number of Textbox with Defines the number of the calibration points. The number of
calibration points buttons calibration samples is calculated as follows:
Total number = Number of calibration points x Number of
measurements per sample.
The calibration samples are placed after the blank value
samples in the analysis series.

In step 3:
Label Element type Meaning
Method Dropdown Defines the method with which the analysis series shall be
Listbox processed. The popped-up list box displays the names of all
currently available methods.
Label The description of the currently selected method is
- displayed in this field. This facilitates the selection of the
proper method.

In step 4:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 368

Label Element type Meaning

Type of gradation Radiobutton Defines how the calibrations points are graduated. There
are two possibilities:
 Different volumes. Select this option if you use one
single parent solution for the calibration.
The gradation of the absolute content is done via
different injection volumes per calibration point.
 Different solutions. Select this option if you use
calibration standards with different concentration for the
calibration. The gradation of the absolute content is
done via different concentrations with equal injection
volumes.
from ...µl to ...µl Text fields These text fields are only accessible if the option "Different
volumes" is selected. Defines the minimum and maximum
injection volume. The gradation is done in equal distances,
depending of the selected number of calibration points. The
injection volume defined in the method will be ignored.
..µl Textbox These text field is only accessible if the option "Different
solutions" is selected. Defines the injection volume which is
valid for all calbiration samples. The injection volume
defined in the method will be ignored.

In step 5:
Label Element type Meaning
Standard name Dropdown Defines the standard with which the analysis series shall be
Listbox processed. The popped-up list box displays the names of all
currently available standards.
- Label The description of the currently selected standard is
displayed in this field. This facilitates the selection of the
proper standard.

In step 6:

In this last step you will find a list of notes on how to proceed after leaving the wizard. No settings will
be made here.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
Back Button Goes back to the previous step. This element is not
accessible in step 1.
Next Button Goes to the next step. This element is replaced by "Finish"
in the last step.
Finish Button Closes the wizard and prepares the settings for the display
in the sample view. This element is only available in the last
step.
Cancel Button Leaves the wizard, discards the settings made so far.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Background knowledge required for calibration (on page 48)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 369

System suitability test wizard

Function
The system suitability test wizard offers support for the creation of a sample series for the
performance of a system suitability test. The data required for the creation have to be entered in
several steps. After completion the program enters the corresponding sample data automatically into
the sample view.

Open
Open the wizard via Wizards > System suitability test.

Elements

The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In step 1:

A general introduction is given in this step. No settings will be made here.

In step 2:
Label Element type Meaning
Number of Radiobutton Defines the number analysis which shall be taken from a
measurements per sample container.
sample
Note: When selecting this option in connection with the
injection volume make sure that the sample in the
corresponding container is available in sufficient quantity!
Number of run-in Textbox with Defines the number of the conditioning samples. The
samples buttons conditioning samples are placed in first place in the analysis
series.
Number of blanks Textbox with Defines the number of the blank value samples. The blank
buttons value samples are placed after the conditioning samples in
the analysis series.
Number of easily Textbox with Defines the number of samples to be measured which are
digestible samples buttons considered to be easily digestible.
Number of hardly Textbox with Defines the number of samples to be measured which are
digestible samples buttons considered to be hardly digestible.
Method Dropdown Defines the method with which the analysis series shall be
Listbox processed. The popped-up list box displays the names of all
currently available methods.

In step 3:

In this last step you will find a list of notes on how to proceed after leaving the wizard. No settings will
be made here.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
Back Button Goes back to the previous step. This element is not
accessible in step 1.
Next Button Goes to the next step. This element is replaced by "Finish"
in the last step.
Finish Button Closes the wizard and prepares the settings for the display
in the sample view. This element is only available in the last
step.
Cancel Button Leaves the wizard, discards the settings made so far.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 370

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles concerning the dialog:
 System Suitability Test (on page 163)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 371

System menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 372

System > Auto run (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command starts continuous analysis, i.e. the system processes all samples in sample memory
up to the stop marker. Once the system reaches the stop marker, it either goes into idle mode or
sleep mode, depending on settings.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Note
You can only start the system if the following system conditions exist:
 System pressure is at least 800 mbar.
 Furnace temperatures are at most 50 °C below their setpoints.
 The system has detected that the base line is stable.

If one of these conditions is not met, the system does not start and a message is displayed.

System > Single run (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command starts a single analysis, i.e. the next sample in sample memory (= current sample) is
processed. After processing the single sample, the system goes into idle mode again, regardless of
sleep settings.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Note
If you execute this command while continuous analysis is running, continuous analysis stops after
finishing the current sample and the system goes into idle mode.

You can only start the system if the following system conditions exist:
 System pressure is at least 800 mbar.
 Furnace temperatures are at most 50 °C below their setpoints.
 The system has detected that the base line is stable.

If one of these conditions is not met, the system does not start and a message is displayed.

System > Stop (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command aborts a running analysis. The system goes into idle mode again, regardless of sleep
settings.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 373

Note
The "Abort analysis" dialog appears.

Observe the notes listed therein. Abort analysis only if either the sample has not been thrown in yet or
has been already completely combusted. In the latter case, make sure that the column does not
retain any element components, i.e. the desorption procedure has been completed. Otherwise, an
abortion leads to system contaminations combined with significant damages.

To abort a running analysis, you have to confirm the note displayed in the dialog first. Only after the
confirmation the Abort analysis button becomes accessible, thus allowing the abortion.

Acidify samples (Dialog)

Function
The function of this dialog allows the selective acidification of samples.

Open
Open the dialog
 via System > Acidify samples.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Samples range Textbox Defines the samples to be acidified.
Acid container Textbox Defines which container holds the acid reservoir.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Starts the acidification process.
Cancel Button Closes the dialog without actions.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Performing a measuring series (on page 144)
 Sample feeding (on page 376)

Select carousel position (Dialog)

Note
This function is only available in the solides modes.

Function
After a power failure or if you repeat initial startup and remove the carousel, it is necessary to readjust
the position of the carousel.

In the dialog:
 you are warned about adjusting the carousel position if the carousel contains samples,

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 374

 you can move the carousel to zero position or any other position.

Please observe the following instruction:

Caution Inserting multiple samples into the ball valve (only for
solid operation)
If there are samples in the carousel while you are changing the position of the
carousel via System > Carousel position, multiple samples may fall into the ball
valve at the same time. In this case, a service technician is required.
Before changing the position of the carousel, always remove all samples from the
carousel.

Note
Observe the following when adjusting the position of the carousel:

The carousel is moved so that the selected position is above the insertion opening. When the next
analysis starts, the carousel moves the next sample position above the insertion opening and drops
the sample. Therefore, it makes sense to select the previous position when moving the carousel.

Example: You want to move the carousel so as to analyze the sample at position 26 in the next
analysis. Therefore, select position 25. The carousel moves so far that position 25 is above the
insertion opening. When the next analysis starts, the carousel moves one position on during the
insertion process and thus drops the samples at position 26.

Open
Open the dialog via System > Carousel position.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
All samples removed Checkbox If you have removed all samples from the carousel, you
from the carousel must check this box. Otherwise the carousel will not move.
Position Radiobutton Moves the carousel moves to the desired position. You can
set the position number in the textbox to the right. You
must input the desired position number minus 1.
Reference run Radiobutton The carousel performs reference run, i.e. the carousel first
moves to a defined reference position and then to position
0 which has almost the same location.
OK Button Adjusts the position of the carousel, if confirmed above that
all samples have been removed from the carousel.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Performing measurement work (on page 143).
 Reacting to a power failure (on page 271).
 Performing calibration (on page 189, on page 193).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 375

System > Arm Up (Command)

What is the command used for?
By this command the sample arm is moved to its upper end position.

System > Arm Down (Command)

What is the command used for?
By this command the sample arm is moved to its lower end position.

Note
If the carousel is in an undefined position this command will be ignored.

System > Stirrer (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command will be turned on the stirrer which is mounted in the instrument.
If activated, a check will appear next to the menu item.

System > Auto zero (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command causes to set the current output values of the dectors to zero. The purpose is to reset
the signals to zero if they have drifted over time.

Insert flushing sequence (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog it will be determined at which sample a flushing sequence shall be inserted and from
which container the rinsing liquid will be taken.

Note
If samples with high concentration differences are measured within an analysis series, it is required to
perform flushing steps between the measurements.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting System > Insert flushing sequence.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Line Number Textbox Field to enter the line number where the flushing sequence
shall be done.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 376

Label Element type Meaning

Hole position Textbox Field to enter the hole position from which the rinsing liquid
shall be taken.
OK Button Saves new settings and inserts an "empty sample" with the
defined flushing methed at the corresponding place of the
analysis series.
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

System > Wake up (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command wakes up the "sleeping" system. The carrier gas is reactivated and the heater are
heated up to their working temperatures. This command is used to manually wake up the system if
you need to start up the system prematurely, i.e. earlier than the chosen wake-up time.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Note
If you have defined a wake-up time that is in the past, you must wake up the sleeping system again
with this command.

Feeding (Dialog)
Function
In the dialog the type of feeding and the number of measurements per sample will be set. Via this
dialog you will get to another dialog where additional measurements can be defined if the standard
deviation exceeds a threshold for multiple determined samples.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting System > Feeding.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
No autosampler Radiobutton Select this option, if the system shall take the sample
material out of another container than from the container in
the autosampler.
Carousel Radiobutton Select this option, if the sample material shall be taken
from the containers in the autosampler.
Magazine size Dropdown listbox Field for the selection of the size of the carousel. If the
option "carousel" has been selected, the number of the
hole positions of the used carousel shall be specified.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 377

Label Element type Meaning

Determination Radiobutton Defines the number measurements which shall be taken
from a sample container of the carousel.
Note: When selecting this option make sure that the sample
in the corresponding container is available in sufficient
quantity!
Extended Button Opens the dialog "Acceptable standard deviation" where
measurement an acceptable standard deviatin for the corresponding
component is defined and where the monitoring of the
adherence can be activated and/or deactivated.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles concerning the dialog:
 Performing a measuring series (on page 144)
 Acceptable standard deviation (on page 387)

Analysis mode (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can switch the operating software to a new operating mode. Before switching
operating modes, it may be necessary to refit the analyzer. After refitting you can switch operating
mode.
Caution Overheating if tube fillings are not appropriate for the operating mode!
Overheated tube fillings melt, run into the furnace area and destroy the furnace.
Make sure that the tube fillings correspond to the selected operating mode.

Open
Open the dialog via System > Mode. First a message window is displayed indicating that the
analyzer may need to be refitted before switching operating modes. Only if you have this message
confirmed by Yes the "Analysis mode" dialog will appear.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Liquid Radiobutton The instrument software is changed over to lliquid mode.
The liquid mode offers two more sub modes that can be
defined via the method:
Difference method Direct method
determination of TC/TIC determination of TOC
POC Radiobutton The instrument software is switched to POC mode.
TC solids Radiobutton The instrument software is switched to TC solids mode.
TIC solids Radiobutton The instrument software is switched to TIC solids mode.
No TNb determination Radiobutton The determination of TNb will be deactivated.
TNb/IR Radiobutton The determination of TNb is done by means of an IR
detector (applies only for vario TOC cube).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 378

Label Element type Meaning

TNb/EC Radiobutton The determination of TNb is done by means of the EC cell.
OK Button Switches the operating mode.
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Selecting the operating mode (on page 138)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 379

Math menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 380

Math > Blank values > Calculate (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command starts a calculation of blank values. The results are entered in the appropriate columns
in text view.

Note
Blank value calculation is only performed if sample memory contains blank samples.

Blank values (Dialog)

Function
The function of this dialog differs depending on how you open it:
 If it is opened via Math > Blank Value > Input, the dialog displays and allows you to edit
the blank values for each element. It is useful to input a blank value manually when the
blank value is known. This allows you to dispense with the relatively time-consuming blank
value determination.
 If it was opened via Math > Blank Value > Compute, the dialog displays and allows you to
apply the blank values just computed.

Open
Open the dialog either
 via Math > Blank Value > Input. You can only open the dialog if you have set the "total"
blank value calculation method.
 or via Math > Blank Value > Calculate. However, blank value determination is only
performed if sample memory contains blank samples.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
{Element Textbox/label  Field to input the blank value of the corresponding
name} element.
(Math > Blank Value > Input)
 Field displaying the computed blank value of the
corresponding element.
(Math > Blank Value > Compute)

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Determining blank values (on page 150)
 Specifying the computation method for blank value and daily factor (on page 131)
 Performing routine measuring work (on page 147)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 381

 Routine measuring work (on page 55)

 Types of blank value determination and their settings (on page 150)
 Formulae for blank value determination and compensation (on page 56)

Math. > System suitability test (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command performs a system suitability test. For this, the sample memory must contain a
sufficient number of corresponding samples. Explanations can be found under System suitability
wizard (on page 369). The dialog "System Suitability Test, result" opens which presents the
corresponding results. See System Suitability Test (on page 163).

Math. > Factor (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command computes the daily factor of a series of analyses.

Define type of peak (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog the behavior of the manual peak integration will be defined.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Math. > Manual Peak Integration > Type. The dialog can only be
opened when the graphic view is activated and display is set to a single detector signal.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
single peak Radiobutton Sets the behavior in such a way that single peaks can be
edited in the manual integration process. An integration
process is executed by setting a start and end tag each.
Superimposed peak Radiobutton Sets the behavior in such a way that superimposed peaks
can be edited in the manual integration process. An
integration process is executed by setting a start and end
tag each for the socket and the "superimposed" peak.
straight baseline Checkbox If activated, a baseline is used which runs parallel to the
x-axis (time axis).
If deactivated, a baseline is used which start height is at
the start tag and which end height is at the end tag.
OK Button Saves the new settings.
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 382

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Manual peak integration (on page 165).

Define peak start / end (Dialog)

Function
The dialog serves for the definition of the peak start and end tags and the height of the baseline
during the manual peak integration.

The dialog
The appearance of the dialog depends on the selected peak type.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Math. > Manual Peak Integration > Integrate.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Button Allows the setting of the start tag of the single and/or total
and/or peak.
Button Allows the setting of the end tag of the single and/or total
and/or peak.
Button Allows the vertical movement of the baseline. This button is
only accessible if the option "straight baseline" is activated.
Button Allows the setting of the start tag of the superimposed
peak.
Button Allows the setting of the end tag of the superimposed peak.

Button Allows the setting of an intermediate point for a better

adjustment to the socket course.
Assignment Button Allows the assignment of the manually integrated peak
areas to one element component.
Close Button Closes the dialog.

Clicking a symbol button results in an activation of the corresponding function. Reclicking the same
symbol button deactivates the function. Clicking a different symbol button results in its acitvation as
well as in the deacitivation of the previously activated function. Which function is currently activated
can be seen from the green bar above the corresponding symbol button.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Manual peak integration (on page 165).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 383

Area assignment (Dialog)

Function
In the dialog it is defined to which element the manually integrated peak area(s) shall be assigned.

The dialog
The appearance of the dialog depends on the selected peak type.

Open
Open the "Define peak start/end" dialog via Math. > Manual Peak Integration > Integrate. Then,
after you have performed the manual integration, open the "Area assignment" dialog by clicking the
Assign button.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Total Radiobutton Defines that the total area shall be used for the
assignment.
"Superimposed" peak Radiobutton Defines that the area of the superimposed peak (ligh red
color) shall be used for the assignment. (Not available for
single peak integration)
Socket Radiobutton Defines that the area of the socket (light blue color) shall
be used for the assignment. The area value of the socket is
the difference between the total area and the area of the
superimposed peak. (Not available for single peak
integration)
{Element name} Option fields Define the element to which the selected peak area shall
be assigned. The number of option fields and their labeling
depend on the set analysis mode.
OK Button Executes the assignment and closes the dialog. After the
assignment the assigned area and the resulting new
element content are displayed in the sample view.
Cancel Button Closes the dialog without assignment.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Manual peak integration (on page 165).

Standard samples display (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog, you select how the standard samples are displayed in the sample field.

Open
Open the dialog via Math > Standard samples.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 384

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Show as standard sample Radiobutton The sample filed displays the theoretical element
(theoretical concentration) concentrations of the standard samples in the
corresponding columns.
Show as factor/monitor Radiobutton The sample filed displays the measured (calculated)
sample (measured element concentrations of the standard samples in
concentration) the corresponding columns.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Math. > Recalculate (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command recomputes the results of all samples in sample memory.

This makes sense, for example, if you have analyzed a calibration series and then a measuring series
immediately afterwards (e.g. overnight). If you compute the coefficients the next day, you must
recompute the appended measuring samples with the newly computed coefficients.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 385

Statistics menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 386

Statistics > Via names (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command combines samples of the same sample name into a statistical group. The statistical
groups are then displayed in the combi view statistics view together with the appropriate results.

Statistics > Group (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command combines two or more selected samples into a statistical group.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Note
This command is only available if at least two samples are selected. When you execute this
command, the statitsical group and its results are displayed in the combi view statistics view.

Statistics > Sort group (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command sorts statistical groups so that the groups are listed in ascending order, starting from
the serial number of the first member of the group.

Note
The command is only available if the statistics view is active.

Statistics > Delete group (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command deletes a selected statistical group in the statistics view.

Note
The command is only available if the statistics view is active.

Statistics > Clear statistic (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command deletes the entire statistics memory.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 387

Statistics > Include/Exclude sample (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command either includes a sample in the calculation or excludes it.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Invocation via hot key: CTRL + T

Note
You can execute this command in the following cases:
 In the statistics view: The selected sample of a statistical group is displayed crossed-out
(disabled) and the statistics calculation is performed without this sample. If you execute the
command again, the sample is displayed as "enabled" again and the statistical calculation is
performed with this sample again. If only two samples are enabled in a statistical group, you
cannot disable either of these samples.
 In the calibration view: The selected sample of a calibration series is displayed as a full circle
(eliminated) and is excluded from the calibration calculation. Executing this command again
displays the sample as "uneliminated" and includes it in the calibration calculation again.

Statistics > Include/Exclude value (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command either includes the value of a sample in the calculation or excludes it.

Note
You can execute this command in the following cases:
 In the statistics view: The selected value of a sample of a statistical group is displayed
crossed-out (disabled) and the statistics calculation is performed without this value. If you
execute the command again, the value is displayed as "enabled" again and the statistical
calculation is performed with this value again. If only two values are enabled in a statistical group,
you cannot disable either of these values.

Acceptable standard deviation (Dialog)

Function
In the dialog can be defined if and how many additional measurements shall be made, if the standard
deviation of multiple determined samples exceeds an acceptable value.

Open
Open the dialog
 via Math > Statistics > Acceptable standard deviation

or
 via the button Extended measurement in the "Feeding" dialog (accessible via System >
Feeding).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 388

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Acceptable Textbox Defines the acceptable relative standard deviation for the
standard deviation corresponding component.
Extended Checkbox Activates/deactivates the monitoring of the acceptable
measurement standard deviation for the corresponding component.
Additionam Textbox Defines the maximal number of addtional measurements.
measurements The process is as follows: after one sample has been
max. measured n times, the standard deviation of this group will
be calculated. If the relative standard deviation is higher
than the acceptable value, the additional measurements
with subsequent recalculations of the standard deviations
will be performed until either the result is smaller than the
acceptable value or the maximum number of additonal
measurements has been performed.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Performing a measuring series (on page 144)
 Sample feeding (on page 376)

Statistics > Create Excel sheet (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command saves the content of the statistics memory to an Excel file.

Note
The menu command is only accessible, if the statistics memory is not empty.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 389

Calibration menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 390

Calibration coefficients (Dialog)

Function
This dialog displays the calibration coefficients on a tab. With suitable permission, you can also
manually input the coefficients.

Note the following for manual input

Observe the following when manually inputting calibration coefficients.
 Sample memory must be empty, otherwise manual input is not possible.
 The program interprets the comma as a decimal separator and the * sign as an exponent. If, for
example, you want to input a coefficient of -2.345320e-004, input the following string of
characters on the number pad. When the press the tab key, the program automatically converts
the string into -2.345320e-004.
 If only one calibration coefficient set is displayed an element in the dialog although you want to
manually input calibration coefficients for two ranges, you can click the "upper range" checkbox
to display the second calibration coefficient set.

Open
Open the dialog via Calibration > Coefficients.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

On the respective tab:

Label Element type Meaning
Coefficient {x} Textbox The respective field displays for the selected coefficients
set the corresponding calibration coefficient and allows you
to edit it if you have the right permission.
Min. Textbox This field displays for the selected coefficients set the lower
limit of the work range and allows you to edit it if you have
the right permission.
Max. Textbox This field displays for the selected coefficients set the
upper limit of the work range and allows you to edit it if you
have the right permission.
upper range Checkbox If activated, fields for a second coefficients set are
displayed. This allows the definition of a lower and an
upper calibration range.
Date Label Displays the creation date of the corresponding coefficients
set.
Button Copies the coefficients of the currently active tab to the
(Copy) clipboard.

Button Copies the coefficients from the clipboard to the currently

(Paste) active tab.

Button Undoes the copy action performed recently.

(Undo)

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Applies calibration coefficients that have just been
computed or input.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 391

Label Element type Meaning

Cancel Button Discards calibration coefficients that have just been
computed or input.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Viewing calibration coefficients (on page 192).
 Defining standard substances as calibration samples (on page 130).
 Performing calibration (on page 189, on page 193).
 Background knowledge required for calibration (on page 48).

Configure calibration (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can specify the calibration curve calculation methods. It is not possible to perform
the calibration comuptation without this information.

Open
Open the dialog via Calibration > Calibrate. In order to open the dialog, sample memory must
contain a sufficient number of valid calibration samples.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

On the respective tab:

Label Element type Meaning
One calibration range Radiobutton Only one calibration curve is computed over the entire
measuring range for the respective element.
Polynomial degree Textbox Field to input the polynomial degree for the calibration
curve calculation over the entire measuring range. May be
set from 1 to 4.
Two calibration Radiobutton For each element, the whole measuring range is divided
ranges into an upper and lower calibration range. A separate
calibration curve is computed for each calibration range.
Polynomial degree, Textbox Field to input the polynomial degree for the calibration
lower range curve calculation in the lower range. May be set from 1 to
4.
Polynomial degree, Textbox Field to input the polynomial degree for the calibration
upper range curve calculation in the upper range. May be set from 1 to
4.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Continues with the calibration calculation. If the option
"Two calibration ranges" has been checked for at least for
one element, then the "Specify lower and upper calibration
range" dialog will open. Here, the split-up of both
calibration ranges can be carried out.
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 392

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Defining standard substances as calibration samples (on page 130).
 Background knowledge required for calibration (on page 48).
 Calibration formulae (on page 53).

Specify lower and upper calibration range (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you specify for a two-range calibration at what point to divide between the upper and
lower calibration range. The dialog displays all samples on the basis of a virtual line. This shows you
whether it makes sense to split the ranges with a dividing line.

Open
Open the dialog via Calibration > Calibrate. First the "Configure calibration" dialog is displayed in
which you specify the calculation methods. Only then the "Specify lower and upper calibration range"
dialog is displayed if you have specified a two-range calibration.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
<<< Button Moves the dividing line between the upper and lower
calibration range to the left in larger intervals.
< Button Moves the dividing line between the upper and lower
calibration range to the left in smaller intervals.
> Button Moves the dividing line between the upper and lower
calibration range to the right in smaller intervals.
>>> Button Moves the dividing line between the upper and lower
calibration range to the right in larger intervals.
Zoom + Button Increases the scale of the view.
Zoom - Button Decreases the scale of the view.
Zoom Label Displays the current zoom setting.
Dividing line at Label Displays in figures where the dividing line is currently set
between the upper and lower calibration range.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Aborts the process.

Note: The dividing line can also be set directly: To do so, place the mouse cursor at the point where
you want to place the dividing line and then click the right mouse button.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Performing calibration (on page 189, on page 193).
 Background knowledge required for calibration (on page 48).
 Right mouse button function (on page 71).
 Calibration formulae (on page 53)

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 393

Calibration > Next sample (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command moves the sample marker to the next sample in the calibration graph.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Invocation via hot key: CTRL + "+"

Calibration > Previous sample (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command moves the sample marker to the previous sample in the calibration graph.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Invocation via hot key: CTRL + "-"

Calibration > Next (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command displays the next calibration curve in the calibration view or calls up the end of the
calibration.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Calibration > Previous (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command displays the previous calibration curve in the calibration view or calls up the "Configure
calibration" dialog.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 394

Windows menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 395

Windows > Toolbar / Run-Bar (Command)

What are these commands used for?
This command shows or hides the toolbar and the run bar. If the toolbar and/or the run bar is
displayed, a check will appear next to the menu item. See Toolbar (on page 395).

Toolbar
Toolbar
The individual buttons on the toolbar correspond to the following commands:
Icon Command
File > New

File > Open

File > Save

Edit > Copy

Edit > Paste

Edit > Insert Line

Edit > Delete Line

Edit > Undo

Edit > Restore

File > Print

File > Print preview

Statistics > Group

Statistics > Include/Exclude sample

View > Zoom in/out

Calibration > Previous

Calibration > Next

Calibration > Previous sample

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 396

Icon Command
Calibration > Next sample

System > Wake-up

Help > About ...

System > Auto run

System > Single run

Note
The number of the available symbols in the toolbar can be different depending on the instrument type.

Windows > Recent sample (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command shows or hides the enhanced display of the sample analyzed most recently. If the
most recently sample is displayed, a check will appear next to the menu item.

Windows > Status view (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command shows or hides the status view. If the status view is displayed, a check will appear
next to the menu item.

Weighing window (Dialog)

Function
The dialog displays the last five sample weights input and the names of the associated samples. The
current weighed sample is displayed in a larger font. The weight window makes it easier for you to
check whether the values were correctly transferred, particularly when automatically transferring
weighing data.

Open
Open or close the dialog by selecting Windows > Balance window.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
No. Label Displays the number of the weighed-in sample. The
number of the current weighed sample is displayed in a
larger font.
Wt. [mg] Label Displays the weight of the weighed-in sample. The weight
of the current weighted sample is displayed in a larger font.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 397

Label Element type Meaning

Name Label Displays the name of the weighed-in sample. The name of
the current weighed sample is displayed in a larger font.

Windows > Default layout (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command switches the arrangement of the windows to its default settings:

Displayed are
 Toolbar
 Run bar
 Recent sample
 Status view

Setting of the balance windows will not be affected.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 398

Options menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 399

Maintenance intervals (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog, any number of maintenance events can be defined and viewed.

Open
Open the dialog via Options > Maintenance > Intervals.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Listbox In this field the texts of all currently defined events are
displayed. Each text has a highlighted bar which displays
the urgency of the maintenance:
 Green bar: There is still time for maintenance.
 Yellow bar: The maintenance must be performed
soon.
 Red bar: The maintenance is overdue.
Total: Label Displays the number of all analyses performed so far.
Event: {n} Textbox/label  Field to enter the text of a new event.
or
 The field displays the text of the event selected in the
adjacent list box.
Interval Textbox/label  Field to input the number of analyzed samples after
which the maintenance must be performed.
or
 The field displays the interval of the event selected in
the adjacent list box.
Status Textbox/label  Field to input the number of samples already analyzed,
e.g. when you install a used tube. You must enter 0 as
the status after performing maintenance.
or
 This field displays the number of samples already
analyzed for the adjacent event.
Mode assignment List box with Allows assignment of the corresponding event to the
checkboxes different analysis modes. Incrementing of the
corresponding counter will be suppressed if analysis
modes are not checked here.
Information only Radiobutton When a maintenance event falls due, the system only
displays a message in the status view. See Defining
maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).
Information and stop Radiobutton When a maintenance event falls due, the system displays a
continuous analysis message in the status view and continuous analysis is
stopped.
New Button Allows the definition of a new event.
Delete Button Removes the selected event from the list.
Save Button Saves the settings made.
Close Button Closes the dialog.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 400

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Defining maintenance intervals in the software (on page 184).
 Viewing the status of maintenance intervals (on page 184).
 Installing used tubes (on page 185).
 Maintenance work to be performed by the customer (on page 183).

Maintenance status EC cell (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog the maintenance status of the EC cell is displayed. The life cycle of an EC cell is about
two years. Afterwards the EC cell should be replaced since otherwise a proper function is no longer
given.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Maintenance > EC cell.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
last maintenance at Text fields Fields to input the date, when the last maintenance
(replacement) took place.
next maintenance at Label Displays the date of the next maintenance (replacement).
today date Label Displays the current date.
Reset Button Sets the date displayed in "last maintenance at" to the
current date and changes the value in the field "next
maintenance at" accordingly.
OK Button Saves the new settings.
Cancel Button Leaves the dialog without saving any settings.

Replace part (Dialog)

Function
If you need to replace parts of the instrument, it is necessary to take certain precautions on the
instrument beforehand. It is necessary to depressurize the analyzer.

Via the dialog:

 you can stop gas supply,
 reduce pressure,
 and the user receives further instructions.

After replacing the part, you can get the instrument ready for operation again via this dialog. I.e. gas
supply is reactivated and any atmospheric nitrogen is flushed out with carrier gas.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 401

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Gas pressure" under Warning notes during operation (on
page 24).

Open
Open the dialog via:
 Options > Maintenance > Replace parts.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Please wait a Label This field displays an instruction to wait for pressure drop
moment without pressing any buttons until the next instruction is
displayed.
You can now replace Label If this instruction is displayed in the dialog and the
the part. Click "Finish" displays "Flow" and "Pressure" show 0 on screen, you
to continue after may replace the part.
replacing.
Done Button Automatically switches the gas back on after replacing the
part.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Installing reaction tubes in the furnace and conditioning (on page 252).
 Preparing and following up maintenance work (on page 185).

Adjust ball valve (Dialog)

Note
This function is only available in the solides modes.

Function
The ball valve is used to ensure air-free introduction of samples. The ball that receives the sample is
located between two half shells that have to exert a certain contact pressure. The dialog displays
whether thus contact pressure is correctly set.
Caution Ball valve set too tight
Setting the ball valve too tight damages the mechanical drive system.
If the bar in the "Ball valve setting" dialog is red, loosen the wheel flange with a
hook wrench until the bar turns green.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Maintenance > Set Ball Valve.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 402

Label Element type Meaning

____ Label In this field, the color of the bar indicates how the ball
valve contact pressure is set.

If the bar is... ... ...then

gray contact pressure is too
loose.
yellow contact pressure is too tight.
Only brief overshooting into
the yellow range is
permissible.
red contact pressure is too tight
and may damage the
driving motor.
green and ends roughly in contact pressure is set
the middle of the selected correctly.
range.
OK Button Closes the dialog.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Cleaning, assembling and installing the ball valve. (on page 232)
 Sample insertion and initiation of measurement (on page 38)

Adjust carousel (Dialog)

Note
This function is only available in the liquid modes.

Function
In the dialog the vernier adjustment of the sample postions can be done.

Open
Open the dialog via Options > Maintenance > Intervals.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Needle removed from Checkbox This element service for the protection of the feeding unit
the arm since an unremoved needle while turning the carousel
may cause damages to the feeding unit. This element
instructs you to always removed the needle first.
Only if this element is activated, the elements for the
adjustment are accessible.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 403

Label Element type Meaning

Adjust carousel Sliding controller By moving the sliding controller the carousel can be
positioned directly below the lifting unit of the sample arm.
Note: The carousel is only movable in one direction. If
you positioned the carousel too far, a readjustment for the
next sample position has to be made.
Arm up Button Moves the sample arm to its upper end position. Serves
for checking the adjusted carousel position.
Arm down Button Moves the sample arm to its lower end position. Serves
for checking the adjusted carousel position.
Position Textbox After completion of the adjustment, enter the number of
the position related to the adjustment.
Apply Button Saves the settings and performs a reference run of the
carousel.
Done Button Automatically switches the gas back on after replacing the
part.

Options > Maintenance > Flush acid path (Command)

What is the command used for?
By this command the acid supply to the sparger will be flushed and ventilated. After invoking this
command a window opens where the intention to flush the acid path has to be reconfirmed. After the
confirmation a process starts which carries out flushing and ventilation.

Leak test (Dialog)

Function
This dialog is used to perform a leak test and the leak search:
 In the display window the tubing diagram of the analysis system is shown. Depending on the
currently performed leak test stage, the appearance of the tubing diagram may vary.
 If there are certain tasks to be performed during the leak test, they are displayed in the form of
colored numbers in the tubing diagram. By positioning the mouse pointer over these numbers a
particular window will pop up showing the task in detail.
 Below the diagram there is a field which will show information about the actions to be performed
during the certain test stages, e.g. which gas ways have to be closed etc.
 At the right edge of the dialog box there are the buttons for selection and/or execution of the
certain test stages.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Diagnostics > Leak test. First a dialog is displayed in which
you must confirm that you want to perform a leak test. The "Leak test: Complete instrument" dialog is
displayed once you confirm.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
(Graphic field) Label Shows the tubing diagram of the analysis system.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 404

Label Element type Meaning

Info field (below the Label Gives information to the user, which actions have to be
graphic field) performed for the execution of a test stage (e.g. sealing of
certain gas ways etc.).
Start Button Stars execution of the currently active leak test stage. The
"Test Phases" dialog will open. Here, the test run can be
observed.
Next Button Switches to the next test stage. The leak search strategy
implemented in the program chooses automatically the
proper stage to be tested next.
This function is not accessible while performing
single-stage leak tests.
<< Button Switch back to the next lower test stage. This function
allows a manual testing of particular stages, however, the
leak search strategy will be suspended by this function.
This function is not accessible while performing
single-stage leak tests.
>> Button Switch forward to the next higher test stage. This function
allows a manual testing of particular stages, however, the
leak search strategy will be suspended by this function.
This function is not accessible while performing
single-stage leak tests.
Leak search set Button Opens a dialog in which all components of the leak test kit
are displayed.
Close Button Closes the dialog. The user will be requested to turn on
again the gas supply. Afterwards, a re-initialization of the
system takes place.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Performing a leak test.
 Installing reaction tubes in the furnace and conditioning (on page 252).
 Preparing and following up maintenance work (on page 185).
 Start-up (on page 117).
 Reacting to a power failure (on page 271).
 Maintenance work to be performed by the customer (on page 183).

Leak test: Test phases (Dialog)

Function
This dialog displays the current status while performing a leak test.
 The left half of the dialog displays the individual stages of the test. The current stage of the test is
marked with an arrow.
 The right half of the dialog displays the remaining time of the respective stage of the test and
system pressure.
 The result is displayed at the bottom of the dialog once the test is finished.

Open
Open the dialog by clicking Start in the "Leak test" dialog.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 405

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In the left area:

Label Element type Meaning
Pressure build-up Label The valves are switched to positions allowing pressure
build-up in a certain section of the system (first stage of the
test).
Stabilization Label The gas inlet valve is closed. The system waits for a set
time to allow stable pressure conditions in the subsequent
test stage. If system pressure does not reach a defined
minimum pressure after this stage has ended, the leak test
is regarded as having failed. If minimum pressure is
reached, the system moves on to the next stage.
Test Label The initial pressure of the instrument is recorded at the
beginning. During this stage of the test, the system
constantly compares current pressure with the initial
pressure previously measured and calculates the current
drop in pressure. If the drop in pressure exceeds a certain
threshold during this stage of the test, the leak test is
regarded as having failed. If the drop in pressure stays
below the threshold, the system moves on to the next
stage.

In the right area:

Label Element type Meaning
0 ... x Sec. Label This field displays the remaining time of the respective
stage of the test.
Pressure, current Label This field displays instrument pressure.

In the lower area:

Label Element type Meaning
Result Label This field displays whether the leak test was successful or
not. The following symbols highlight the leak test result:

..... Leak test successful.

..... Leak test failed.

Print Button Prints the result after the leak test finishes.
Cancel Button Aborts the leak test.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Performing a leak test.
 Installing reaction tubes in the furnace and conditioning (on page 252).
 Preparing and following up maintenance work (on page 185).
 Optimizing instrument condition for calibration (on page 192).
 Start-up (on page 117).
 Reacting to a power failure (on page 271).
 Maintenance work to be performed by the customer (on page 183).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 406

System test (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can test the system components of the analyzer for proper working order. The
dialog contains the following two tabs:
 On the "Temperature" tab you can test the furnace for proper working order.
 You can test proper working order of the fans and valves on the "Outputs" tab.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Diagnostics > System Test.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Temperatures":
Label Element type Meaning
Furnace Textbox/label This field displays the current temperature of the furnace.
Field to input the furnace setpoint temperature. This field
displays the temperature progression of the furnace
towards setpoint temperature.
Apply Button Heats up the furnace to a previously entered temperature.

The left (grey) field shows the actual temperature. Placing the cursor in one of these fields "freezes"
the temperature displayed there. You can now input a setpoint temperature om the right field. By
clicking Apply the furnace will be controlled to the setpoint temperature. The left field now displays
the current temperature again and you can observe whether and how temperature approaches the
setpoint temperature.

In section "Outputs":
Label Element type Meaning
V1, multiway valve, Button moves the multiway valve to the next valve position
next pos.
(only available in the liquid modes).
V1, multiway valve, Button 0 switches the long term test off.
long term test I switches the long term test on (continuous rotation)
(only available in the liquid modes).
V1, ball valve Button moves the ball valve to the next position
Next position
(only available in the solids modes).
V2, drain sparger Button 0 removes the current from valve V2.
I applies current to valve V2.
M5, acid pump Button  0 switches the pump off.
I switches the pump on.
V5, gas inlet Button 0 removes the current from valve V5.
I applies current to valve V5.
V9, drain condenser Button 0 removes the current from valve V9.
I applies current to valve V9.
M8, magnetic stirrer Button  0 switches the magnetic stirrer off.
I switches the magnetic stirrer on.

The light bulb behind the buttons displays the following:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 407

 If the light bulb behind the button goes off, the component has been correctly switched off and
current has been removed.
 If the light bulb behind the button lights up yellow, the component has been correctly switched on
and current has been applied.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
Close Button Closes the dialog.
Help Button Opens the description of the dialog in the help.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Performing a system test (on page 268).

Error buffer (Dialog)

Function
This dialog displays a chronological list of all errors and events detected by the system. Every event
detected is accompanied by the following information for tracking purposes:
 Date and time in the "Date/Time" column.
 Error code in the "Event" column.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Diagnostics > Error buffer.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Date/time; event Listbox Field listing every event with the date, time and its error
code.
Number of events Label Field displaying the total number of events currently in the
error buffer.
show deleted items Checkbox If activated, all events which have been deleted previously
will be displayed again. This element is not enabled at the
lowest access level.
Delete Button Deletes selected events.
Print Button Prints the content of the error buffer.
Close Button Closes the dialog.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Interpreting PC error messages (on page 268).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 408

Error display (Dialog)

Function
This dialog decodes the various error codes and displays the results. The error types are divided into
different categories and each category is allocated to a separate tab.

Open
Open the dialog via:
 Options > Diagnostics > Error display or
 by double-clicking the appropriate event line in the "Error buffer" dialog. See Error buffer (on
page 407).

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Input error code Textbox Field to input the appropriate error code. Once the input
box contains a code number, the program displays the
decoded result green in the section above it.
Close Button Closes the dialog.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Interpreting PC error messages (on page 268).

Options > Diagnostics > Baseline recording (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command displays the detector baseline in graph view. For better distinction the frame of the
graphic field appears in red color. The baseline recording is used for troubleshooting, for example if a
measurement deviates too strongly.

Select this command again to hide the base line.

Input options (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can define what the program should do when you input the same name. This allows
you to optmize sample data input and minimize keystrokes.

Open
Open the dialog via Options > Settings > Input.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 409

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Normal sample name Radiobutton The sample name is entered in the appropriate column as
input it is input.
Apply sample name Radiobutton After entering the sample name and pressing Enter, the
input name is applied to the next line.
autom. Radiobutton If a sample name ends with a number (e.g. "Name001"),
Auto-increment the this figure is automatically incremented by a certain amount
number in the sample and suggested for the next sample (e.g. "Name002").
name
Exceptions:
 If the number of characters is completely used up (e.g.
"Name999"), it is not incremented and the same name
is suggested for the next sample.
 If the figure is not at the end of the sample name (e.g.
"Name001xyz"), it is not incremented.
autom. Radiobutton Works the same way as auto-increment, only the figure in
Auto-decrement the the name is decremented.
number in the sample
name Exception:
 The figure "zero" is not decremented.
Increment/decrement Textbox with In this field you can input the interval at which to
interval increment/decrement the figure in the name. This figure
Buttons can be between 1 and 99. The number must, however, fit
in the displayable number of digits, otherwise the number is
not changed.
Fill method names to Checkbox If, for example, you have input/copied 10 successive
stop marker sample names with the sample memory empty, the stop
marker is now at the tenth sample. If you have input a
method name for the first sample, this name is entered for
all ten samples.
Fill daily factors to Checkbox The daily factor input for the first sample is entered for all
last sample subsequent samples.
Fill blank values to Checkbox The blank value input for the first sample is entered for all
last sample subsequent samples.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Settings for sample input (on page 140).
 Optimizing sample data editing (on page 108).

Standard samples (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can create, delete, view, copy and change standard samples.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 410

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Settings > Standards.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Listbox This field lists all standard samples already defined.
Name Textbox/label Field to input the name of the standard sample.
{Element} conc. [%] Textbox/label Field to input the theoretical percentage content of the
(or {Element} conc. corresponding element in the respective sample.
[ppm])
{Element} tolerance Textbox/label Field to input the tolerance limit of the corresponding
[%] element. The tolerance limit is required if standard
tolerance monitoring is enabled.
New Button Allows the definition of a new standard sample. This
function empties the input boxes, thus data for a new
standard sample can be entered.
Delete Button Deletes a standard sample previously selected in the
listbox.
Save/Create Button Saves changes of an existing standard sample or creates
and saves the settings of a newly defined standard sample.
Close Button Closes the dialog.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Defining standard substances as calibration samples (on page 130).
 Viewing list of defined factor, monitor and standard samples (on page 129).

Keywords (Dialog)
Function
In this dialog you specify keywords for conditioning samples and blank value samples. A key word is
a reserved sample name that the software recognizes and interprets in a special way.

Note
Keywords are already defined for conditioning samples and blank value samples. You can change
keywords, but you must observe the following:
 The names must be distinguishable.
 The program does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase, so "BLANK" has the same
meaning as "blank", for example.

Open
Open the dialog via Options > Settings > Keywords.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 411

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Conditioning sample Textbox Field to input the key word for conditioning samples.
name
Name blank Textbox Field to enter the key word for blank value samples in the
solid/liquid solid/liquid modes.
OK Button Saves the keywords.
Cancel Button Discards keywords not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Defining keywords for blank and conditioning samples (on page 129).

Acoustic signals (Dialog)

Function
In the dialog you can enable and disable acoustic signals to be output when certain events occur. The
individual signals vary in pitch for easier distinction.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Settings > Acoustic Signals.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Maintenance event Checkbox If a maintenance interval is exceeded or if the interval can
sound be expected to expire while processing a series of
analyses, a warning signal is output every 2 seconds.
Error sound Checkbox If the analysis system reports an error, a warning sound is
output every two seconds.
Analysis start sound Checkbox A sound is output whenever a measurement starts in
continuous operation.
Weighing data Checkbox A sound is output whenever a connected balance transmits
transmission sound a weighing value to the PC.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Enabling/disabling acoustic signals (on page 132).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 412

Configure Calculations (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can set the calculation method for determining the daily factor and blank value.
There are two calculation methods:
 Sequential calculation. This means that a separate factor or blank value is computed for each
group of standard or blank value samples; this is then used to correct the measuring samples
until the next group of standard or blank value samples arrives. This calculation method allows
you to compensate for fluctuations in measuring over a certain period.
 Total calculation method. This means that the calculation is performed for all of the standard or
blank value samples in a document. An average factor is computed.

Open
Open the dialog via Options > Settings > Calculation.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Blank value determination":

Label Element type Meaning
sequentially Radiobutton The blank value is computed sequentially.
entirely Radiobutton The blank value is computed as a total.
manual input Radiobutton The blank value can be entered manually, there will be no
calculation of the blank value.
autom. blank value Checkbox calculation of the blank value starts automatically after the
calculation end of every analysis.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Determining the daily factor (on page 151).
 Determining blank values (on page 150).
 Specifying the computation method for blank value and daily factor (on page 131).

LIMS settings (Dialog)

Function
This dialog is used to make various adjustments to a laboratory information and management system
(LIMS). The dialog has the following tabs:
 On the "LIMS data" tab you select which data to send to the LIMS and whether they should be
sent automatically after every analysis.
 On the "Communication" tab you specify whether and how to transfer data.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 413

 If you are using multiple analyzers with one PC, you must specify one instrument identifier on the
"Identifier" tab so that the LIMS data can be allocated to the correct instrument. You can also
define user names.

Note
Note that the LIMS port name must not be identical to the port name between the PC and the
analyzer. This could lead to a system crash.

Open
Open the dialog via Options > Settings > LIMS.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

"LIMS data" tab

In section "Data to send":
Label Element type Meaning
{Data member} Checkbox Sends the corresponding data member.
Send data Checkbox Automatically send the data to LIMS after every analysis.
automatically after
every analysis

Note: Sends every element with a check mark. The order corresponds to the list from top to bottom. If
you change the selection of elements to send, you must edit the LIMS software, otherwise the data
may be misinterpreted.

"Communication" tab:
In section "Data transfer":
Label Element type Meaning
none Radiobutton No data are sent to LIMS.
via serial port Radiobutton Data are transferred via the serial port.
via network Radiobutton The data to send to the LIMS are written to a file.
The file can be accessed from the LIMS and from the
instrument operating software.

In section "Serial":
Label Element type Meaning
Port name Textbox Field to input the name of the interface.
The port name must not be the same as the port for
communication between the PC and analyzer. Otherwise,
operation of the analysis system will be disrupted.
Baud rate Textbox Field to input transfer parameters.
Databits Textbox Field to input transfer parameters.
Stopbits Textbox Field to input transfer parameters.
Parity Textbox Field to input transfer parameters.

Note: The textboxes in the "Serial" section only have to be filled in if you have selected the "via serial
port" radio button in the "Data transfer" section. The settings here must match those of the LIMS
interface.

In section "Network":

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 414

Label Element type Meaning

Path name Textbox This field displays the path to store the data.
Browse Button Opens the "Find folder" dialog in which you can search the
file structure and select a directory.
The path must already exist, it cannot be created from the
instrument operating software.
File extension Textbox Field to input the file extension. The file name is
samples automatically generated by the program as follows:
dddsssss.xxx.
where:
 ddd = Days since January 1.
 sssss = Seconds since midnight.
 xxx = defined file extension
Thus, the file 12837894.abc was created at the following
date:
 128: File was created on the 128th day of the year, i.e.
on May 9.
 37894: File was created 37894 seconds after midnight,
i.e. at 10:31:34.
 abc: Defined file extension.
Create extra PDF Checkbox The data sent to LIMS will be saved to an additional PDF
file.

Note: You only need to edit the "Network" section if you have selected the "via network" radio button
in the "Data transfer" section.

"Identifier" tab:
On this tab:
Label Element type Meaning
Instrument identifier Textbox Field to input an instrument identifier. If there are several
analyzers connected to the PC, you must define an
instrument identifier for each instrument so that the LIMS
data are assigned to the correct instrument. The instrument
identifier precedes the actual data and can be interpreted
by the LIMS.
User's name Textbox Field for display of the user's name. The user's name is
similar to the name of the user who is currently logged on.
The name precedes the actual data and can be interpreted
by the LIMS.

Valid for all tabs:

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Exporting LIMS data (on page 172)
 Defining the LIMS / PC interface (on page 98).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 415

 Laboratory information and management system (LIMS) (on page 73).

 LIMS export settings (on page 93).

Device parameters (Dialog)

Function
This dialog serves to display and edit instrument parameters. The dialog has several options, that are
accessible on the left via the navigation panel.

Open
Open the dialog via Options > Settings > Parameters.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Temperature":
Label Element type Meaning
Reactor operating temp. Textbox Field to input the reactor temperature.

In section "Flow":
Label Element type Meaning
Carrier gas flow Textbox Field to input a carrier gas flow value. Note: This
element is not relevant for the vario TOC select system.

In section "Time values":

Label Element type Meaning
Integrator Textbox Field to input a time. Defines the time after which the
Reset Delay peak C integrator is reset to zero before beginning actual
integration.
Peak anticipation TIC Textbox Field to input a time. Defines the time the system waits
for the occurrence of the appropriate peak. If the system
has not detected a peak start after expiration of this peak
expectation time, it assumes that the sample does not
contain the respective element component.
Peak anticipation TC Textbox See description of peak anticipation TIC.
Peak anticipation Dummy Textbox See description of peak anticipation TIC.
(TIC/TC)
Peak anticipation TOC Textbox See description of peak anticipation TIC.
Peak anticipation TNb Textbox See description of peak anticipation TIC.

In section "Syringe/Flush":
Label Element type Meaning
Flush volume Textbox Field to input the required volume for a flushing
procedure
Flushing procedure Textbox Field to input the number of flushing procedures to be
performed.

In section "Syringe/Speed":
Label Element type Meaning
Filling speed Textbox Field to input the syringe speed during its filling
procedure (suction).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 416

Label Element type Meaning

Injection speed Textbox Field to input the syringe speed during its injection
procedure (purging).

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.
Help Button Opens the description of the dialog in the help.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Setting device parameters (on page 43).

Method (Dialog)
Function
In this dialog you can create, delete, view, copy and change methods.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Settings > Methods.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
--- Listbox This field lists all methods already defined.
Gray colored method names are factory set methods and
cannot be changed.
Identifier Textbox Field to input the name of the method. When you enter the
name in the sample view, this method is allocated to the
appropriate sample.
Description Textbox Field to input the purpose of the method. For easier
selection of a method.
NPOC precise Radiobutton Defines that TOC with a higher precision is measured
(longer analysis time). The samples will be automatically
acidified in the autosampler.
NPOC fast Radiobutton Defines that TOC with normal precision is measured
(shorter analysis time). The samples will be automatically
acidified in the autosampler.
TC precise Radiobutton Defines that TC with a higher precision is measured (longer
analysis time).
TC fast Radiobutton Defines that TC with normal precision is measured (shorter
analysis time).
TIC / TC Radiobutton Defines that TIC/TC is measured.
TNb Checkbox Defines that in addition TNb is measured.
Particles Checkbox Defines that particles containing samples are measured
(intensified flushing cycles).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 417

Label Element type Meaning

Flushing only Checkbox If samples with high concentration differences are
measured, it is required to perform flushing steps between
the measurements.
Inj.-Vol. Textbox Defines the injection volume.
New Button Allows the definition of a new method. This function
empties the input boxes, thus data for a new method can
be entered.
Delete Button Deletes a method previously selected in the listbox.
Default method Button Defines the method selected in the list box as the default
method. If during input of sample data no method has been
specified then the program suggests the name of the
default method.
Save/ Button Saves changes of an existing method or creates and saves
the settings of a newly defined method.
Create
Close Button Closes the dialog.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Viewing method settings (on page 139).
 Defining custom methods (on page 140).
 Copy methods (on page 417).
 Optimizing basic instrument settings (on page 108).

Copy methods
Defining custom methods
The existing method can be copied with the option "Copy methods" and subsequently the parameters
of the corresponding requirements can be changed accordingy. In a lot of cases this is more efficient
than creating a new method and entering all parameters.

Copy methods
Proceed as follows:
 Open the "Methods" dialog in the operating software by selecting Options > Settings >
Methods.
 Select a method from a list in the left area which parameters are most similar to the new method.
Enter the parameters of the method to be newly defined:
 Enter the following:
 Enter the name of the new method in the "ID" field.
 Enter the purpose of the method, for example, in the "Description" field.
 Change the corresponding method parameters in the other boxes accordingly.
 Click Create. Your new method will now be included in the list in the left area of the dialog. You
have now successfully copied and defined the method.
 Click Close to close the dialog.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 418

Error handling (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can define how you want the operating software to react to detected errors.

Open
Open the dialog via Options > Settings > Error handling.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Standard tolerance Checkbox Every finished standard sample is checked as to whether
monitoring the computed percentage contents are inside the defined
tolerance range for theoretical percentage contents. If the
tolerance limit is exceeded, continuous analysis is aborted
and "Tol" is entered in the info column of the appropriate
sample. The defined tolerance limits can be seen in the
"Standard samples" dialog. See Standard samples (on
page 409).
Number of errors Textbox Field to input a number between 0 and 10. This figure
defines how many successive analyzed samples may
display non-critical errors before aborting continuous
operation. Input 0 to disable this stop mechanism. If a
critical error occurs, the analysis is immediately stopped
regardles of the figure you input.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Configuring error handling (on page 132).
 Interpreting PC error messages (on page 268).
 Determining the daily factor (on page 151).
 Optimizing basic instrument settings (on page 108).

Sleep / wake-up function (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you define the sleep and wake-up options for the analyzer.

Note:
Observe the following when entering the date in the "Wake-up" section: The program accepts
numbers between 1 and 31 for day input, but it does not check whether the date is permissible (e.g.
09/31).

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Settings > Sleep/Wake-up.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 419

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "Sleep":
Label Element type Meaning
Sleep disabled Radiobutton The sleep/wake-up function is disabled.
Sleep after end of Radiobutton The analyzer goes into sleep mode after finishing the last
sample sample (indicated by the stop marker).
Sleep at sample No. Option field / The analyzer goes into sleep mode when it reaches the
textbox specified sample.
You can enter the sample number in the adjacent textbox.
Shut off carrier gas Checkbox Shuts off the carrier gas when the analyzer goes into sleep
mode.
Reduce furnace {n} Checkbox / Reduces the temperature of the corresponding furnace to
temp. textbox the specified temperature.
You can enter the temperature in the adjacent textbox.
Sleep now Button Causes the analyzer to go into sleep mode immediately.

In section "Wake-up":
Label Element type Meaning
Time Textbox Fields to input the time in hours and minutes at which to
wake up the analyzer.
Date Textbox Fields to input the date on which to wake up the analyzer.
One-time wake-up at Radiobutton Wakes up the sleeping analyzer at the date and time
above time/date specified above.
Daily wake-up at Radiobutton Wakes up the analyzer every day at the time specified
above time/date, above.
except
Mon. Tues. Wed. Checkbox Defines on which days not to wake up the instrument, e.g.
Thurs. Fri. Sat. Sun. on weekends.
Continue after Checkbox If there are any unprocessed samples in sample memory,
wake-up if there are analysis is automatically resumed after "wake-up".
samples
Wake up now Button Wakes up the analyzer immediately.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Shutting the instrument down for short measuring breaks (standby) (on page 124).
 Optimizing sleep and wake-up behavior (on page 142).
 Optimizing basic instrument settings (on page 108).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 420

Monthly logbook (Dialog)

Function
This dialog contains records of the actions performed by various users in chronological order. You
can search for and print out certain information via the dialog menus. The following information is
stored for each action:
 Date and time of the action,
 Name of the person who performed the action,
 Type of action,
 Description of changes, e.g. of parameters,
 User's justification if the action needed to be justified.

Note:
The period displayed in the logbook covers a maximum of one month, usually the current month.
However, it is possible to display actions preceding this period.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Logbook. This dialog is only accessible if 21 CFR Part 11
functionality is enabled.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In the "File" menu:

Label Element type Meaning
File > Load Menu command Opens the "Select period" dialog in which you select the
desired period. Allows you to load actions further in the
past. If no file is found for the selected period, a message
is displayed.
File > Save As Menu command Opens the "Save logbook as" dialog in which you can save
the current records to a file outside of the database.
File > Print Menu command Outputs the records currently being displayed to a printer.
File > Close Menu command Closes the dialog.

In the "Edit" menu:

Label Element type Meaning
Edit > Copy Menu command Copies the selected text to the clipboard. You can then
insert this text in a text documennt, for example.
Edit > Select All Menu command Selects the whol text. You can then copy the selected
contents via Edit > Copy.
Edit > Search Menu command Opens the "Search" dialog in which you can search for
certain phrases.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
Button Reverse the chronological order; either the oldest or the
... most recent entry is displayed first.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 421

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Viewing the logbook (on page 103).
 21 CFR Part 11 functionality (on page 74).

Select period (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you select the period for which to display the logbook.

Open
Open the "Logbook for month..." dialog via Options > Logbook. Open the "Select period" dialog by
selecting File > Load.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Year Textbox with Field to input a year. You can also set the year in the
buttons textbox using the arrows.
Month Textbox with Field to input a month. You can also set the month in the
buttons textbox using the arrows.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Viewing the logbook (on page 103).
 21 CFR Part 11 functionality (on page 74).

Device configuration (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can define initialization entries to adjust system behavior.

The individual tabs represent the respective initialization files. There are various sections in an
initialization file. Each section contains entries whose values influence the behavior of the system.

During operation, the system stores certain information in the initialization files. It is usually not
necessary to modify these values. The entries that may be changed are located on the following tabs:
 DEVICE.INI
 LEAKTEST.INI

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 422

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Improper changes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Note
This section only describes the sections of the tabs in which you can make changes via the "Device
configuration" dialog only, as these sections do not have their own settings menu.

If 21 CFR Part 11 functionality is enabled, every change to the configuration must be justified in the
"Comment modification" dialog.

Open
Open the dialog by selecting Options > Configuration.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

Valid for all tabs:

Label Element type Meaning
Section Dropdown listbox This field lists the available sections. Field to input a name for
a new section.
Entries Listbox This field lists the entries of a previously selected section.
New Section Button Creates a new section under the name previously entered in
the dropdown listbox.
Edit Button Opens the "Configure key value" dialog. Allows you to edit a
section entry previously selected from the list.
Delete Button Deletes a section previously selected in the dropdown listbox.
Deletes a section entry previously selected in the listbox.
Paste Button Opens the "Configure key value" dialog. Allows you to insert
new entries in a section.
Import Button Opens the "Open" dialog. Allows you to import further
sections.
Export Button Opens the "File save as" dialog. Allows you to export
sections.
Delete all Button Deletes all entries which are included in the activated tab.
OK Button Saves new settings

"DEVICE.INI" tab
The following table describes the entries under the "AnalyzerPort" section:
Entry Standard Description
Name COM1 Defines the serial interface between the PC and the analyzer.
Baud 9600 Defines the transfer rate of the serial interface between the PC
and the analyzer.
Data 8 Defines the number of databits of the serial interface between the
PC and the analyzer.
Stop 1 Defines the number of stopbits of the serial interface between the
PC and the analyzer.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 423

Entry Standard Description

Parity N Defines the type of parity check of the serial interface between the
PC and the analyzer.
 N= no parity check
 E= even parity check
 O= odd parity check.

The following table describes the entries under the "PGP" section:
Entry Standard Description
ExecutablePath --- Defines what signature program to use for signing and verifying
documents.
Sign Parameters --- Defines what parameters must be sent to the signature program
when signing.
Verify Parameters --- Defines what parameters must be sent to the signature program
when verifying.

The following table describes the entries under the "Menu" section:
Entry Standard Description
xxx 1,2,3 The text in this entry describes the respective menu command.
The value to the right of the equals sign defines the access level
with which the user may access this command. 1 means the
lowest, 3 is the highest level.

The following table describes the entries under the "System" section:
Entry Standard Description
Logon Timeout 60 Defines the time that must expire before the program displays the
login dialog again.
User1 --- Specifies the name of the user group which the instrument
software regards as level 1 users.
User2 Specifies the name of the user group which the instrument
software regards as level 2 users.
User3 Specifies the name of the user group which the instrument
software regards as level 3 users.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Defining the analyzer / PC interface (on page 98).
 Creating new sections (on page 91).
 Granting authorizations (on page 96).
 Defining the autoexport directory (on page 104).
 Configure key value (on page 423).
 Optimizing basic instrument settings (on page 108).
 What can you modify in the configuration? (on page 90).

Configure key value (Dialog)

Function
This dialog is used to configure the system. In this dialog you allocated values to the system that
influence the system's behavior.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 424

Safety instruction
Strictly observe the safety instruction "Improper changes" under Warning notes during operation
(on page 24).

Open
Open the "Configure instrument" dialog by selecting View > Configuration. Click:
 Edit to edit a selected entry in a section.
 Insert to create a new entry in a section.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.
Label Element type Meaning
Key Textbox/label Field to input the key. This field displays the key of an entry
previously selected in the "Device configuration" dialog and
allows you to edit this key. The field is only enabled if the
dialog was opened via the Insert button.
Value Textbox/label Field to input the value. This field displays the value of an
entry previously selected in the "Device configuration"
dialog and allows you to edit this key.
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Granting authorizations (on page 96).
 Defining logon timeout (on page 90).
 Creating new sections (on page 91).
 Defining the analyzer / PC interface (on page 98).
 Defining the autoexport directory (on page 104).
 Device configuration (on page 421).

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 425

Help menu
Purpose
This section describes commands and dialogs for this menu.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 426

Help > Content (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command opens the "Contents" tab of the help window in the foreground.

Short cuts
Invocation via hot key: F1

Help > Find (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command opens the "Search" tab of the help window in the foreground.

Help > Elementar GmbH on the WEB (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command creates an Internet link to the Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH website, on
condition that the PC has an Internet connection.

Product registration (Dialog)

Function
In this dialog you can input your registration data to unlock the operating software.

Open
This dialog is automatically displayed when you launch the operating software for the first time, if you
forgot any important details during registration. Open the dialog by selecting Help > Registration.

Elements
The following describes the elements of the dialog.

In section "User":
Label Element type Meaning
Company/Dept. Textbox Field to input user data.
Street Textbox Field to input user data.
ZIP Textbox Field to input user data.
City Textbox Field to input user data.
Country Textbox Field to input user data.
Tel. Textbox Field to input user data.
e-mail Textbox Field to input user data.

Note: These data are not mandatory. However, these data make it easier for Elementar's service
department to identitfy customers if you have a problem and contact Elementar.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Menu and dialog descriptions 427

In section "Analyzer":
Label Element type Meaning
Type Dropdown listbox Field displaying the instrument type.
Serial number Textbox Field to input the serial number if it was not automatically
sent to the program by the analyzer. The serial number is
found on the type plate on the back of the analyzer. This
number should match the serial number of the installation
CD/DVD cover when installing for the first time.

In section "Software":
Label Element type Meaning

Version Label This field displays the software version number.

Software ID Textbox Field to input the identification code. If installing for the first
time, this number is found on the installation CD/DVD
cover. If installing and upgrading, you must send the
registration details in this dialog to Elementar. You will then
receive an identification code to be entered here.
It is not possible to operate the system if the identification
code is missing or incorrect.

Remaining elements:
Label Element type Meaning
OK Button Saves new settings
Cancel Button Discards settings not yet saved.

Further information
Further information includes instructions in which the dialog is used and knowledge articles
concerning the dialog:
 Modifying the registration (on page 111).

Help > About... (Command)

What is the command used for?
This command displays the following:
 The copyright note.
 The software version number.

If the system is connected, the version numbers of the individual modules are also displayed. They
provide valuable information about the status of the system and what to do in the event of updates.

Short cuts

Invocation via the toolbar:

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
CHAPTER 12

Appendix

Target group
Personnel involved with the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Appendix 430

Revision history
List of modifications in this document up to now

Date Modification
09.07.2010 Creation
21.03.2011 Adsorption tube filling for vario TOC select added.
26.10.2012 Description of operation with CLD added.
19.12.2012 Menu description adapted to the new menu structure.
14.05.2013 Injection volume TOC select to 1.5ml changed
02.07.2013 Legend text "filling reaction tubes" changed
13.05.2015 New tubing
02.11.2015 Description "Performing a leak test" modified
10.02.2016 Chapter "Replacing fuses" has been removed.
15.09.2016 Change of address Langenselbold
05.10.2016 Current Declaration of Conformity entered
17.02.2017 Contents checked
06.09.2017 The unit for the absolute element content has been changed.
27.08.2018 Leak test description adapted to vario TOC select

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Appendix 431

Warranty
Target group
Personnel involved with the instrument.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Appendix 432

Warranty of the overall instrument

Warranty of the overall instrument
Please refer to your order for details on the warranty on the overall instrument.

Excluded from the warranty

Wear and tear parts and consumables are excluded from the warranty.

Warranty on the furnace

Warranty on the furnace
Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH gives a 10-year warranty on the furnace. In the event of a
manufacturing or material fault, you will receive a replacement furnace free of charge during the 10
years as of the date of delivery from Elementar.

What is excluded from the warranty?

Damage due to improper use is excluded from the warranty. The following instructions have been
compiled for correct operation of the furnace and must be observed in order to uphold the warranty.

Instructions for operating the furnace

Observe the following instructions for using the furnace so that the warranty is upheld.
 The user must ensure that the furnace is operated according to the instructions.
 The furnace must not be heated in excess of the maximum temperature indicated in the
operating instructions.
 The furnace must not be operated with a voltage higher than that indicated on the type plate.
 In the event of breaks lasting several hours (e.g. overnight downtime) furnace 1 must be reduced
to 900 °C.
 In the event of longer breaks lasting several days (as of 5 days) the furnace must be shut down
(set temperature control to 0 °C).
 The furnace must be protected against penetration of liquids.
 Short-circuits in connection with the heating spirals and/or the thermocouples must be avoided.
 Inner and outer damage to the heating spirals, thermocouples and supply lines must be avoided.
 Only use original parts from Elementar for operation (e.g. combustion tubes/reduction tubes,
fillings, seals, etc.).

In the event of furnace failure, the furnace must be sent into the manufacturer's works at the following
address for fault identification:

Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH,

Elementar-Straße 1,
63505 Langenselbold

Germany

If this analysis reveals that the furnace became defective due to improper use, all warranty claims
shall be forfeited.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Appendix 433

Declaration of conformity
Purpose
This section includes the declaration of conformity of Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH.

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Appendix 434

Declaration of conformity Page 1

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
0 - Appendix 435

Declaration of conformity Page 2

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Index 437

Index
Clean, assemble and install the multiway valve and
2 the injection plug. - 183, 192, 209, 224
21 CFR Part 11 functionality - 59, 74, 337, 338, 339, Cleaning and installing the condenser - 239
340, 421 Cleaning, assembling and installing the ball valve. -
229, 232, 402
A Column properties (Dialog) - 360, 364
Combi view - 64, 66
About this document - 12 Comment modification (Dialog) - 338
Acceptable standard deviation (Dialog) - 377, 387 Conditioning newly installed tubes - 186, 247, 254
Acidify samples (Dialog) - 373 Conditions for operating the LIMS - 73, 341
Acoustic signals (Dialog) - 411 Configure analyzer - 89, 90, 108
Adjust ball valve (Dialog) - 401 Configure backup (Dialog) - 105, 347
Adjust carousel (Dialog) - 402 Configure Calculations (Dialog) - 412
Adjusting the suction and purging needle - 297 Configure calibration (Dialog) - 391
Administrative work on the database - 59, 104, 346, Configure graph view (Dialog) - 362
348, 349 Configure key value (Dialog) - 423
Analysis mode (Dialog) - 377 Configure report - 109, 169, 170, 342, 344
Analysis run - 319 Configure report (Dialog) - 341
Analytical characteristics - 79, 309 Configure statistics view - 109, 161, 364
Analytical characteristics and technical Configure statistics view (Dialog) - 363
specifications - 78 Configure view (Dialog) - 359
Appendix - 429 Configuring error handling - 132, 418
Area assignment (Dialog) - 383 Configuring the graph view - 168, 363
Assessing the calibration curves - 193, 194, 195, Configuring the sample view - 71, 109, 160, 360,
196 365
Connecting peripherals - 117, 118
B Connecting supply lines and waste gas lines - 117,
Background knowledge required for calibration - 40, 119
48, 69, 193, 368, 391, 392 Consequences of modifying analysis data - 100,
Basic facts about working with the instrument - 42 337
Basic functions of the operating software - 62 Copy methods - 417
Basic security settings - 15 Copying documents via the clipboard - 177
Blank values (Dialog) - 380 Creating new documents - 175, 336
Creating new sections - 91, 338, 423, 424
C
D
Calibration - 306
Calibration > Next (Command) - 393 Data administration and data security - 72
Calibration > Next sample (Command) - 393 Data backup and printing - 67, 147, 170, 194, 336,
Calibration > Previous (Command) - 393 342, 344, 363
Calibration > Previous sample (Command) - 393 Database - 59, 340, 349
Calibration coefficients (Dialog) - 390 Database backup - 60, 105, 348
Calibration curve calculation method criteria - 49, 50 Database working environment - 58
Calibration formulae - 49, 53, 392 Declaration of conformity - 433
Calibration menu - 389 Declaration of conformity Page 1 - 434
Calibration table direct method (TC, NPOC) - 199 Declaration of conformity Page 2 - 435
Calibration tables - 49, 193, 198 Default instrument settings - 118, 121
Calibration wizard - 54, 194 Define peak start / end (Dialog) - 382
Calibration Wizard - 367 Define type of peak (Dialog) - 381
Changing the position of the carousel - 273 Defining custom methods - 108, 140, 305, 320, 417
Check list, prior to the analysis run - 306 Defining custom standard substances - 305, 321
Checking documents for authenticity - 102, 179, 340 Defining interfaces - 97
Checklist for blank value, conditioning, daily factor Defining keywords for blank and conditioning
and real samples measurements - 149 samples - 129, 411
Clean database (Dialog) - 348 Defining LIMS export settings - 92

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Index 438

Defining logon timeout - 90, 338, 424 File > New (Command) - 334
Defining maintenance intervals in the software - 71, File menu - 333
184, 185, 211, 216, 227, 236, 241, 244, 254, 260, Filling the absorption tube - 256
399, 400 Filling the acid container - 183, 261, 262
Defining standard substances - 190 Filling the drying tube - 256
Defining standard substances as calibration Filling the filter tubes - 257
samples - 130, 190, 193, 391, 392, 410 Filling the standard reaction tube (Liquid mode) -
Defining standard substances as measuring 192, 246, 289
samples - 129 Filling the standard reaction tube (Solid mode) -
Defining the analyzer / PC interface - 98, 338, 423, 192, 248, 284
424 Filling, removing and installing drying, absorption
Defining the autoexport directory - 104, 338, 423, and filter tubes - 183, 192, 255
424 Finding documents - 176, 336, 337
Defining the LIMS / PC interface - 98, 414 Flushing the analyzer during an analysis run - 155
Delete views (Dialog) - 361 Flushing the combustion tube and the sparger. - 263
Deleting documents - 176 Flushing the combustion tube with salt containing
Description of the determination variants - 153 samples - 264
Detection of measuring components and evaluation Flushing the sparger - 264
of the measuring signal - 36, 40 Formula for determining the daily factor - 57
Determine measuring units and number of decimal Formulae for blank value determination and
places. - 109, 160, 360, 365 compensation - 56, 381
Determining blank values - 150, 240, 244, 272, 380, Formulae for generating statistical data - 162
412 Formulas for determining element concentration of
Determining the daily factor - 151, 412, 418 analysis samples - 40
Device configuration (Dialog) - 98, 421, 424 Front view - 82
Device parameters (Dialog) - 415 Function test - 146
Dialog descriptions key - 332 Functional diagram POC module - 301
Display conventions - 13 Functional diagram TIC module - 311
Display print preview - 170, 342, 344 Functional diagrams - 324
Functional units - 33
E Furnace section - 82
Edit > Copy (Command) - 353 G
Edit > Cut (Command) - 353
Edit > Delete line (Command) - 354 Gases and chemicals to be provided - 116, 184
Edit > Insert line (Command) - 354 General - 11
Edit > Modify (Command) - 355 General information - 309, 323
Edit > Paste (Command) - 354 General information on the operating instructions -
Edit > Redo (Command) - 352 13
Edit > Undo (Command) - 353 General measuring principle POC - 302
Edit > Update hole positions (Command) - 357 General measuring principle TIC - 317
Edit menu - 352 Generating statistical data - 161
Editing analysis data - 99, 176 Granting authorizations - 96, 338, 423, 424
Editing documents - 175
Empty standard reaction tube, liquid mode - 246 H
Empty standard reaction tubes (Solid mode) - 248 Heating up the furnace / checking parameters - 118,
Emptying and filling reaction tubes - 117, 183, 245 121
Enabling/disabling acoustic signals - 132, 411 Help > About... (Command) - 427
Error buffer (Dialog) - 407, 408 Help > Content (Command) - 426
Error display (Dialog) - 408 Help > Elementar GmbH on the WEB (Command) -
Error handling (Dialog) - 108, 418 426
Export analysis data for support - 274, 336, 337 Help > Find (Command) - 426
Export peak graphics (Dialog) - 341 Help menu - 425
Export to LIMS (Dialog) - 340
Exporting analysis data to MS Excel and viewing - I
171, 336, 337
Exporting LIMS data - 172, 341, 414 Important information about maintenance - 182
Importing documents - 178, 346
F Importing weighing data (Solid mode) - 141
Injection volume determination (Liquid mode) - 134
Feeding (Dialog) - 373, 376, 388 Input options (Dialog) - 108, 408
File > Delete (Command) - 338 Insert flushing sequence (Dialog) - 375
File > Exit (Command) - 350 Installation - 325
File > Export/Import > Create Excel sheet Installation and initial start up of the TIC module -
(Command) - 351 314
File > Logoff (Command) - 350

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Index 439

Installation site requirements - 115, 117 Modifying from single mode to automatic operation -
Installing and updating the software - 88, 121 286
Installing standard reaction tubes in the furnace and Modifying the instrument - 282
conditioning - 117, 183, 252, 401, 404, 405 Modifying the registration - 111, 427
Installing the ash crucible (lliquid mode) - 205, 208 Monthly logbook (Dialog) - 420
Installing the ash finger (solids mode) - 213
Installing used tubes - 185, 400 O
Instructions for disposal of consumables - 17 Open (Dialog) - 346
Instructions for operating the furnace - 115 Operation with the chemiluminescence detector
Instrument design - 81 (CLD) - 322
Instrument equipment - 45 Optimizing basic instrument settings - 108, 417,
Instrument variants - 278 418, 419, 423
Intended use of the instrument - 17 Optimizing data evaluation - 109, 343, 344, 361
Interpreting PC error messages - 66, 268, 407, 408, Optimizing instrument condition for calibration - 192,
418 193, 405
K Optimizing sample data editing - 108, 355, 409
Optimizing sleep and wake-up behavior - 108, 142,
Kalibration table difference method (TIC/TC) - 199 419
Keywords (Dialog) - 410 Options > Diagnostics > Baseline recording
(Command) - 408
L Options > Maintenance > Flush acid path
Laboratory information and management system (Command) - 403
(LIMS) - 73, 341, 415 Options menu - 398
Layout and mode of functioning - 32 Overview of export and import file formats - 171,
Leak test: Test phases (Dialog) - 404 337, 346
Leak test (Dialog) - 270, 403 P
Leak test procedure - 270
Left side view - 84 Performing a leak test - 269
Limits for modifying analysis data - 100 Performing a measuring series - 144, 373, 377, 388
LIMS export settings - 93, 341, 415 Performing a system test - 268, 407
LIMS settings (Dialog) - 98, 341, 412 Performing checks - 101
Linking the analyzer and software - 75 Performing measurement work - 118, 143, 374
Load views (Dialog) - 361 Performing other administrator tasks - 110
Loading a sample view - 161, 361 Performing routine measuring work - 118, 147, 380
Log in as (Dialog) - 349 Performing the calibration - 49, 183, 189, 193, 374,
391, 392
M Peripherals and their function - 86
Maintain multiway valve and injection plug - 220 Perparing the measurement of low/high N
Maintain syringe - 183, 192, 242, 243 concentrations - 327
Maintaining the ball valve (solids mode) - 228 Preparing and following up maintenance work - 185,
Maintaining the instrument - 181 211, 229, 233, 238, 251, 253, 260, 401, 404, 405
Maintenance intervals (Dialog) - 399 Preparing measurement work - 137
Maintenance status EC cell (Dialog) - 400 Preparing measuring data for evaluation - 159
Maintenance work - 307 Preparing samples - 133, 147
Maintenance work to be performed by the customer Print (Dialog) - 109, 343
- 183, 400, 404, 405 Print preview (Dialog) - 109, 344
Manual peak integration - 165, 382, 383 Printer setup - 109, 111, 345
Math > Blank values > Calculate (Command) - 380 Printer setup (Dialog) - 345
Math menu - 379 Prioritizing urgent samples - 142, 355
Math. > Factor (Command) - 381 Processes in the instrument during a measurement
Math. > Recalculate (Command) - 384 - 37
Math. > System suitability test (Command) - 381 Product description - 77
Measurement settings - 118, 128 Product registration (Dialog) - 426
Measurements in the trace range - 156 R
Measuring different parameters - 40
Menu and dialog descriptions - 63, 331 Reacting to a power failure - 271, 357, 374, 404,
Menu Wizards - 366 405
Method (Dialog) - 416 Rear view - 83
Modification to POC mode - 303 Recommendations for user administration - 95
Modification to POC operation - 299 Reloading an old database file - 106, 349
Modifying from automatic liquid operation to Remove and dismantle the multiway valve and the
automatic solids operation - 293 injection plug - 221
Modifying from single mode - 283 Remove the ash finger (solids mode) - 211

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Index 440

Removing and dismantling the ball valve - 229 Shutting the instrument down for long measuring
Removing and installing drying, absorption and filter breaks (switching off) - 124
tubes - 258 Shutting the instrument down for short measuring
Removing sealing elements from grooves - 219 breaks (standby) - 124, 419
Removing the ash crucible (liquid mode) - 205 Sign (Dialog) - 339
Removing the condenser - 238 Signing documents - 102, 178, 339
Removing the standard reaction tube from the Sleep / wake-up function (Dialog) - 418
furnace - 183, 251, 252 Software usage rules - 138
Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel - 200 Software user interface - 63
Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel Specify lower and upper calibration range (Dialog) -
(liquid mode) - 201 392
Removing, cleaning and installing the carousel Specifying the computation method for blank value
(solids mode) - 202 and daily factor - 131, 380, 412
Removing, cleaning and installing the condenser - Standard samples (Dialog) - 409, 418
237 Standard samples display (Dialog) - 383
Removing/installing and conditioning the reaction Starting the database backup - 105, 183, 348
tubes - 250 Starting the operating software - 118, 138, 292, 350
Reorganize database - 105, 338, 349 Starting up and shutting down the instrument - 113
Repairing the instrument - 267 Start-up - 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 404, 405
Replace part (Dialog) - 400 Statistics > Clear statistic (Command) - 386
Replacement of the ash crucible/finger - 183, 192, Statistics > Create Excel sheet (Command) - 388
204, 205 Statistics > Delete group (Command) - 386
Replacing sealing elements - 183, 217, 240, 273 Statistics > Group (Command) - 386
Representation of safety instructions - 16 Statistics > Include/Exclude sample (Command) -
Required personal safety equipment - 23 387
Required user knowledge and skills - 23 Statistics > Include/Exclude value (Command) - 387
Restore database (Dialog) - 106, 349 Statistics > Sort group (Command) - 386
Revision history - 430 Statistics > Via names (Command) - 386
Re-weighing after sample loss (Solid mode) - 274 Statistics menu - 385
Right mouse button function - 71, 356, 357, 363, Status view - 64, 70
364, 365, 392 Stopping continuous analysis - 158, 273, 356
Right side view - 83 Substance digestion and preparation of the reaction
Routine measuring work - 55, 381 gas mixture - 35, 39
Rules for first-time start-up - 115 Swap samples (Dialog) - 109, 355
Switching on - 117, 120
S System > Arm Down (Command) - 375
Safety devices in the analyzer - 17, 20 System > Arm Up (Command) - 375
Safety instructions - 16 System > Auto run (Command) - 372
Sample insertion and initiation of measurement - 35, System > Auto zero (Command) - 375
38, 402 System > Single run (Command) - 372
Sample packing (Solids mode) - 135 System > Stirrer (Command) - 375
Sample preparation instructions - 134 System > Stop (Command) - 372
Sample view - 64 System > Wake up (Command) - 376
Save file as (Dialog) - 337 System menu - 371
Save views (Dialog) - 360 System Suitability Test - 163, 370, 381
Saving the sample view - 109, 161, 361 System suitability test wizard - 369, 381
Scope of delivery - 300, 309 System test (Dialog) - 269, 406
Select carousel position (Dialog) - 373 T
Select columns (Dialog) - 364
Select current sample (Dialog) - 356 Technical specifications - 79, 310, 323
Select document name (Dialog) - 334, 337 The basic model - 279
Select period (Dialog) - 421 The components - 300, 313
Select version (Dialog) - 336 The model with automatic sampler in liquid mode -
Selecting the operating mode - 138, 285, 303, 316, 279
378 The stirring unit - 290, 291, 295, 296
Set current weighed sample (Dialog) - 357 The variant with automatic sampler in solids mode -
Set stop tag (Dialog) - 355 280
Setting device parameters - 43, 121, 192, 416 TIC solids module - 308
Setting the size of the graph - 109, 169, 359 Toolbar - 64, 395
Setting up and starting up the instrument - 114 Top view - 85
Setting up user administration - 94 Types of blank value determination and their
Settings for sample input - 140, 409 settings - 148, 150, 192, 381
Showing or hiding the toolbar - 138
Shutting down the instrument - 123

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH
Index 441

U
Understanding the instrument and planning its use -
31
Understanding the operating software - 61
User administration - 95, 350
Using the instrument - 127

V
Variants and modifications - 277
Verify digital signature (Dialog) - 339
Versioning - 74, 75, 337
View > Gaphic > Auto align (Command) - 363
View > Gridview > Auto align (Command) - 362
View > Statistic > Auto align (Command) - 364
View > Toggle (Command) - 359
View menu - 358
Viewing calibration coefficients - 192, 391
Viewing list of defined factor, monitor and standard
samples - 129, 190, 410
Viewing method settings - 139, 417
Viewing the logbook - 103, 421
Viewing the status of maintenance intervals - 184,
400

W
Waking up the instrument - 139
Warning: changes to the instrument - 23; residual
risks - 19
Warning notes during operation - 24, 90, 91, 96, 98,
104, 105, 106, 120, 121, 139, 146, 147, 148, 151,
186, 187, 193, 201, 202, 205, 206, 208, 211, 214,
221, 224, 229, 233, 238, 239, 243, 246, 247, 248,
249, 251, 252, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 262, 264,
283, 286, 293, 303, 317, 401, 422, 424
Warning signs on the analyzer - 22
Warranty - 431
Warranty of the overall instrument - 432
Warranty on the furnace - 115, 432
Ways of optimizing the use of the analyzer - 107
Weighing window (Dialog) - 396
What can you modify in the configuration? - 90, 423
What to do after a computer crash - 271
When does it make sense to edit analysis data? -
100
When to replace sealing elements - 218
Windows > Default layout (Command) - 397
Windows > Recent sample (Command) - 396
Windows > Status view (Command) - 396
Windows > Toolbar / Run-Bar (Command) - 395
Windows menu - 394
Work performed by the system administrator - 87
Working with documents - 174
Working with the database - 104
Working with the operating instructions - 16

Z
Zoom in/out (Dialog) - 359

Operating instructions vario TOC cube vario TOC select ©Elementar Analysensysteme GmbH